Users Manual of Hongqi 430/300

Hongqi 430/300
～Basic Operation of Intelligence Entry & Start-up System～
Users can open and close the car door, automatically open the boot
door, and start and stop the engine ,only if bring the key !

●Car door rear-view foot-light and interior lamp in frontside will light when
approaching to the car.
Lock Unlock

②Toutch the senser on

②Press down the switch
the door handle inside

②Press down the switch ②Press down the switch

Automatically open the boot

① Bring smart key ②Press down the switch

Engine Start-up

Engine switch

Brake
pedal
Smart key

1.Step down the brake peda 2 Press the engine switch, and start the engine

Indicator

Brake pedal
Engine switch

While not stepping the brake pedal, press the engine switch to shift the condition
of power resource.
OFF(Indicator Lighting is off )→ACC (Indicator lighting is orange)→IG
(Indicator lighting is orange) →OFF→ ACC
Engine Turn-off
While the car is stopped completely, press the engine switch to turn off the
engine.

lease refer to Methods of Engine Start-up & Turn-off with Intelligent Function of Key in
User Handbook (P63)of Redflag 430/300
 Preface

Thanks for Choosing Hongqi 430,300 Car!

Hongqi 430,3D0 car has the most advance technology and many luxurious equipments. Before
you drive off, please read this manual carefully for your safe and comfortable driving.
The manual mainly includes the using method, safe driving, maintenance and other basic
information. Meanwhile, there are also some suggestions and help which are very useful for
you.
Besides this manual, the vehicle materials also include the Maintenance Manual. That manual
records the important maintenance information of Hongqi 430/300 cars and it is also the basis
of your regular maintenance. In addition, there is also the instruction of navigation system
(limits to the type with navigation system) in the vehicle materials. For easy consultation, it is
suggested that you should keep the vehicle materials in your car properly. When transferring
this car, please give this User Manual and Maintenance Manual to new user.
This manual is compiled on the basis of the product structure at the time of its publication. It
will be revised in case there is any modification. Regarding to the modified items, please
forgive that they will not be notified again.
Please consult your FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre if you still have any questions to the
car.
Wish you a pleasant driving!

Note: this manual only applies to all the types, equipments and the selected items of Hongqi
430 car and Hongqi 300 cars, so you may find some explanation or equipments do not apply to
your car.

China FAW Group Corporation

1
 Content of this manual
This handbook is consisted of seven chapters.
The first chapter, Precautions for Safe Driving, is great significant.
Please check for details.

Chpater 1:Issues must be followedfor safety driving

…………………………………………………………………………………
This chapter indicates some special cautions to prevent any potentional cause
of heavy damage and accident, and car fire, some general cautions, and
prevention measures. Please read caerfully.

Chpater 2:The using method of driving devices

…………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate the usage methods of entry & starting of intelligent system,
opening & closing of door, seat, seat belt, gear pole, instrument, and switch.

Chpater 3:The using method of equipments in the car

…………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate the usges methods of interior configures (inside lighting, glovebox,
etc. )

Chpater 4:Instructions of safe and comfortable equipments and precautions

……………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate the function and the precaution for usage of SRS, ABS, and other
devices of safety and comfortbility.

Chpater 5:The best using method of the car

……………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate different driving methods of car in different season, which shall be
both econical and environment-friendly.

Chpater 6：Maintenance
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate the methods of maintenance and the regular inspection items.

Chpater 7:Treatment in emergency

…………………………………………………………………………………
Indicate the solutions for failure, tire breaking, and other emergencies.

2
Marks
Related safety marks
The below marks present Items that may hurt driver or other person,
and Items that may cause car fault or damage, and the prevention
measures for them. Such informations are important. Must check and
follow them seriously.

If breaching the described items, may cause heavy

damage and accident. May cause car fire. May even
Warning
cause fatality.
If breaching the descibed items, may cause
Attention personnel injury, car fault or damage.

Other marks
The below mark presents Common Sense need to know, and Items
need to known in advance.
Common Sense need to know
Common sense Items need to known in advance

Safety Figure Mark

The below mark presents the forbidden action.

Forbidden action

3
Reading Method of Operation Introduction (Chapter 2—7 )
Explanation of basical reading method for operation introduction (Chapter 2—7 )
Title ★ Main title Small window
Explain in layer Inform that the Indicate the
Indicate the content content of each
equipment installed
in each page chapter
is different for
different level of car

Switchs of each part

Opening & Closing

of each position
Opening & Closing of door
Methods of locking & unlocing
lock,or unlock with key
The Using
Turn left to lock, turn right to unlock Metho
■Can open, or lock all doors Of
lock Drivin
unlock g
The front of car

Warning Before driving, please check whether all doors are closed.
While the door is not closed completely, it is possible to
open suddenly while travelling, which can cause accident
Attention Even pull the inside handle of rear door on the sidewith Child
Protection Lock, the convenient locking device can still work.
Make use of child protection device carefully.

Common sense
Key
The key is used to lock, and unlock the car door, and to start and stop the engine

The equipment is available or not for different level of car

Key points ofoperation Common sense Attention Warning

Indicate the key points Please refer to the Please refer to Please refer to
of operation. above page. the above page. the above page.

The illustration on this page is an example,the real vehicle may differ

from the description stated in the manual.

4
Methods of Searching
This manual introduces the following format for user to have fast
reading and understanding:

Search in the titles 6

Wants music ■Content
■Titles in samll windows
Titles in samll ■Content for each chapter
Purpose windows

What is
this switch
Searching in installation positions 8
for?
■Content of figures

Position

What is
Searching in names
wiper?
■Index of Chinese Bopomofo

Name

Searching in alarm lightings

■Index of alarm lighting

Alarm
light

5
Contents
Illustrated Catalogue ……….8

·For safe and comfortable driving 14

1 Issues Must Be Followed For Safe ·Safe Device 26
and Comfortable Driving 12
·Function of Key and Its Using Method 60
·0pening and closing for the doors and windows103
2 The Using Method of Driving ·Anti-theft System 130
·Correct driving posture 135
Devices 62
· Front seats 137
·Rear seats 14
·Using Method of Parking Brake Pedal 178
·Cruise Information Display . 194
·The using method of equipments in the car 27
3 Using Method of Vehicle
·Audio System 288
Equipment 267
·SRS Safety airbag 304
Descriptions and Attention
4 ·Relevant Items of seat belt 317
Points of Safe and Comfortable ·ABS with EBD and Brake Assist Device 319
Device 304 ·VSC 324

·Relevant Items about Driving on Rainy Day 334

5 The Best Operation Method of
the Vehicle 333 ·Using Attentive Matters in Cold Season 336

6 Maintenance 348

·Tools, spare tyre 380

7 Deal with Emergency 380 ·When vehicle breakdown 382
·Tyre Blowout 384

Index 404 ·Index 404

6
 Contents
·Driving Device 39 ·Overheated and Emergency 51
·Maintenance 44 ·Other Notices 54
！

Warning
·Adjustment of steering wheel and rearview mirror 162
·Using Method of Selector Lever 167
·Driving Method of Automatic Transmission Vehicle 173

The using method

of driving device
·Using Method of Parking Brake Pedal 178
·Identification of Instrument, Indicator and Warning Light 179
·Comprehensive Information Display 194
·Front windshield display 204
·Irradiation scope of night view system 206
·Method for using switches 212
·Method for using cruise device 225
·Parking auxiliary monitor 230

Using method
the devices
the car

Instructions
·Anti-collision Safe System 328

and comfortable
equipments and
precautions

in
·TRC218 Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre 330

of of safe The best

·Slope-starting Assist Control Device 327
·High Intensity Discharge Headlamp 327

using method
of the car
·Economic Driving 345
·To protect environment 347

Mainte
nance

·Maintenance data 371

emergency

Treatment

·When the battery is in low power 393

·Over-heat 397
·Traction 400
in

·Emergency treatment methods 403

Index

7
Illustrated Catalogue

Instrument Panel
Headlight cleaner switch 218
Rotary button of instrument brightness 181
Switch of the lamp 212
Turning indicator lever 216
Fog lamp switch 215, 216
Main switch of distance sonar Please refer to the
The user manual of navigation system
Odometer／Trip recorder 180
Itinerary Reset button 180
Car alarm indicator 186
Identification of Instrument, Indicator and Warning Light 179
Comprehensive Information Display 194
Night Vision 204
HUD main switch 206

Engine switch 62
Brightness adjusting switch 204
Position adjustment switch 204
Cruise control switch 225
Wiper and washer
Switch 191
Horn 204
Microcomputer memory preliminary adjustment
Steering wheel 162
Intelligent Key hole 80
Open and close of the engine hatch cover 129
Rear seat back position return switch 151
AFS OFF switch 224
Switch of Filler Cover 127
Door rearview mirror return switch 164
Door rearview mirror adjusting switch 165
* Some fittings may be not equipped because of the car grade difference.

8
 Illustrated Catalogue

Contents
Instrument Panel

Warning
Front passenger seat SRS safety airbag 304
Front passenger seat SRS knee airbag 304 ！
Storage box 24l
Second driving seat heater switch 144

The using method

of driving device
Air conditioner, audio Please refer to the User Manual of cruise
system Electronic multifunctional display Please refer to the User
Manual of navigation system
Clock 273
Emergency flasher switch 222
Heating wire embedded front windscreen heating switch
220

Using method of
the devices in
the car

Instructions of safe
and comfortable
equipments and
precautions
Cup stand 280
TRC 0FF switch 196
Electronic rear sunshade
switch 282

using method
of the car

The best
Ashtray／cigar lighter 276、277
ECT mode option switch 186
Driving seat heater switch 144 Mainte
nance

Rear window defroster and

rear view mirror heater switch 220
Driving seat SRS safety airbag 304
emergency

Treatment

DISP switch 194

Driving seat SRS airbag 304
Steering wheel audio control switch Please refer to User Manual of cruise system
in

Parking braking pedal 178

Parking brake release handle 178
Coin box 273
Index

9
 Illustrated Catalogue

Interior (Front Part)

Sun visor／Dressing glass 267
Vanity 267
Anti-glare rearview mirror 163
Anti-invasion sensor OFF switch 132
Front part headlamp 268
Skylight switch 114
Plasma generator switch Please refer to User Manual of
navigation system
Methods of application of the deriver seat pre-adjusting device
based on computer memory technology 140
Door glass control switch 110
Front and rear sRs curtain airbag 305
Front and rear seat safety belt 157
Safety belt fixing device of adjustable seat 157

Front seat sRs side safety airbag 304

Storage box of second instrument panel 271
Luggage boot opening switch (inside) 118
Front seat 136
Gear shift lever 167
■Feet part of driving seat

Tyre Pressure
Adjustment switch 392
Intelligent function of key
Removal Switch 83 * The optional accessories which were

reserved by user are included.

10
 Illustrated Catalogue

Contents
Interior (Rear Part)
Front and rear sRs curtain airbag 304

Warning
Rear ashtray 274
Rear sunshade (manual) 282 ！
Reading lamp (adjustable) 271
Freezer 276

The using method

of driving device
Rear seat small sundries box 271
Electric rear window sunshade 282

Using method of
the devices in
the car

Instructions of safe
and comfortable
equipments and
precautions
Rear seat safety belt 157
Rear seat 147

■Rear Control Devices

using method
of the car

The best
Regulating switch of the inclination angle of left rear seat back 144
Switch of the heater in the left rear seat 145

Switch of the heater in the right rear seat 146 Mainte

nance

Regulating switch of the inclination angle of right rear seat back 144
emergency

Treatment
in

Rear Controller (air conditioner) Please refer to the User Manual of navigation system
Electronic rear window sunshade switch 283
Index

Rear Controller (air conditioner) Please refer to

* The optional accessories which were
the User Manual of navigation system
reserved by user are included.
11
 Illustrated Catalogue

Exterior

Luggage opening switch (exterior) 67

Electric luggage chamber cover 116
Engine bonnet 122
Child protection devices handle 108
Wiper 217

License plate lamp 317

Rear tail lamp 317

Head lamp 317

Tyre 376、381
Side steering lamp 375
Door rear view mirror 151
Gas tank cover 127 * The optional accessories which

were reserved by user are included.

12
Issues Must Be Followed For Safe
and Comfortable Driving
1
In this chapter, “matters which may cause serious injuries, accident
and car fire” and “general notices” and their preventive measures.
The contents of this part is very important, so please read carefully.
Warning
！

For safe and comfortable Maintenance………………… 44

driving…………………………14 1. Notices related to check and maintenance 44
1．Maintenance requirements 14 2. Notices related to the tyre 46
2. Preparation before driving 14 3. Notices related to the battery 50
3. Notices of oil filling 16 4. Notice related to the jack 51
4. Notices during driving 17 Overheated and Emergency…51
5.When there is abnormity found during driving 20 1. Notices when overheated 52
6. Notices of parking or stopping the vehicle 22 2. Notices under emergency 52
7. Pay attention to vehicle exhaust 23 Other Notices………………….54
8. Notices when there is child in the vehicle 24

Safety Device…………………..26
1. Notices related to seat 26
2. Notices related to child special use seat 27
3. Notice related to seat safety belt 30
4. Notices related to SRS air bag 33
5. Notices related to ABS with EBD and brake
auxiliary device 37
6. Notices related to RC and VSC 37
7. Notices related to anti-collision safe device 38

Driving device………………………………..39
1. Notice related to automatic transmission vehicle
39
2. Notices related to cruise device 41
3. Notices related to intelligence enter and starting
system 41
4. Notices related to front windscreen glass display
indicator 41
5. Notices related to night vision system 41

13
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

1. Maintenance requirements

警 Maintenance must to be carried out

告！ Otherwise it may cause big malfunction.
①Maintenance must to be carried out.
●Carry out daily and periodic maintenance to the car is the
responsibility and obligation of the user.
Detailed information of daily maintenance (refer to P300) and periodic
1Maintenance /2Preparation before starting up

maintenance please read Maintenance Manual.

·It is a must to carry out periodic maintenance from the point of safety
and environmental protection.
It needs to use special maintenance tools, replace the specified grease and dispose the replaced parts and wasted
liquid for the periodic maintenance, so please contact FAW Hongqi sales and service center.
●Maintenance is one of the health diagnosis means to the vehicle.
The vehicle should be maintained periodically. Maintain and replace the components necessarily, which is very
important to keep the car at a better situation.
●It may cause deficiency or deterioration of the engine lubricant, and the interior components of the engine will
be easy to be damaged if there is no periodic maintenance. Brake block and brake disc or other components will
be worn during working; they may fail to brake and cause big accident if they are worn heavily.
●Please contact with FAW sales and service center immediately if you find there are abnormal situations or bad
vehicle situations during daily maintenance.
②It is a must to check and maintain your car in a FAW sales and service center which can deal with Hongqi
430 and 300.
●Please contact with FAW sales and service center which can deal with Hongqi 430/300 when you check and
maintain your car, because you need change vehicle n to maintenance mode.
2. Preparation before driving

It is a must to abide by the following items before driving.

Otherwise, it may cause big accident or cause serious personnel injury.
①Do not start the engine outside of the sedan.
●It may cause accident; it is a must to start the engine sitting in the driver seat.
②Do not step down the accelerator heavily before the water temperature
gauge moving.
●It may cause the incombustible gas burning abnormally and damage the catalyzing
devices because the engine is not warmed up.
●The car can be regarded as warmed up as far as the water temperature gauge moves.
③ Confirm all the doors are closed tightly before driving.
● Otherwise the door may open abruptly during driving and cause major accident. The door warning indicator will
be lit if one door is not closed tightly. At he same time, the warning information of the unclosed door will be
displayed on the display (please refer to P173 and P176).
④ Clean the snow and fallen leaves away from the air intake on the lower rim of front windscreen in time.
●Otherwise the fresh air will not be sucked in; it will influence visual
field when it rains and the interior temperature increases because there
is mist on the glass.

14
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving
⑤ Adjust steering wheel position when the car is stopped and
makes sure it is locked.
●It may change the steering position abruptly during driving and
cause accident if the steering wheel position is not locked.
⑥ Do not put anything on the feet position of driver side and
under driver seat.
●It may cause accident if there is empty can over there it will be
blocked under brake pedal and accelerator pedal making the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal can not be operated.
In addition, the staff over there may influence the adjustment or lock of seat which may
causing accident.
⑦ Do not use improper floor mat.
● If the floor mat is not paved correctly or there are two layers of Fixing Clip
floor mat, it may influence the operations of brake pedal and
accelerator pedal. This may cause the accident.
● Use correct floor mat and fix it by clip to prevent moving. Hole of floor mat
The fixation hole on FAW original floor mat is used for the clip
to fix the floor.
⑧ Do not stack goods on co-driver’s seat or rear seats.
● The goods may fly and hurt passenger during emergency brake
or sharp turning; and also you may pay more attention to the goods
during driving which may cause accident.
● Put the goods in luggage compartment stably (for example, put
the goods in the front side of luggage compartment evenly).
⑨ Do not keep container or can with fuel on the car.
● It may cause fire if they are fired.
⑩ Make sure the engine compartment cover is locked if you opened it before driving.
● The engine cover may be opened abruptly during and cause accident if it is not locked.

15
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

⑾ It indicates there is malfunction when the following situations appear. It may influence
the driving performance even cause accident if you continue
to run. Please go to FAW sales and service center for check.
● When there is abnormal noise, peculiar smell or vibration.
● When the steering wheel operation is abnormal.
● When the brake oil is not enough.
● When there is oil leakage mark on the ground.
● When the instruments, indicator, warning lamp or lights are abnormal.
⑿ It is strictly prohibited to drive after drinking.
● It is prohibited to drive after drinking in the law.
● It is very dangerous to drive after drinking; even little alcohol may
influence the judgment, vision and attention of the driver. This may cause major accident.
⒀ Make sure there is no small animals as cat or mouse etc. inside of engine compartment
or inside/outside of the vehicle.
● Small animal may be winded by the fan and belt which may influence the engine working
when the engine is started.
3．Notices of oil filling
It is a must to abide by the following items during oil filling.
Otherwise it may cause serious personnel injury.

① Do not use the fuel outside of the appointment.

● Specified fuel means lead free and high octane content (lead free with high octane value) fuel.
If it is unavailable use lead free standard gasoline; but it will
influence the engine power.
● It may influence the start performance of the engine and appear the
phenomenon like knock or power decreasing if the fuel outside of
appointments are used (bad gasoline etc.). It may cause engine
malfunction, damage fuel system components resulting in fuel leakage Outside of
if the bad fuel is used continuously; so it is a must to use the specified appointments
fuel.
② It is a must to abide by the following notices during oil filling.
● It is a must to stop the engine.
● Close the door and windows.
● Do not let the smoke and fire go near to the vehicle.
● Eliminate the static electricity from the vehicle body caused by contacting with the vehicle
metal parts before opening the oil filling port cover and fuel tank cover. It may cause fuel firing
and burn causing by the discharged spark when the there is electricity on the person.

16
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

● Catch the knob on the cover and open it slowly when you want
to open the fuel tank cover.
There may be fuel overflows out from fuel tank port when the
temperature is higher causing the higher pressure inside of fuel tank.
If there is sound “sou” appeared during fuel tank cover loosing,
please do not continue your operation. Open it slowly until that
kind of sound disappeared.
● Do not sit inside of the vehicle or contact with electriferous Grip part
person or goods during fuel filling. (it may cause the second time electrified)
● The person who is with static electricity can not go near to oil filling port.
● Fasten the fuel tank cover rightwards until the sound “Kacha”
is heard after oil filling; and confirm it.
● Use FAW original fuel tank cover fitting for the vehicle; do Chug
not use the covers of other brands.
● In addition, abide by all the notices of the fuel station.
③ Do not breathe in the volatilized fuel during fuel filling.
● There is harmful ingredient inside of the fuel so you should
pay attention to that.

4. Notice during driving

It is a must to abide by the following items during driving.
Otherwise it may cause major accident or serious personnel
injury even death.
① Do not turn off the engine during driving.
● Brake boosting device and power steering device will be invalid
if the engine is at non-working status; this will make the brake
performance worse, the steering wheel operation heavier which
may lead to accident.
● Wrong and continuous push engine switch during driving will
stop the engine and easy to cause accident. (the vehicle with
intelligent input and starting system).
② Do not adjust the positions of steering wheel, rearview
mirror or driver’s seat.
● It will easy to cause accident if the vehicle operation is
influenced by the adjustment action or the seat moving suddenly.
③ Do not drive the vehicle when the rearview mirror is folded.
● You can not judge the situations behind the vehicle through
rearview mirror; this will easy to cause accident.
④ Do not drive the vehicle by stepping down the brake pedal
or parking brake.

17
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

● It may lead too early brake pads worn or brake overheated; thus will influence the brake performance and easy
to cause accident.
⑤ Also use engine brake at downgrade.
● If the vehicle runs downgrade with the brake pedal stepped down continuously; Also use
it may decrease the brake efficiency, because of the overheating, which may cause
accident engine
⑥ Start the engine if you want to move the vehicle. brake
● Brake boosting device and power steering device will be invalid if the engine is
at non-working status; this will make the brake performance worse, the steering
wheel operation heavier which may lead to accident.
● It is strictly prohibited to slip the vehicle on the downgrade with the engine
off; this may cause accident.
⑦ Do not keep the steering wheel at its full rotated status for a long time.
● Occasionally the steering wheel is heavier to operate, which is to prevent the
motor or ECU from overheating, when the steering wheel is repeated turned as
the vehicle is stopped or running at overly low speed, or the steering wheel is at
full rotated status for a long time. If it happened, do not rotate the steering wheel
Stop for a while
for a while and it will return to normal for a moment.
⑧ Please do not use non-vehicle using phone or mobile phone during driving.
● It is prohibited to use non-vehicle using phone or mobile phone during driving in
the law.
● Normally the attention during driving is paid on the phone if you use it, which
may cause accident. Please park the vehicle on a safety place when the driver uses
non-vehicle using phone or mobile phone.
⑨ Be carefully when the vehicle runs on the road with altitude difference.
● Please decelerate and drive carefully when you drive on the following road conditions where the bumper may be
damaged.
· When the vehicle runs on the road with steps like park in/out door;
· When the vehicle runs on the road with steep gradient like sharp turning of
stereoscopic park;
· When the vehicle is stopped on the road with deceleration heave or along the
road shoulder;
· When the vehicle runs on the off-road or the road with wheel tracks;
· When the vehicle runs on the road with pits;
· When the vehicle runs from flat road to upgrade and downgrade or from Ka Deng
upgrade and downgrade to flat road.
⑩ Please be careful when the vehicle runs on a wet, snowy, icy or slippery
road.
● The tyre is easy to sideslip when implement emergency brake, urgent
acceleration and rapid rotation of steering wheel on the slippery road; and the
vehicle is difficult to control and will cause accident.
● Engine brake and engine speed will be changed rapidly, which may cause vehicle
sideslip and lead to accident, when the shift lever is changed.
● Drive slowly on the bridge surface and shade place where the ice is easy to be
formed in the cold winter.
● Be careful in the raining when you drive on a slippery road.

18
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

⑾ Please do not drive on the road with ponding.

● If the vehicle runs on a road with ponding, it is easy to cause engine off,
short circuit and water coming in of electrical parts or damage the engine,
which will lead to serious vehicle accident.
In case of running on the road with ponding and there is water coming
into the vehicle, it is a must to carry out the following checks in FAW
Hongqi sales and service center.
· Check the brake performance;
· Check the oil quantity and oil quality situations of engine,
transmission and differential (the lubricant should be replaced when it is white and turbid because there is water
mixed).
· Lubrication situation of driving shaft, every bearing and every joint.
⑿ Please do not press front defroster switch when the AC is turned on under big humidity.
● The temperature difference between outside and windscreen may
make a mist on the outside surface of the windscreen sometimes; this
will influence the visual field.
⒀ When the vehicle is plunged
※ On the roads as muddy road, sandstone road, deep snowy road,
and the driving wheels are idle running making the wheels plunged and
can not drive.
● First make sure it is safe around the vehicle, when the vehicle is
plunged, to avoid personnel injury or death.
● Do not make the tyres run with a high speed, otherwise the tyres may
break and the driving components (differential gears etc.) may overheated; this will lead to accident.
●Unavoidable repeated go forward or reverse, in order to lay the vehicle outside of the difficulty, may damage
differential and differential gear; so please pay attention to the following items.
· Step the accelerator pedal slightly after confirming shift lever is at D or R shift. Never step the accelerator
during shift lever operation;
· Please do not run engine and tyres at idle with too high speed;
· Step down brake pedal slowly after the engine speed decreased when the tyres are running at idle;
· Please stop the operation if you can not get the vehicle out of the difficulty may times.
● Use the following methods to get the vehicle out of sliding pit.
· Take away the earth or snow in front and rear of tyres:
· Fill up some wood or rocks under tyres.
● It is easy to damage the suspension components if the towing hook is
hanging on suspension components.
⒁ Please do not continue to drive when the door warning lamp is lit
or the information of door is not closed tightly displayed.
● If the door is really not closed tightly, it is easy to be opened during
running and cause accident.
⒂ Please do not continue to drive when there is information about the engine compartment cover or luggage
compartment cover is not closed tightly displayed.
● Engine compartment cover or luggage compartment cover are really easy to be opened abruptly during driving
if they are not closed tightly; this will cause accident.
⒃ Step down brake pedal slightly after the vehicle is washed or runs on the road with ponding to make sure
the brake performance working properly.
● If brake pads are wet, the brake performance will be decreased; this may cause accident.
● Pay attention to the around situations when the brake performance is bad; repeated step down brake pedal
slightly until it returns to normal.

19
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving
⒄ Passengers can not leave seat or walk inside of vehicle
during driving.
● Otherwise, the body and head will easy to be hurt during
emergency brake.
⒅ Please do not reach your hand or head out of windows or
sunroof.
● Hand or head is easy to be bumped on window frame causing
serious injury or death during vehicle emergency brake if you
reach them out in driving.
● Please do not sit just below the sunroof to prevent the roof
falling down or you are thrown out of the vehicle causing serious injury or even death.

⒆ Please note do not hurt others’ hand or head when you close
window glass or sunroof.
● It is very dangerous and cause serious injury if the head or
hand is nipped by window glass or sunroof when they are closed;

⒇ Please do not drive the vehicle with glove box cover and mess box cover opened.
● Goods are easy to be thrown out of vehicle during emergency
brake and cause accident.
(21) Please do not drive with goods on instrument panel.
● The goods on instrument panel will block the driver’s visual
field and influence the start and driving safety; it is easy to
cause accident.
5. When there is abnormity found during driving
It is a must to pay attention to the following items if there is abnormity found
during driving. Otherwise there may be accident even serious injury. Main warning lamp

① Please park the vehicle on a safety place quickly and check what the
problem is when the warning lamp or main warning lamp is lit or twinkled.
It is easy to cause accident or damage the engine components if you
are driving with the warning lamp lit or twinkled. Please confirm the
warning item and get rid of the trouble (refer to P169). Warning lamp

20
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

② Please do not continue the driving with brake warning lamp lit.
● Please park the vehicle on a safety place quickly and contact with FAW sales and service
center when the warning lamp is lit.
· Release parking brake with the engine at working status, but the brake warning lamp is
still lit, this is easy to decline the brake performance and prolong brake distance
Braking warning lamp (red)
causing accident; step down the brake pedal with big force when the brake efficiency
decreased.
· Brake warning lamp, ABS and brake auxiliary system warning lamp are lit at the same time:
Here not only the ABS and brake auxiliary system go wrong, over big brake force will bring unstable factors to
vehicle.
③ Please operate smoothly when stop the engine.
● Brake auxiliary device and power steering motor will stop working when the engine stops, so the brake
effectiveness will be declined and the operation of steering wheel will be heavier.
Then brake force is not lost completely so you need a bigger force to operate; park the vehicle near road
shoulder after making sure it is safety around.
④ Be calm when there is tyre bursting or broken.
● Grab the steering wheel tightly and step down brake slightly to slow
down the vehicle. Emergency brake or turn steering wheel rapidly will
make the vehicle out of control.
● You should consider if there is tyre bursting or broken when the
Pu
following situations appear.
· Steering wheel shakes;
· There is abnormal vibration;
· The vehicle is inclined abnormally.
● Please do not drive with burst tyre.
It is very dangerous to drive with burst tyre; it is easy to cause accident.
Besides, it will bring damage to tyre, wheel, suspension and body so
please replace the burst tyre immediately otherwise.
⑤ Please park the vehicle on a safety place immediately and check when
there is strong strike from body lower part, tyre and wheel.
● Check if brake fluid and fuel is leaking; if the suspension components,
tyre, wheel and components of driving system are deformed or damaged. It
will easy to cause accident if you are driving under this status.
● Please keep the vehicle at it original status and contact with FAW Hongqi
sales and service center if there is leaking or damage.
⑥ It means the brake pads are worn seriously when there is “sou sou” warning sound heard near brake
during running. Please go to FAW Hongqi sales and service center for
check.
● This warning sound comes from brake pad warning device; normally it
gives warning sound (“sou sou” metal friction sound) to remind the driver
that the brake pads are near to worn limit. Please go to FAW Hongqi sales Sou
and service center for check as you get the reminder.
● Brake pads will be worn heavily, brake components will be damaged,
and brake effectiveness will be decreased, accordingly the accident will
happen if you continue to drive under this situation.

21
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

6. Notices of parking or stopping the vehicle

It is a must to abide by the following items during parking or stopping the vehicle.
Otherwise it is easy to cause serious personnel injury or death.
① Step down parking brake, turn off engine and lock the door before leaving the vehicle.
● You should step down parking brake, turn off engine then lock the door before leaving. Please do not keep
valuables inside of the vehicle to avoid the vehicle or goods inside of vehicle are stolen.
● It is a must to abide by the following items when you are leaving. Otherwise, the vehicle may start and cause
accident.
· Put shift lever to P shift.
· Step down parking brake.
· Turn off engine.
· Lock the door.
② Do not park the vehicle near combustibles.
● It is easy to cause fire if there is combustible backside of vehicle or near
exhaust pipe.
● Please keep 30cm parking space if there is wood or plywood backside of
the vehicle; if the space is too short, the color or shape of wood or plywood
may change even cause a fire.
● Do not drive or park vehicle on dry grass or wastepaper. The exhaust pipe
is every hot, and it may cause a fire if it is too close to the combustible.
③ Do not run the engine at idle speed under parking status. Boom
● It may cause vehicle fire if the exhaust pipe is too hot.

④ Do not put glasses, lighter, sprayer or carbonate beverage in the

vehicle in hot summer.
● It may cause vehicle fire if the gas inside of lighter or sprayer is leaking or
the can is broken as the temperature inside of the vehicle is very high.
● If the carbonate beverage can is broken and the beverage contacts electric
part, it may cause short circuit.
● The temperature in vehicle is too high which will make the resin
eyeglasses deforming and cracking.
⑤ It is a must to turn off the engine when you take a nap.
● If you take a nap with the engine on, it may happen that you move the shift
Pululu
lever unconsciously, or step the brake pedal causing the vehicle start abruptly
and lead to an accident; or cause vehicle fire by the over hot engine.
And also if the exhaust pipe is damage or the ventilation is poor, the exhaust
may enter into vehicle to result in CO poisoning causing personnel injury even
death.

22
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

7．Pay attention to vehicle exhaust

It is a must to abide by the following items in order to prevent exhaust

poisoning. Otherwise it may cause serious personnel injury or death.

① Do not run the engine for long time in an environment with bad

ventilation.

The places with poor ventilation as garage is easy to cause exhaust

aggregation and CO poisoning, leading to serious personnel injury or death.

② Please turn off the engine when parks on the road with snow or when

it snows.

● If the engine is at working status and there is snow around the vehicle, the Pululu
exhaust may enter into vehicle causing CO poisoning leading to serious

personnel injury or even death.

③ Check exhaust pipe frequently.

● Please go to FAW Hongqi sales and service center for checking if the

exhaust pipe is cracking or the connection position is damaged because of

corrosion, or there is abnormal sound during exhausting. If you continue to

drive it, the exhaust may enter into vehicle causing CO poisoning leading to

serious personnel injury or even death.

④ Do not drive the vehicle with the luggage compartment cover opened.

● If you drive the vehicle with the luggage compartment cover opened, the

exhaust may enter into vehicle and cause CO poisoning leading to serious

personnel injury even death. So it is a must to check if the luggage

compartment cover is closed tightly before driving.

⑤ Take the following actions if you feel the exhaust enters into

vehicle.

● Open all the windows glass.

● Adjust AC to air intaking mode and put the air flow to maximum; make

the outside fresh air enter into vehicle.

● Please come to FAW Hongqi sales and service center for checking. If you

leave it alone, it may cause CO poisoning leading to serious personnel injury

23
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving
even death.

8. Notices when there is child in the vehicle

It is a must to pay attention to the following items when there is child on the vehicle.
otherwise it may cause serious personnel injury even death.
① The child should be sited on the rear seat.
● If the child sits on co-driver’s seat, he will separate the energy of driver; and
also if the child touch driving device carelessly, it may cause major accident. In
case there is vehicle collision, rear seat is more safety.
● Use child safety protection device when the child sits on the rear seat, to
prevent him open the door by wrong operation.
Use method of child safety protection device please refers to P95.
② The child should also use safety belt.
● If hold the child on knees, the adult may loose hands when there is emergency
brake or there is collision, which may cause serious personnel injury even
death.
● The child should use safety belt even he sits in rear seat (refers to P143).

● Please use child special use seat fitting for child size when the normal
safety belt touches the neck or jaw of the child and can not lock hipbone
(refer to P27 and P140).
③ Do not let child play with the safety belt with child seat fixation
device.
● The seat safety belt is with the function of fixation of child seat. Safety belt
can be drawn out completely and it only works on the strain direction
(locking mode) when this device is used to fix child seat. (Refer to P144).
● If the child play with the safety belt and wind his neck by the safety belt
carelessly; the safety belt may not be drawn out anymore which will choke
the child causing serious injury even death.
For this situation, you should use scissors to cut off the safety belt if the
safety belt can not be released.
④ Do not let child operate door, window and sunroof.
● The child may be hurt on hand, head or neck if they operate door,
window or sunroof; this will cause serious injury.
● If the door is opened during driving, the child is easy to be thrown out
of vehicle causing serious injury even death.
● Use child safety protection lock (refer to P95) or door/window locking switch (refer to P100) to prevent child
faulty operation. In addition, be care and do not nip and hurt others’ hand, head or neck when the door is opened
or closed.

24
 For Safe and Comfortable Driving

⑤ Do not leave child alone in the vehicle when adult

leaves.
● If the child is left inside of vehicle in hot summer, he is
easy to be heatstroke or dehydration; this will cause serious
injury even death.
● If the child is left in the vehicle, in case he plays matches,

lighter (cigar lighter) etc., this will cause vehicle fire.

● If the switch of power supply is at IG position or the
engine is at working status and the child is left in the
vehicle alone, he may be hurt on hand, head or neck when
he operates the switches of power window and sunroof;
this will cause serious injury even death. And if he touches driving devices, it will cause
accident. So never keep the child in the vehicle alone when the power supply switch is at IG
position or the engine is working.
⑥ Never put the child in luggage compartment.
● The luggage compartment cover can not be opened
from inside.
If the child is closed in the luggage compartment
carelessly, it may cause serious injury even death.
Never put the child in the luggage compartment.

25
 Safe Device

1. Notices related to seat

It is a must to abide by the following items during seat using.

Otherwise, it may cause accident and serious injury even death.

① Please adjust seat to the position facilitating correct driving.

● If the seat is not at the position where can facilitate the correct driving, it may

cause faulty operation even cause accident; and also the safety efficiency of safety

belt, SRS air bag, headrest etc. can not be exerted. Correct driving posture please

read P122.

② Please do not adjust the driver’s seat during driving.

● The movement of seat abruptly may cause driving misplay leading to accident if you adjust the seat during

driving.

③ Please do not put anything under front seat.

● Otherwise, the seat may not be locked blocking by goods and cause accident.

④ Please do not make the seat backrest too incline during driving.
● If the seat backrest is too inclined, waistband is easy falling off from waist and
the body will slide down making some organs get heavy pressing when the
vehicle gets collision or rear-end; this will cause serious injury even death.
Compressed
⑤ Please do not put cushion etc. between seat backrest and body back.
● It will influence to adopt correct driving posture, and also the safety
belt and headrest can not exert safety efficiency when there is vehicle
collision; even there will be serious injury which will jeopardize the life.
⑥ Please do not drive with the headrest off.
● There will be great impact to head when there is a collision, even it will
cause serious injury which will jeopardize the life; please adjust the central height
of headrest to the opposite backside of ears.
⑦ During the application of seat heater, it may cause scald by overheating

(erythema or bleb); so you should pay attention to that (the model with seat

heater).

● The following person should be careful when you use seat heater to avoid scald (erythema

or bleb).

· Infant, child, the old people, patient and the disabled

· The people with bad skin

26
 Safe Device

· The people who is too tired

· The people who is drunk or took hypnotic (soporific or cold medicine)
● Please do not cover it with towel and cushion etc. during using. The seat may be over heated
and cause scald or seat malfunction.
● Please do not use seat heater when you take a nap; it will cause scald by overheating.
⑧ There is SRS side air bag assembled on front seat so please be careful during use.
Improper operate, abnormal work or wrong work will cause serious injury even death (please read
P122: Correct driving posture).
2. Notices related to child special use seat
It is a must to abide by the following items when the child seat is used.

Otherwise, it may cause accident and serious injury even death.

① For the child who can use normal safety belt please make him into the child special use
seat fitting for his size.
● If there is an infant in the vehicle, there should be a special use seat to support his head and
neck. The neck of an infant is not stable and his head is heavier, so it is a must to put the
infant into an infant seat fitting for his size.
● The body shape of the infant is different from that of adult, but the infant factor is not
considered when the safety belt is designed. Hipbone of infant is small, so the normal safety
belt can not fasten under his hipbone but on belly; the belly will get strong pressing when there
is a collision, this will cause serious injury even death.
So it is a must to sit the infant in special use seat.
② It is a must to read the product instruction carefully when the
child seat fixation special use crossbar and upper retainer
corresponding to ISOFLX are used; fasten them firmly and
abide by the application method.
● If it is used uncorrectly or it is not fastened firmly, it can not exert
the efficiency of child special use seat, but also it may cause serious
injury even death under emergency brake and vehicle collision.
Selection standard of child special use seat

Installation of ISOFIX children seat special fixture

bolt and the baby seat and infant seta with fixture

devices
Besides above table

27
 Safe Device
Reference
Weight Height
Weigh Reference ages
Height
t ages Newborn
Below Below
Baby seat ～12
10kg 75cm
Below Below Newborn months
Baby seat
9kg 70cm ～9 months 9～ 75～ 9monthes～
Infant seat
18kg 105cm 4 years old
9～ 70～ 9 months～
Infant seat
18kg l00cm 4 years old
15～ 100～ 4 years
Child seat
32kg l35cm old ～l0

③ Please fix the child special use seat firmly.

Fix the child special use seat firmly according to installation position and installation
direction. Otherwise, it can not exert the efficiency of child special use seat, but also it may
cause serious injury even death under emergency brake and vehicle collision.
■ Please install child special use seat on rear seat.
● For the child, rear seat are the most safety position. In
addition, there is installation mechanism for child special
use seat on rear seat. (refer to P144)
● There may have no enough space for child special use
seat installation behind of driver’s seat influenced by the
position of driver’s seat, so it is better to install the child
special use seat on the rear seat behind co-driver’s seat.
■ Never install the child special use seat on co-driver’s seat with its front face backwards.

■ If the child special use seat is installed with front

face backwards, it will bring strong impact to the
back of child seat when the SRS air bag expanded on
co-driver’s side.

● If the child special use seat is unavoidable installed on

co-driver’s seat, please adjust co-driver’s seat backwards as far
as possible to decrease the impact from expansion of SRS air
bag on co-driver’s seat.
28
 There will be strong impact to child when the SRS air bag expands on co-driver’s seat if the
above regulation is not observed.

■ Please make sure there is no foreign body near special use crossbar and the safety belt
is not trapped when install infant and child special use
seat by child seat fixation crossbar.
● It is very dangerous if there is foreign body or the safety
belt is trapped because the seat cannot be fixed firmly.
④ Please fasten child special use seat on seat firmly or put
it into luggage compartment when it is not used.
● If the child special use seat is removed from seat and left in the vehicle at random, it may
hit the passenger and other object leading to accident under emergency brake.

29
 Safe Device

3. Notice related to seat safety belt

It is a must to abide by the following items when the safety belt is used.

Otherwise, it may cause serious injury even death.

① All the driver and passengers should use safety belt correctly.

If you do not use safety belt or the use safety belt incorrectly, your

body can not be restrained on the seat when there is emergency brake

or collision; your body may hit other positions, and it is very dangerous

because you will get strong impact when the SRS air bag is expanded.

In addition, you may be thrown out of vehicle hurt or dead.

● The driver first should make sure that all the passengers use safety belt correctly according to the following

method and then start the vehicle.

■ Please straight your upper body and sit into the seat deeply when you fasten the safety belt.

Correct fasten posture please refer to P139.

Shoulder belt
When adjusting the seat back, straighten
Hang on should completely (do not hang on
up the up body and sit in the seat deeply
neck or dropping fro shoulder.
No distortion
Waist belt

Cling below the hip bone as close as possible

<Correct fasten method>

■ Please do not hang the shoulder belt of safety belt on neck or pass

through otter.
Being
● Shoulder belt of seat safety belt should wear on shoulder.
pressed
● If the transit position of safety belt is wrong, the belly may get

pressing when there is a collision.

■ Please adjust seat safety belt fixer carefully (refer to P143)

● Please adjust seat safety belt, do not stick to neck and make it on the

higher position of shoulder.

■ Please fix waistband of seat safety belt near hipbone closely.

30
 Safe Device

● The belly may get strong pressing when there is collision if the safety belt slides away from hipbone.
■ One safety belt only can be used by one person.

● If two persons use one safety belt, the safety belt can not separate the

impact but also there is dangerous of two persons bump each other if there

is a collision.

② The pregnant woman also must use safety belt.

But follow doctor’s instruction.

Basically the method of pregnant woman uses safety belt is same to that of normal way. Make the waistband

lower as possible below the ridgy belly. Shoulder belt should pass the shoulder avoid belly to use breast.

● If the safety belt is not used correctly, it will fasten the belly, hurt the mother and fetus seriously even makes

them die when there is emergency brake or collision.

Shoulder Belt
Avoid the hunch in
the belly, hang on
the chest.

Waist belt
Hang below the
hipbone, under the
hunch in the belly

③ The patients must use safety belt correctly.

But also follow doctor’s instruction.

④ Safety belt can not be used when it is distorted, loosing or fixed on locking status firmly.

Even the driving posture is correct, if the safely belt is distorted, loosing

and not locked firmly, it can not exert its efficiency completely when there is

collision; this will cause serious injury even death.

● If the safety belt is distorted, it can not disperse the impact force effectively

when there is collision; so it is very dangerous.

● Please adjust the distorted safety belt to correct situation. If you can not
make it to correct situation please consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center.

31
 Safe Device

■ Please do not loose safety belt by clamp and clip.

● If the shoulder belt is too loose, there will be a space between body

and safety belt, then the belt can not restrain the body when there is

collision; it is very dangerous because it will press breast. In addition, the

head may get strong impact when it hit steering wheel and expanded SRS

air bag.

■ Make sure there is “Kachi” sound heard when the lock tongue is

inserted into buckle.

● When there are foreign bodies inside of buckle, lock tongue then can not

be inserted into it completely; safety belt may fall off when there is collision.

⑤ Please do not damage safety belt nor use damaged safety belt.

The damaged safety belt may not exert its efficiency when there is collision;

even it may cause serious injury or death.

● Do not clamp safety belt and buckley by seat or door, otherwise they

are easy to be damaged.

■ Replace the safety belt of unsewn, worn and can not work properly immediately. In addition, please do

not use the safety belt that experienced strong impact or damaged because of accident, otherwise it may

not exert its efficiency completely when there is a collision.

● The damaged safety belt may break under impact when there is

vehicle collision if you continue to use it. In addition, it can not work

properly nor exert its safety efficiency.

● Please replaces to a new original FAW safety belt if the old one can not

exert its efficiency properly.

■ Never alter, decompose, install or disassemble the safety belt.

● Safety belt will not exert its normal efficiency when there is vehicle collision.

Please consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if there is need to install, disassemble or replace the safety

belt.

■ It is a must to abide by the following items if you use a safety belt with pre-tensioner. Otherwise the

efficiency of pre-tensioner can not be exerted, and it will cause serious injury even death.

● Use safety belt correctly.

● Please adjust seat to correct driving position.
32
 Safe Device

■ Please do not alter, decompose, install or disassemble the safety belt

with pre-tensioner.

● Safety belt with pre-tensioner can not work properly if you dispose it

incorrectly; it is a must to go to FAW Hongqi sales and service center for

maintenance.

■ Please do not use organic solvent as volatilizable or gasoline etc. to

wash safety belt. In addition, do not bleach or dye the safety belt to

prevent the strength decreased.

● It may decrease the safety belt strength, so when there is a vehicle collision

it can not exert its efficiency completely.

● Please use neutral detergent or warm water to wash the safety belt; and do not use it until it is dry.

4. Notices related to SRS air bag

It is a must to abide by the following items when the SRS air bag is used.

Otherwise, it may cause serious injury even death.

① SRS air bag is the auxiliary device to safety belt, and it can not instead of safety belt.

SRS air bag can not exert its efficiency completely if you do not sit on the seat with correct posture nor use

safety belt correctly when there is a collision; also there will be strong impact when the air bag expands, it may

cause serious injury even death. Correct method of safety belt application please read P139.

■ Adjust seat to correct position and sit down with back close to seat backrest.

● If the body covers or over close the expanded part of SRS air bag, it is easy to get strong impact when the air

bag expands.

For the driver

Please sit within the range to facilitate driving but not close to the

steering wheel as possible.

For the co-driver

Sit as far as possible from SRS air bag on co-driver’s seat side.

Please do not sit the front of seat or close to instrument panel.

Content related to seat adjustment and correct posture

please read P122.

33
 Safe Device

■ Do not drive with something on the knees or something between

passenger and SRS air bag.

● Otherwise, the goods may fly and hit your face when the SRS air bag

expands, or the goods may hinder the normal expansion of SRS air bag;

this is very dangerous.

■ Please do not close to door, front pillar, rear pillar and side

rim of roof.

● When SRS side air bag and SRS curtain air bag on front and rear

seats expand, your head will get strong impaction, and this is very

dangerous. Especially for a child; it is a must to pay attention to

that.

■ Please do not let child stand in front of SRS air bag of

co-driver’s seat, nor hold the child on knees.

● When SRS air bag expands the child may get strong impaction and

this is very dangerous.

② It is a must to abide by the following items when vehicle is

maintained.

● Otherwise SRS air bag may not work properly or expand incorrectly which will cause serious injury even death.

It is a must to consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if you want

to disassemble, install, decompose or repair SRS air bag, instrument

panel or glove box.

Incorrect operation may cause improper work or incorrect Bang

expansion of SRS air bag.

● It is a must to consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if it

needs to replace front seat cover, and disassemble, install, decompose or repair SRS air bag. It is prohibited to

refit front seats.

● Do not decompose or repair the places around the storage position of

front/rear SRS curtain air bag when you disassemble/install car body Bang
front pillar, rear pillar or side rim of the roof.

34
 Safe Device
● Please do not alter suspension. SRS air bag may be expanded incorrectly if the vehicle height or suspension
stiffness is changed.

Peng

Improve

● It is a must to consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if you

repair front part of vehicle or cab. If the repair is not suitable, the

impact transferred to SRS air bag may change and cause SRS work

incorrectly; this is very dangerous.

③ Please abide by the following items when install vehicle Mark

ornamental article.

Otherwise, SRS air bag can not work correctly or cause incorrect

expansion. This will cause serious injury even death.

● The expanded part of SRS air bag can not be covered by

Mark
sheathing nor stick tape.

Otherwise SRS air bag can not work correctly; this is very dangerous.

● Please do not put spice box or umbrella on instrument panel or

console, otherwise SRS air bag on co-driver’s side can not work

properly. In addition, the above mentioned articles may fly when SRS

air bag expands. SRS Knee Airbag

● Please do not attach heavy articles, sharp articles and hard articles on

the key. The above mentioned articles may fly when the SRS knee air bag

expands.

● It is a must not to assemble accessories around the expanded position of

SRS knee air bag under instrument panel.

Fittings

35
 Safe Device

The above mentioned articles may fly when SRS knees air bag expands.
● Please do not use other articles (common seat cover etc.)
except for vehicle original devices on front seat. Otherwise,
it may cover the SRS side air bag expansion position and
hinder the proper work of SRS side air bag. Opening part
In addition, please read application instruction carefully of front SRS
when you prepare special use seat cover. Use it correctly. side airbag

● Do not assemble articles like cup bracket on front door and

its periphery. It may fly when SRS side air bag expands.

The opening part of front and

● Do not assemble decoration and hand free phone around rear seat typed sealing airbag

the expansion position of SRS curtain air bag as front

windscreen, side window, front pillar, rear pillar, side rim
of roof and auxiliary handle. The decoration may fly when
front/rear seat SRS curtain air bag expands.
Fittings
Cordless phone

● Please do not hang clothes rack, heavy article or sharp article

on auxiliary handle of rear seat. Please hang your clothes onto cloth
hook directly but not use clothes rack. The above mentioned articles
may fly when front/rear seat SRS curtain air bag expands.

● Radio wave may influence ECU that controls SRS air bag, and
cause SRS air bag expands incorrectly; so it is very dangerous.
Please consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if you want
to install radio devices.

● Please consult FAW Hongqi sales and service center if you

want to install guard plate and wind deflector on front side of the
vehicle. If vehicle front side is altered, the impact transferred to
SRS air bag sensor may change, which will cause SRS air bag
expands incorrectly; this is very dangerous.

36
 Safe Device

④ Please do not beat the expanded position of SRS air

bag with big force. Expansion part of the airbag

● Please do not beat the SRS air bag expansion position as

steering wheel buffering shell cover, instrument panel,
front pillar, rear pillar, side rim of roof and side surface of
front seat with big force, otherwise, SRS may not work
properly; it is easy to cause serious injury even death.
Expansion part of the airbag

Expansion

part of the

airbag

Expansion part of

the airbag

⑤ Please do not touch the components of SRS air bag

immediately after SRS air bag expanding
● You may scald because the components are very hot; it is
very dangerous.

5. Notices related to ABS with EBD and brake auxiliary device

It is a must to abide by the following items when you use ABS with EBD and brake auxiliary device.
Otherwise there may be accident or cause serious injury that may jeopardize the life.
① Please do not over rely on ABS with EBD and brake auxiliary device.
● Vehicle stability and steering wheel efficiency have certain limit when the ABS with EBD is
at working status, so the accident may happen if you drive at will.
Please do not over rely on ABS with EBD and brake auxiliary device; control the vehicle speed, keep
a safety distance with other vehicle and drive carefully.
·ABS device with EBD can not exert its function when tyre touchdown limit is exceeded or
there is water film effect ※.
※ means the water film produced between tyre and road surface in a rainy day when the
vehicle runs with high speed, and the tyre looses earth holding ability.
● The purpose of ABS with EBD is not for shorten the brake distance.
For the following situations, the brake distance is longer compare to the vehicle without
ABS with EBD. So it is a must to control the vehicle speed and keep enough distance.
· When drives on grit road and new snowed road.
· When the vehicle is installed with tyre chain

37
 Safe Device

· When the vehicle passes the places with altitude difference as road joint etc..
· When the vehicle drives on damaged roads as uneven and washboard road.
● Brake auxiliary device is not a device which can exceed the ability of brake; please keep
enough vehicle distance and drive carefully.
6. Notices related to RC and VSC
It is a must to abide by the following items when TRC and VSC are used.

Otherwise it may cause accident and serious injury; this is very dangerous.

① Please do not over rely on the function of TRC.

● Under working status, TRC has the ability to maintain the stability of vehicle direction but
with a certain limit; so the accident may happen if you do not drive according to the traffic
regulations. Please be careful when the sliding indicator (P168) flashes.
② Please do not over rely on the function of VSC.
●Under working status, VSC has the ability to maintain the stability of vehicle direction but
with a certain limit; so the accident may happen if you do not drive according to the traffic
regulations. Please be careful when VSC working warning buzzer (continuous sound)
sounds or sliding indicator (P168) flashes.
7．Notices related to anti-collision safety device
It is a must to abide by the following items about anti-collision safety device.

Otherwise it may cause accident and jeopardize the life.

① Please do not over rely on the function of anti-collision safety device.

● Pay attention to the situations around vehicle during driving and make sure there is no barrier
in the front, driving carefully to insure safety.
② Anti-collision safety belt will not work if you do not use seat safety belt when the
anti-collision safety belt is at working status and you did not try to avoid the collision.

38
 Driving Device

1. Notice related to automatic transmission vehicle

It is a must to abide by the following items when the automatic transmission vehicle is used.
Otherwise it may cause accident, serious injury even death.
① Characteristics of automatic transmission vehicle
■ Creepage phenomenon
There will be creepage of the vehicle even if you do
not step down the accelerator pedal when the engine
works and shifting lever is at the shifts except for P and
N shift because the power is turned on; this phenomenon
is called as creepage phenomenon.

■ Automatic transmission moves from high speed to

low speed
Step accelerator pedal down to its bottom during driving, it will change to low speed
automatically; engine speed increases and fast acceleration can be realized. This process is
called as high speed falls into low speed.
② It is must to separate the positions of brake pedal and
accelerator pedal; make sure do not mix them.
● The vehicle will be accelerated rapidly if you take
accelerator pedal as brake pedal; this will cause accident and
serious injury even death.
Your body is turned during reversing, but make sure to step the
pedals solidly even there is little difficult to step the pedals. Take
correct driving posture when the vehicle moves slightly, and step
brake pedal and accelerator pedal solidly.
③ Step both brake pedal and accelerator pedal by right
foot.
● It is easy to cause accident, when there is emergency and
your reaction is slow, if you step brake pedal by left foot; this
is very dangerous.
④ Please step brake pedal down completely when the
engine is started.
● Please keep shift lever on P shift to fix the wheel, step
brake pedal down completely and start the engine.
⑤ Please step down brake pedal completely and control the gear shifting lever when the
vehicle is started.
● The creepage phenomenon is more obvious especially when the engine is started and make
the AC work immediately. So please step the brake pedal down completely.
● Never operate the gear shifting lever when the accelerator pedal is stepped down. It may
cause accident if the vehicle is tarted emergently; it is very dangerous.

39
 Driving Device

⑥ Please do not put gear shifting lever on N shift during running.

● Engine brake is completely invalid when gear shifting lever is at N
shift; this is easy to lead to accident so it is very dangerous.
● Lubricant in automatic transmission is easy aging and cause
malfunctions if the vehicle runs with the gear shifting lever at N shift
for a long time.
⑦ Please do not put gear shifting lever at P shift during driving.
● The automatic transmission is mechanical locked and this is easy to cause accident.

⑧ Please do not put gear shifting lever at R shift when drives forward.
● It may lead to wheel locking and cause accident; in addition, do not exert meaningless loading to automatic
transmission; this may cause accident.
⑨ Please do not step accelerator pedal when you want to stop
the vehicle.
Dudu
● Vehicle may be started emergently and cause accident when the
gear shifting lever is at the other shifts excepter for P and N shifts.
⑩ Please put gear shifting lever to P shift when the vehicle is
parked.
● The vehicle may move because of creepage phenomenon if the
gear shifting lever is at the other shifts excepter P shift. It may cause accident because of emergent starting
when the accelerator pedal is stepped down by accident.
⑾ It is must not to put gear shifting lever on D or S shift which will make the vehicle slide along the slope
when the vehicle is on a slope.
● At the same time, you can not put gear shifting lever at R shift which will make the vehicle goes forward along
the slope. Brake efficiency will be worse and the steering wheel will be heavier for operation if the engine is
stopped; all of these may cause accident and serious injury even death.
⑿ Please pay attention to the following items on other aspects.
● You may forget that the gear shifting lever is still on R shift after reversing; so you should shift the lever back to
N shift chronically after reversing.
● Please step brake pedal with big force every time, when the gear shifting lever is changed from D shift to R shift
or from R shift to D shift, and operate after the vehicle is stopped. In addition, please do not forget the position of
gear shifting lever.
⒀ Do not over rely on NAVI. and AI-SHIFT, because sometimes they are malfunction. (For the vehicle with
navigation system)
● Please pay attention to the road conditions and drive with safety speed.

40
 Driving Device

2. Notices related to cruise device

It is a must to bide by the following items about the cruise device.
Otherwise it may cause accident and serious injury; this is very dangerous.
① Please put master switch on OFF position if the cruise device is not used.
● It may cause accident and serious injury if the cruise device is operated incorrectly; this is
very dangerous.
② The accident may happen if the cruise device is used in the following conditions.
● On the roads with big traffic and sharp turn, if you do not drive the vehicle with the speed not
according to the road conditions, it may cause accident.
● The tyre may run idly when the vehicle runs on slippery road like icy and snowy road etc.;
there is risk of vehicle out of control existed.
● When the vehicle runs down along the abrupt alope, engine brake can not exert its efficiency; it is
easy to exceed the set speed and cause accident.
3.Notices related to intelligence enter and starting system
It is a must to abide by the following items about intelligence enter and starting system.
Otherwise it may cause accident and serious injury.
① Electric wave may influence medical apparatus as heart peacemaker, so please confirm
from your medical apparatus manufacturers.
② It is not necessary to press door lock switch for a long time, nor rely on door handle
when intelligence enter function is used.
● Never close/open door/window glass or sunroof unintentionally because it may clamp hands
and head causing serious injury.
4. Notice related to front windscreen indicator
It is a must to abide by the following items about front windscreen indicator.
Otherwise it may cause accident and serious injury.
① Please adjust the video definition and indication position to a suitable status which will
not influence the safety driving.
● The video definition and indication position may disturb the driver’s visual field and cause
accident.
5. Notice related to night vision system
It is a must to abide by the following items if the night vision system is used.
Otherwise it may cause accident and serious injury.
① It is a must to remember the following items when you use night vision system,
otherwise, it may cause accident and serious injury.
● Please do not over rely on the function of night vision system.

41
 The assistant range of night vision system is from the lighting front end of headlamp lower
beam to high beam position. Same to normal vehicle, please make sure it is safe and drive
with care during night driving.
● Please do not use the assistant device on the road with lots of slopes/turns and city road if the
night vision system is set to be used on less turns road.
● Please do not set the display brightness of night vision system too bright because it will
obstruct the observation of around situations. Please do not use the video displayed on the
night vision system to instead of the visual image, because this display can not judge the
distance between vehicle and barrier.
● Please do not only observe the display of night vision system during driving. Otherwise, you
may not judge the front risk correctly; please always take it as a driving auxiliary device.
● The function of night vision system is to verify the front situation which is difficult to
recognize during night driving. Please do not drive continuously by observing the video
displayed by the night vision system. It can not display everything clearly. Sometimes, all
the images are dark, and sometimes all the images are obsceneness.

42
 Driving Device

● Under the following situations it is difficult to form pictures, so you should be careful during
driving.
· When it is raining, fogging, snowing
· When the engine is just started in cold weather
· When it is obsceneness, dirty or icy in front of camera and the displayed position of front
windscreen display
· When there is ice, snow or mud on near infrared transmitter
· When the voltage of battery is low
● Please see the front directly if it can not display because of road conditions (sharp turn or
upgrade/downgrade)
● Some articles is not easy to create image (as leather cover, advertising word and road
indication plate etc), so please be careful during driving.
●Near infrared transmitter emits strong light, which can not see by naked eyes. Normally near
infrared can not be emitted when the vehicle is stopped, but please do not observe it for
safety reason.

43
 Maintenance

1. Notice related to check and maintenance

It is a must to abide by the following items when the vehicle is checked and maintained.
Otherwise, it may cause major accident and injury.
Content related to check and maintenance please see “Maintenance Manual”.
① It is a must to shut off the engine and do not approach the fire when you check engine
compartment cover.
● It may cause accident because your hand, clothes or
tools may be involved in if you contact or approach to
the running engine belt or fan. Even if the engine is
stopped, but if the coolant temperature is too high the
cooling fan may run abruptly. In addition, do not make
fir approach to battery or fuel pipe, which may cause
explosion leading to serious injury.
② Do not touch the part with high temperature like exhaust pipe and radiator of the
engine immediately after the engine stopped.
● It may cause scald. Pay attention that the temperature of
lubricant and other liquid may still very high.
③ Do not make the water contact engine compartment.
● It may cause short circuit of electrical part if the water
contacts engine compartment, which will lead to
malfunction or vehicle fire.
④ Do not wash the interior when cleaning the car
●If the water contacts with the audio or the circuit of the
electric parts, it will cause the vehicle malfunction or fire
accident
⑤ Do not make the water contact with the brake when
cleaning the car
●If water penetrates into the brake, it will freeze the brake and affect the braking efficient; or
make the brake rusty and the parts are not able to be in position accurately which will influence
the vehicle’s normal driving.
⑥ Do not use the fuse beyond the prescriptive capacity
● It may cause the wire is overheated, burnt and lead to car fire.
⑦ Pay attention to the volume of the brake fluid.
● If the volume of the brake fluid is insufficient, the brake will not function normally which is
44
easy to cause accident.
⑧ If the engine is hot or running, do not add the door glass washing liquid.
● Since there is alcohol in the washing liquid, it will cause fire accident if it splashes into the
engine.
⑨ After repairing the engine, do not leave the tools or cloths in the engine compartment.
If the tools or cloths which were used for repairing or cleaning were left in the engine
compartment, it will cause malfunction and since the temperature in the compartment is very
high, it is easy to cause fire accident.

45
 Maintenance
2. Notice Related to Tyre
Regarding to the tyre, please follow the following notices.
Otherwise, it will cause major accident or serious injury.
① The tyre must be inspected during daily inspection.
● Inspecting the tyre is the obligation of the vehicle user.
● The following items of the tyre must be inspected:
· Pressure of the tyre
· Whether there is chap and damage to the tyre
· The depth of the tyre tread
· The attrition rate of the tyre (serious shoulder wear, the attrition rate of the tyre is different with other tyres
obviously), the inspection method of the tyre please refer to the “Maintenance Manual”.
② The pressure of the tyre must be adjusted according to the specified pressure.
● Adjust the pressure of the tyre according to the specified tyre pressure
which was pasted on the index tag of the driving seat or the correct
pressure value noted in P319. If the pressure is lower than the specified
value, it will not only influence the stability of the vehicle but also lead to
tyre shoulder wear. During high speed driving, the tyre will burst because
of persistent resonance (standing wave phenomena※) and cause
accident. So during daily inspection, it is necessary to inspect whether the Tyre pressure mark
tyre pressure comply with the requirements, including the spare tyre.
※ means during high speed driving, the tyre appears the persistent resonance phenomena.
③ The vehicle must be equipped with the tyres of same type and same specification.
● All the tyres must be the products of same specification, same manufacturer, Normal Tyre
same brand and same pattern shape.
●If the tyres with different wear degree were mixed used, since the four
tyres in front, back, left and right have rotation difference which exerted
meaningless load to the parts of drive system and makes the
temperature of the lubricating oil increase which will cause the
lubricating oil leakage or sinter and even vehicle fire accident if serious.
● In the following situations, mixed use the tyres with different wear degree with Mixed using tyre of
have effect to the parts of drive system, so please be sure to inspect the pressure different brands
of the tyre.
· The pressure of the four tyres is uneven
· The pressure of the tyre does not conform to the requirement of specified value
● The wear degree of the four tyres should be even. To prolong the service life of the tyre, the position of the tyre
should be changed (see P304).
● When changing the tyre, do not use other inferior brand (see P319)
●If the tyres other than specified brand are equipped, or the four tyres are of different specifications, it will affect
the normal performance of the vehicle (fuel economy, vehicle stability, braking distance, etc.) and since the
46
 Maintenance

rotation speed of the four tyres is different, the sensor is not able to detect the speed of the vehicle and it will
also influence the normal function of the following devices:
·The braking auxiliary devices with EDB and ABS
·TRC
·VSC
· Cruise control
·Tyre pressure alarming system
·GPS audio navigation devices
·Anti-collision safety devices
·Intelligent AFS
·NAI·Al—SHIFT
④Do not use overworn tyre Wear Marks
●If continuously use the tyre with shallow tread pattern, or of
which the wear indicator is out, the braking distance will be
prolonged or the vehicle will not be able to turn normally
because of the phenomenon of water layer ※l in rainy day,
or the tyre will burst and cause accident. If the wear extent
reaches to the limit, replace it with normal tyre
immediately. Example: wear marks are not out
※1 When the vehicle is driving on the road with pounded water,
water layer will be formed between the tyre and road which will
lead to the tyre skid on the road and the steering system and
Wear Marks
braking system are out of use.
※ 2 The instance the schema is for the convenience of
explanation and it has difference with the actual situation

Example: wear marks are not out

⑤ Do not use the abnormal tyre with scar or crack on its
side.
●If abnormal tyre is used, you will feel the vehicle inclined to one side or abnormal vibration and it may cause
some uncorrectable loss such as tyre burst or lead to tyre slip and accident. During the process of driving, if
abnormal vibration was noticed, please go to FAW Hongqi Service Center for Inspection immediately and
replace it with normal tyre.
●If abnormal tyre is equipped, it will affect the normal performance of the vehicle (fuel economy, vehicle stability,
braking distance, etc.) and may cause accident and danger and bring bad influence to other parts which may
lead to malfunction.
⑥ Winter tyre must be of same specification and brand with the standard tyre and
47
reaches to specified tyre pressure.
● Winter tyre must be standard tyre, too. For safety, trying to avoid high speed driving when
using winter tyre.
⑦ If tyre chain was equipped, control the speed and drive carefully.
● If tyre chain is equipped, the speed should be controlled with 30km/h, or drive at the speed
specified by the tyre chain manufacturer.
● If tyre chain was equipped, try to avoid driving on rough road and prevent the emergent
braking driving operation which may cause the antilock braking such as emergent turning.
Otherwise the vehicle may not move as the track predicted so as to cause accident. In
addition, even though ABS is operated, the braking distance will be prolonged sometimes, so
please drive carefully.
⑧ Tighten the wheel retaining nut when changing the tyre and confirm it.

48
 Maintenance

●If the nut was not tightened enough, it will damage the wheel
mounting bolt or braking parts or the wheel break away and cause
accident.
If the tyre needs to be changed, it is best to go to FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service Centre to tighten the nut with the wrest wrench according
to the standard value.
Tighten torque
About 105N·m(1050kgf·cm)
● The nuts or bolts which are used for mounting the tyre should not be
smeared by lubricating oil or grease. If wrested too much, it will damage the bolt or the wheel; if the nut is
loose, the tyre may separate during the process of driving and cause accident.
⑨ If the screw part of the bolt and nut for mounting and the bolt hole of the wheel is damaged or cracked,
please go to FAW sales and service centre for inspection.
● If there is abnormities like damage or crack, the nut will not be able to lock closely no matter how to wrest it. It
may lead to the separation of the wheel from the vehicle and cause accident.
⑩ Try to drive slowly when going through the road with height difference.
● When the vehicle going through the rough road or the road with height difference, the tyre and wheel may be
damaged because of the impact with the road surface.
⑾ Do not hit the shoulder of the pavement when driving.
● Probably it will damage the tyre and wheel.
⑿ Do not contact with the parts around the wheel or brake if the vehicle has just been stopped.
● After just being stopped, the wheel and brake and their surroundings are in high temperature. If contacted with
hand or feet unlawfully when changing the tyre, it is easy to get burnt.

49
 Maintenance

3. Notice Related to Battery

Otherwise, it is easy to get serious injured.
① The volume of the battery liquid must be inspected during daily regular vehicle
inspection.
● If the battery is used or charged under the condition of LOWER which was marked on the
side of the liquid tank, it will not only reduce the service life of the battery, but also lead to
the phenomenon like heating and explosion. The detailed inspection method please refer to
the “Maintenance Manual”. Add the liquid timely when the volume is small.
② When the battery is charging, pay attention to the connection sequence and parts
when connecting with the auxiliary cable (see P331).
● The combustible gas which was generated by the battery may be on fire or explode and lead
to serious injuries like fire burn.
③ If the engine is running or charging, do not get close to the battery.
● During the process of charging, the battery liquid, which
contains the components like dilute sulphuric acid with
high toxicity and causticity may be blowed out. If
contacted with eyes or skin, it may lead to blind and
other serious personal injuries.
In case such situation happens, get off the clothes immediately and wash the skin part which
has contacted with the liquid with abundant water and go to doctor for check.
④ Do not make the fire get close to the battery.
● It may lead to the combustible gas that leaked from the battery on fire, explosion and get
people burnt and other serious personal injuries.
⑤ When replacing the battery, fix the hoop at accurate
clamp
position and tighten the nut closely.
● If the hoop is in the wrong position, or the nut was not
tightened enough, the hoop may separate during the process of
driving and lead to short circuit and there is the danger of
leading to vehicle fire.

50
4. Notice Related to Jack
When using the jack, the following issues must be followed.

Otherwise, it is easy to cause accident or serious personal injuries or even death.

① When using the jack, the vehicle should be stopped in a flat place and retain the tyre
with stop devices. Meanwhile, the parking brake
should be pushed on.
● If the vehicle moved, the jack will leave its position and
cause serious injury. The tyre stop devices can be
purchased from FAW Sales and Service Center. Please
Tyre stop device
consult FAW Sales and Service Center for details.
● If there is not tyre stop device, it can be replaced by large stones which are able to fix the
tyre.
② Never plunge into the part below the vehicle which
was lifted by the jack.
● If the jack leaves its position, the body will be squeezed
under the vehicle and cause serious personal injuries or
even death.
● The best function of the jack with the vehicle is to
replace the tyre and mount and dismount the tyre chain. Do not use it for other functions.
③ When using the jack, the following issues must be noticed, otherwise it will damage the
vehicle body and if the jack leaves its position, it is easy to cause serious personal
injuries.
● Do not use the jack when someone is in the vehicle.
● When using the jack, do not put materials above or below the jack. ● When using the jack,
make sure the jack is in right position (see P326).
● The lifting height of the vehicle body is appropriate for changing the tyre will be ok. ● When
using the jack, close the engine.● When dropping the lifted vehicle body, pay attention to the
surrounding to make sure safety.
④ The jack with the vehicle is the special tool of the user.
● Do not use it to other vehicles, nor use the jack of other vehicle. Improper operation is easy
to cause accident.

51
 Overheated and Emergency

⑤ After being used, the tools with the vehicle or the jack should be stored into specified
position.
● It is easy to cause accident to leave them in the driving seat.
1. Notices When Overheated
When it is overheated, do follow the following issues.

Otherwise, it will cause serious personal injuries.

① If steam comes out from the engine compartment

cover because the engine is overheated, do not open
the cover easily until no steam comes out from it.
● Since the temperature in the engine compartment cover is
high, it may cause scalds and other serious injuries. Even
if there is no steam, some parts may be very hot. So do
be careful when opening the engine compartment cover.

② When the radiator and auxiliary water tank is hot,

do not open the cover of radiator auxiliary water tank.
● Hot water or steam may come out from and cause serious
personal injuries.
●If the cover needs to be opened, it is a must to wait for the
reduction of the temperature of radiator and auxiliary water
tank and then utilize the cloth to envelop the cover and
open it slowly.

2. Notices under Emergency

Do follow the following issues.

Otherwise it is easy to cause major accident or serious personal injuries.

① When the engine is not running and the vehicle is being towed by other vehicle, please
operate the steering wheel and brake carefully.

52
 Overheated and Emergency

● Since the engine is not running, the motor of power steering gear and the braking assistor are
not able to function effectively so it is heavy to operate the steering wheel.
Drive the vehicle which is being towed very carefully.
② During the process of towing, do not make the
driving operations which may cause major impact to
the towing hook or towing rope.
● It will damage the towing hook or towing rope and if
touch with the people around it, it will cause serious Puchi

injuries.
③ After the accident happened, make sure whether there is fuel leakage before starting
the engine.
● Confirm the situation of the ground below the vehicle. In
case there is liquid leakage, in may because of the
damage of fuel system (air conditioner liquid is not
included). Starting the engine in this situation is easy to
cause fire and major accident. So do not start the engine
at first. At this moment, consult FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Centre and report relevant situations.

53
 Other Notices
Do follow the following issues.
Otherwise it is easy to cause major accident or serious personal injuries or even death.
① Strictly forbid illegal remodification
● Using the parts beyond the prescription will lead to illegal remodification.
●Reducing the vehicle height or using wide tyre and other parts which do not match with the
performance and function of the vehicle will cause malfunction or lead to major accident or
serious personal injuries.
● Strictly forbid the remodification to the steering wheel. Since there is SRS airbag inside the
steering wheel, improper operation will affect the normal working status or lead to serious
personal injuries or even death for the reason of airbag inflation which was caused by fault
explosion.
● In the following situation, consult the FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
· Using the nut of different types or beyond the prescription when replacing the tyre, wheel
and wheel mounting nut will bring bad effect to the driving and form the behavior of
illegal remodification.
· Mounting or dismounting the electric devices, wireless communication equipment will
have harmful influence to the electric devices and
lead to vehicle malfunction or fire accident.
② When using the ash pan, do remember to put out
the fire of the match and stub before covering.
● Without covering, it may lead to vehicle fire. Do not
put the inflammable substances like the paper scrap into
the ash pan.

③ Except the cup and beverage can, nothing should be put in the cup holder.
● When braking emergently or vehicles colliding, the substances in the cup holder may fly out
and hurt the passengers. If unnecessary to use, please
fold the cup holder.
④ Do not attach the vacuum chuck in the door glass.
● The vacuum chuck may play the role of lens and is easy
to cause fire accident.
⑤ Do not attach the polyethylene cupula or gasket to
the colored glass like infrared ray reflection glass or implicit glass
● The components of polyethylene products is easy to make the glass discolor or lose color.
⑥ If the door rear view mirror heater is working, the surface of the mirror will becomes
54
 Other Notices

hot, so please do not touch it with hand.

● It will lead to scald.
⑦ If the fuse embedded type front windscreen is in working conditions, the lower part of
the glass and the front post surface at the driver side will become hot, so please do not
touch them with hand.
● Easy to cause scald accident.
⑧ When replacing the battery, pay attention to that do not let the child swallow the key
battery and other parts.
● If swallowed, it will lead to serious personal injuries.
⑨ Taking passenger in luggage boot is strictly forbidden
● When braking emergently or vehicles colliding it is
easy to throw him out of the vehicle and lead to serious
personal injuries or even death.

⑩The luggage boot cover must be closed through

pressing from outside.
●If utilize the auxiliary bail handle to close the luggage boot cover directly it easy to cause
clamping injury to the hands and lead to serious personal injuries.
⑾ If the cover of the luggage boot is not closed tightly, convenient locking system will
function and close the luggage boot cover automatically. Avoid the clamping injury to the
hands and advise the children against opening or closing the luggage boot cover or vehicle
door meaninglessly.
⑿ Do not jug substances out from the skylight.
● It is easy to contact with substances outside the vehicle and lead to accident.
⒀ When replacing the gas discharge headlight (including replacing the lamp), it is a must
to consult FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
· If lighting operation is carried out in the situation of touching the lamp seat, it will generate
a 20 thousand voltage in the instant and easy to cause serious electric shock accident.
⒁ Do not touch the electric rear screen sunblind of the vehicles with it.
● When the electric rear screen sunblind is retracted, the cloths may be involved in can cause
malfunction and accident.
⒂ Magnetic parts can not be adopted on aluminum vehicle body.

55
● Since the magnet is not able to be adsorbed by the aluminum materials, please do not use the
magnetic new driver mark or senior driver mark.
⒃ Do not make the beverage leak into the switch in the vehicle
·If the switches in the instrument panel, storage box of auxiliary instrument panel, vehicle door
and other parts contact with the beverage, it will cause malfunction and easy to lead to
vehicle fire accident. In case beverage was leaked in, consult FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Center immediately.
⒄ Do not touch the silencer if the engine is running or just stopped.
● If the engine is running or just stopped, the silencer is in high temperature. When loading or
unloading materials, it will cause personal scald if touch the silencer by careless.

56
MEMO

57
2 The Using Method of Driving Devices

Function of the Key and the Using Method 61 Front seat……………………………………………….128

Smart Key 61 Adjustment of front seats 138
Method of Locking up the the vehicle door and unlocking Methods of application of the deriver seat
with smart key 64 pre-adjusting device based on computer memory
Method of opening the electric luggage boot cover by technology 141
utilizing key intelligent function 68 Methods of application of memory function 143
Method of switching power by utilizing the key intelligent How to use the front seat heater 145
function 70 Seats with footrests 147
Method of starting and closing the engine by utilizing the Rear Seats ………………………………… .147
intelligent function of the key 72 Adjusting switch of the seats 148
Lock core typed ignition key 81 Seats adjustment 148
Function of smart key 81 headrest adjustment 149
Other functions 83 The fixing of children seat 151
The operations which do not use the intelligent function of the How to use the front seat heater 151
key 86 Adjustment can be processed at the tilt angle
Under the following situations 8 between the front seats and the rear seat backrest
Issues need to be known and mastered 91 152
Ring alarm, early warning function and warning indication The wearing of seat belts 153
94 Correct wearing of seat belts 153
0pening and closing for the doors and windows……..103 The use of seat belts 156
Opening and closing for the doors 103 The seat belt shoulder height adjustment 158
Side doors 105 Fixation of child seat 159
Opening and closing for the windows 111 Fix the child seat with fixing rod or the upper fixer
Opening and closing of car door glass 115 corresponding to ISOFIX 161
Opening and closing of electric Suitcase 118 Adjustment of steering wheel and rearview mirror 163
Luggage carrier 119 The adjustment of steering wheel 163
Using method of the intelligent function of wireless remote adjustment of anti-glare rearview mirror 164
control key 128 Door rearview mirror adjustment 165
Switch of Filler Cover 128 Using method of Selector Lever 168
Open and close of the engine hatch cover 130 Sequential shift Automatic gearbox 168
Anti-theft system…………………………… 131 6SuperECT157
Engine stop devices 131 Driving Method of Automatic Transmission
Auto alarm (anti theft system) 131 Vehicle ….170
Stop devices of the engine l33 Start-up Method 151
Proper driving posture………………………………. 137 Driving method 173
Stopping and Parking Method 177

58
Using method of parking braking pedal 179
Using Method of Parking Brake Pedal 179
Identification of instrument, indicator and warning light 163
Instrument 180
General knowledge warning light 180
Comprehensive information display…………………..195
Functions of comprehensive information display 195
Switch methods of various display functions 195
Cruise information display 197
Alarm display 198
Front windshield display…………………………….. 204
Functions of front windshield display 205
Speed display 205
Irradiation scope of night view system……………..206
Image display 208
Method for using switches………………………….. 212
Method for using lamp 212
Method for using fog lamp 214
Method for using turning indicator handle 216
Method for using wiper and door and windscreen
washer 217
Method for spraying cleaning solution 218
Method for using rear window defroster and rear-view mirror
heater 219
Method for using switch of heating wire in laminated
glass of front windscreen 220
Method for using switch of emergency flash lamp 222
Method for using horn 222
Using method of OFF switch of TRC (traction control)
Using method of AFSOFF switch (adapt to front illumination
system automatically) 228
Using method of cruising devices
Parking auxiliary monitor…………………………….230
Operation in parking 233
Driving tips 236
Planned route guide line model 239
Parking assist guide line model 244
Parallel parking assist model 251
System initialization 265

59
Function of Key and Its Using Method

Smart Key
The functions like lock-up and unlocking of the vehicle door, unlocking the luggage boot cover,
switching power start-up and closing the engine can be realized if you have the smart key with you
and enter and start the system intelligently.
Please have the smart key with you.

Key（The key sed for entering and starting the system intelligently）
The key includes the electronic key and mechanical key. The mechanical key
is used as emergency standby. If the electronic key does not work, the driver
seat can be opened with the mechanical key.

1 Electronic key (main key) – this key can lock and unlock all the vehicle doors and open the
luggage boot through wireless control function and entry function which means entering and
starting the system intelligently.
2 Electronic key (auxiliary key) – this key can lock or unlock all the vehicle doors and open the
luggage boot through wireless control function.
3 Mechanical key – these keys can lock or unlock all the vehicle doors and open the luggage
boot. But these keys can not be used to start the engine.

To protect the materials locked in the luggage boot or glove box, ask the server to lock the opening
switch when stopping the car and give the electronic key to the server. Take the mechanical key with
you. The details about locking the opening switch of the luggage boot can be seen from the
“luggage boot” of this chapter.

Transceiver chip used for the engine stop devices is mounted in the electronic key. These chips can
make this device work normally so be careful not lose these keys.

FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center needs to utilize one of the electronic key to duplicate a new key
with transceiver chip inside.

■ Key Number Plate

The No. of the key is showed in the number plate. The
number plate needs to be stored in safe places like the luggage
but not leaving in the vehicle.

If the key is lost or need to use the spare key, you can utilize
the key number to ask FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center
to duplicate a key. It is suggested to remember the number of
the key and keep the number in safe place.

60
 Function of key and using method

Lock-up and unlocking, open the luggage boot cover automatically

Sensor part inside the vehicle

■ Vehicle Door Lock-up (See P57)
door handle
Take the smart key, press the lock switch and the vehicle door
will be locked.

Function

key

Locking switch
■Vehicle Door Unlocking (see P57)
Take the smart key, touch the sensor which is in the inside part
of the vehicle door handle, it will be unlocked.

Function

key

■ Luggage Boot Cover Automatic Opening (see

P60)
Take the smart key, press the opening switch of
luggage boot cover (outside the vehicle), the luggage
boot cover will be opened automatically.

Smart key Opening switch of luggage

boot cover (external)

61
 Engine Startup, Stop (See P63)

Take the Smart key, press the switch of the engine at the same time of stamping the braking pedal,

and then the engine will be started.

Engine switch

Braking pedal

Smart key

1 Stamp the braking pedal to the bottom. 2 Press the switch of the engine to start the engine
Engine switch

When preparing to stop the engine, press the engine

switch when the vehicle stopped completely

Braking Pedal

When leaving the vehicle

Attention 1. Set the transmission control in the shift.

2. Stamp the braking pedal.

3. Shut off the power.

Then make sure whether you have the smart key with you before lock-up.

62
 Function of key and using
Method of Locking up the Vehicle Door and
method
Unlocking with Smart Key

●Method of Locking up and Unlocking

Sensor part inside the door handle

Unlock Lock up
Lock up Unlock

Locking switch
Twinkle one time Twinkle two times

■ When Locking Up
Take the smart key, press the lock up switch in the vehicle door handle.
● All the vehicle doors can be locked.
● Emergency flasher twinkles one times.

■ When Unlocking
Take the smart key, hold the vehicle door handle and touch the part of sensor inside the vehicle
door handle.
● Emergency flasher twinkles two times

● Locking mode switch function

The mode can be modified, reset the vehicle door utilizes intelligent function for unlocking (see P73)

63
 General Knowledge
Working Conditions
●The smart key enters into the area where the external vehicle signal transmitter (vehicle door)
can activate and starts to verify the ID No. automatically. Locking up and unlocking operation
to the vehicle door can be executed only if it is matching.
· Utilize the vehicle door handle which can activate the smart key to execute the locking up
and unlocking operation to the vehicle door.
· Even if the smart key is in the activating area of external vehicle signal transmitter (vehicle
door), it is not able to play the function of locking up and unlocking normally if it is too
faraway or too close to the ground.
·If the smart key is in the activating area of external vehicle signal transmitter (vehicle door),
other people who does not have the smart key with him is able to execute the locking up
and unlocking operation to the vehicle door with vehicle door handle.
● Wireless remote control key system does not have intelligent function (see P72).
●If the battery of smart key is out of power and the locking up and unlocking operation is not
able to be executed through the intelligent function of the key, in this moment, please use the
mechanical key in the smart key. See the details in P76 “Using method of Mechanical
Key”.
● The switch can be removed by using the key intelligent function, cancel the key intelligent
function. See relevant details in P74 “The Removal of the Intelligent Function of the Key”.
● If the smart key is inserted into the key hole (see P77), it will not able to be locked up even if
pressing the door lock switch in the vehicle door handle.

Working Range
Vehicle exterior Within the Activating area of Vehicle exterior signal generator
signal signal (With in 70cm away from each door handle),it will be a failure if
generator
much too close to car window or door handle

Activating Area
Within 70cm away from each
door handle

64
 Function of key and using method

General Knowledge
工作条件
Lock-up, Unlock
● When locking up, the vehicle door switch in the door handle needs to be pressed and make sure the door has been
locked firmly.
· When confirming the locking situations, push the door handle within 3 seconds after the locking up operation has
been executed to confirm. Holding the door handle 3 seconds after the locking up operation will enter unlocking
status.
● If the door lock switch was pressed too early, it will not be able to be locked up sometimes.
● The unlocking operation is not able to be executed with the smart key within 3 seconds after the locking up operation.
● When pressing the door switch, if one of the doors is open, then the door-ajar alarm will sound (see P82). If the door
switch is pressed when opening the door of closing the door, the door-ajar alarm will sound. Do not touch the door
lock switch when opening and closing the vehicle door.
● When unlocking, hold the sensor part inside the handle of the vehicle door firmly. Push the door after making sure that the
door is unlocked.
· Touching other parts except the sensor inside the door handle, the door can not be opened.
· When holding the vehicle door handle with leather glove, ski glive, the unlocking response will lag or the door is
not able to be unlocked.

Sensor part Door

inside the
door handle
handle
Door handle
● To unlock the door correctly, please hold the door handle within 3 seconds after the smart key entering the activating
area of the vehicle external signal transmitter (vehicle door). It may fail if the time is over 3 seconds.
● If entering the activating area suddenly, or holding the door handle hardly, the unlocking operation may not be able to be
executed. At this moment, please release the door handle and let it restore, and then after confirming that it is in unlocking
status, push the door handle.
● When the smart key is in the activating area of internal signal transmitter (interior), the vehicle can be locked with wireless
remote control key (see P77), mechanical key (see P76), but after locking the vehicle, it will be able to utilize the intelligent
function of the key to unlock again.
● After unlocking the door, it will lock up automatically after 30 seconds if the vehicle door has not been closed.
● When the smart key is in the activating area of external signal transmitter (vehicle door), the key intelligent function may
started and unlock the door if the vehicle was washed or drenched and there is too much water in the handle. However, if the
door is not opened or closed, it will be locked up automatically after 30 seconds.
● The vehicle door which needs to be unlocked can be reset. See relevant details in P73
The specification ● using frequency of external vehicle signal transmitter (vehicle door):
60-180kHz
● Emission intensity of magnetic field: 72dBμA／m(10meters, sub- peak value)
● Emission limits of stray: 27dBμA／m (10meters, sub-peak value)
● It is not allowed to modify the emission frequency, increase emission power (including mounting

65
radio frequency power amplifier in extra) without authorization; it is not allowed to connect antenna
or change to use other transmitting antenna without authorization;
● It should not have harmful interference to other legal radio communication business when using;
once there is interference, stop using it immediately and take measures to remove the interference
before continuing to use;
● Using micropower radio equipments must endure the interference of various radio communication
businesses.
● It is not allowed to use near the plane and the airport.

66
 Method of opening the electric luggage boot cover by
utilizing key intelligent function
● Opening Method
When the luggage boot opener is activated, take the smart
key and press the luggage boot cover opener (vehicle
external) the cover will be opened completely.

Swithch of luggage
chamber
Vehicle exterior

General Knowledge
Working
工作条件 Conditions
● When the smart key is in the activating are of
vehicle external signal transmitter (vehicle door), press the luggage boot opening switch (vehicle external), and then
it will be able to verify ID code. If it is identical, the luggage boot cover will be opened automatically.
· When the smart key is in the activating are of vehicle external signal transmitter (luggage boot), the person without
the smart key can also open the luggage boot cover by pressing luggage boot opening switch.
· Even if the smart key is in the activating area of vehicle external signal transmitter (luggage boot), if the smart key is
too high or too low from the center of bumper, the function of opening the luggage boot cover automatically will not
be able to play normally.
● Wireless remote control key (see P72) does not have the intelligent function.
● When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity, it will not be able to open the luggage boot cover automatically
with the key intelligent function or remote control door lock function. At this moment, please use the mechanical key
in the smart key. See the details in P76 “Using method of Mechanical Key”.
● The switch can be removed by using the key intelligent function, cancel the key intelligent function. See relevant
details in P74 “The Removal of the Intelligent Function of the Key”.

工作范围
Working Range
within the activating area of external signal generator (about 70cm away from the
opening switch of luggage boot cover)

However, sometimes it will fail if it gets too close to the centre of rear
External vehicle signal generator
Activating area
bumper. Within 70 cm away from the opening switch
of luggage boot cover

The specification of external vehicle signal transmitter (luggage boot):

● Using frequency: 60—180kHz
● Emission intensity of magnetic field: 72dBμA／m(10meters, sub- peak value)
● Emission limits of stray: 27dBμA／m (10meters, sub-peak value)
● It is not allowed to modify the emission frequency, increase emission power (including mounting
radio frequency power amplifier in extra) without authorization; it is not allowed to connect

67
 antenna or change to use other transmitting antenna without authorization;
● It should not have harmful interference to other legal radio communication business when using;
once there is interference, stop using it immediately and take measures to remove the interference
before continuing to use;
● Using micropower radio equipments must endure the interference of various radio communication
businesses.
● It is not allowed to use near the plane and the airport.

68
Method of opening the electric luggage boot Function of the key and the using method
cover by utilizing key intelligent function
● Switching Method of Power Switch

Engine Switch 1 Take the smart key and sit in the driving seat.
Operating light
2 Do not stamp the braking pedal; press the engine switch,
switch power.
Pressing OFF each time, the power will switch as the following
sequence.
OFF→ACC(Orange)→IG(Orange)→OFF→ACC…
● Confirm the status of the power according to the color of
operating lights of the switch.
● If the switch is pressed too early, sometimes it is not able to switch the power. Repeat it.
Press it and confirm it so as to reach the expected power status.

Power status Operating light The functions of various power status

OFF All the electric parts are in
Off
↓ non-working status
ACC The electric parts like audio can be
On (Orange)
↓ used
IGC On (Orange) All the electric parts can be used

→means press the engine switch without stamping the braking pedal.

Attention If the power switch is in the position of ACC or IG for a long time,
it will the electricity of the storage battery.

69
 General Knowledge
Working
工作条件Conditions
● If the smart key is not in the activating area of external vehicle signal transmitter (interior), it will not be able to
finish the operation of switching the power by utilizing the key intelligent function.

●The switch can be removed by using the key intelligent function, cancel the key intelligent function. See
relevant details in P74 “The Removal of the Intelligent Function of the Key”.

● Please do not put the smart key on the instrument panel, sundry platform, floor or storage because there
is the possibility of being unable to switch the power.

Working
工作范围Range
Internal vehicle signal transmitter (interior)

The engine can be started sometimes if it is very close to the window

outside the vehicle.

Interior signal
transceiver Activating area (interior)

Anti-theft Device
Sometimes the power can not be switched because of the function of anti-theft devices (see P117).

Convenient Function
Auto OFF Function

When the transmission control is in the shift while the power switch in the the ACC position for 1 hour, to
avoid electricity consumption, the power will be set to OFF position automatically.

When the Battery of Smart Key is Lack of Electricity

When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity, it will not be able to switch the power by utilizing the

intelligent function of the key

When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity, please insert the smart key into the key hole and switch the

power (system key function). See relevant details about replacing the smart key battery in P305.

Key Hole

Smart Key

70
 Function of the key and the using method
Method of Starting and Closing the Engine by
Utilizing the Intelligent Function of the Key

● Smart Key Hole

Smart key and key hole is different with the traditional key in
shape.
When the ignition switch is OFF or the ignition switch is set at
ACC and the transmission control is in the position of “P”, the
key can be pulled out.

When using the key, the following issues must be remember clearly:
●A complete insertion is a must when inserting the key. ● When pulling out the key, the key may be
ejected by the ring. So it needs to operate carefully.
● If the key is not able to be pulled out, insert it completely again before pulling out.
● If the electricity of the key battery is used up, insert the key into the key hole so as to cancel the
engine stop devices and start the engine normally. Relevant details can be seen in “Engine Stop
Devices” of this chapter.

Warning Do not put your finger into the key hole, otherwise it may be injured

● Starting Method of the Engine

Parking Braking Throttle
Pedal Pedal 1 Confirm the position of the pedal.
Adjust the position of the seat and adopt correct driving gesture (see
P122); confirm the position of each pedal.
● Make sure whether you’ve the smart key with you.

Braking Pedal

2 Stamp the braking pedal with right foot and make sure the
parking brake is stringing.

71
 3 Confirm the position of the transmission control.
Make sure that the transmission control is in the position of .
● The engine can also be started at shift. But in safety
consideration, it is suggested to set the transmission control in the
position of .

Operating indicator 4 At the same time of stamping the braking pedal, press
the switch of the engine, the engine will start.

● The operating light of the switch is ON and in green color. It

will go out after starting up.

● At the same time of stamping the braking pedal, press

the switch of the engine, the engine will be started no matter
the power is in what condition.

● If the engine is not able to start, do not stamp the braking

pedal first, press the switch of the engine, set the power in the
Engine Switch
position of OFF, and then stamp the braking pedal with more
powerful strength than that of before and press the engine switch again.

Lock Core Typed Ignition Key★

● Vehicles have been equipped two kinds of keys

1 Main keys – these keys can unlock all locks. FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center needs one of them to
duplicate a new key with transceiver chip.

Since the locking vehicle and luggage bag does not need the key, it
is a must to have a spare main key to be used when the key is locked
in the vehicle by careless.
2 Auxiliary key – this key is not able to be used to open
luggage boot and sundry box.
To protect the materials locked in the luggage boot or
glove box, ask the server to lock the opening switch when
stopping the car and give the electronic key to the server.
The details about locking the opening switch of the luggage boot can be seen from the “luggage
boot” of this chapter.

72
 Function of the key and the using method

The transceiver chip which is used for the stop devices of engine is mounted in the head parts of
main and auxiliary keys. These chips can make this equipment work normally so pay attention not
to lose these keys. If using the keys duplicated by yourself, it will not be able to start or stop the
engine.

Attention Follow the following items when using the keys with
transceiver chip inside.
● When starting the engine, the key ring is not allowed to be laid on the haft of the key, nor can the key ball
be put on the haft of the key. Otherwise the engine will not start or even if it started it will stop soon.
●When starting the engine, the keys which were mixed together with other key ball with transceiver (including the keys
of the vehicle) were not allowed to be used, nor can lay the key plates of other keys on the key haft. Otherwise the
engine will not start or even if it started it will stop soon. In such event, pull out the key and take off one
of the other keys with transceiver (including the keys of other vehicle), or clutch or cover them with
hands, insert the key again to start the engine.
● The key haft can not be bent.
● Do not cover the key haft with the materials which will cut off the electromagnetic wave.
● Do not hit other substances with the key hard.
● Do not put the key in the place with high temperature for a long time, such as on the instrument panel
and engine hood under direct sunlight.
●Do not emerge the key into water or clean in ultrasonic washer.
● Do not use the key together with electromagnetic materials.

73
 ■ Key Number Plate
The number of the key is marked on the number plate.
The number plate needs to be stored in safe places like the
luggage but not holding in hand.

If the key is lost or need to use the spare key, you can utilize the key number to ask FAW Hongqi
Sales and Service Center to duplicate a key. It is suggested to remember the number of the key and
keep the number in safe place.

● Ignition Switch (Lock Core Typed Ignition Key)★

●“START”—— Engine starts. After releasing the key, it will go back to the position of ON.
· See relevant starting methods in chapter 3.
●“ON”—— The engine starts and all the auxiliary equipments can work. This is the normal driving
position.
●“ACC”—— The auxiliary equipments like radio can be operated but the engine stops.
· If the door of driver is opened when the key is in the position of ACC or LOCK, the buzzer will
remained the driver to take out the key.
●“LOCK"—— The engine stops and the steering wheel is locked. Only in this position can be key
be taken out.
· To turn the ignition switch from the position of ACC to LOCK, the transmission control must be
in the position of “P”.
· Once the key has been taken out, the stop device of the engine will set automatically. (see the
“Engine Stop Devices” in Chapter 1.2)
· When starting the engine, it seems that the key is stuck in the position of LOCK. To release it,
first of all, make sure that the key has been completely inserted and then swing the steering
wheel at the same time of turning the key.
· When the key turns to the position of ACC, ON, or START, if all the pointers of the meters moved
slightly, it does not mean malfunction.

74
 Function of the key and the using method

Attention When the Engine is not working, do not leave the key in the position of
“ON” to avoid the storage battery discharging and the ignitor damage.

Under the following situations, the stop devices of the engine will set automatically:
●Vehicles with Lock Core Typed Ignition Key – pull the key out of the ignition switch ★
●Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are off) – pull the key out of
the key hole.
●Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are on) – ignition switch off.
●When the indicator light begins to twinkle, it shows the system has been set.
If any of the following situations happened to the indicator light, please contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center
● The indicator light keeps in ON status.
● The indicator light does not twinkle under the following situations.
Vehicles with Lock Core Typed Ignition Key – when the key is pulled out of the ignition switch★
Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are off) – pull the key out of
the key hole. Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are on) – when
the ignition switch is off.
● The indicator light twinkles.
Under the following situations, the stop devices of the engine will be cancelled automatically.
●Vehicles with Lock Core Typed Ignition Key – insert the key into the ignition switch.★
●Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are off) – insert the key into
the key TL$.
●Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems (when the systems are on) – take the smart key
into the vehicle, press the button “ENGINESTARTSTOP”. If the electricity of the battery of the
smart key is used up, insert the key into the key hole.
When the system is cancelled, the indicator light will go out.
When asking FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center to duplicate the new key with transceiver chip inside,
the distributor shop needs the key number and the main key (Vehicles with Lock Core Typed Ignition
Key) or electronic key (Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup systems). However, the quantity
of the keys that can be duplicated in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center is limited. If keys
duplicated by oneself are used, the engine would not be started or stopped.

75
 Attention Never refit, disassemble or decompose the stop device of the engine. If refitted or changed

without any reference, the system would not be assured in normal operation.

Specifications of the Stop devices

● Using frequency: 50-190 kHz
● Emission intensity of magnetic field: 72dBμA／m(10meters, sub- peak value)
● Emission limits of stray: 27dBμA／m (10meters, sub-peak value)
● It is not allowed to modify the emission frequency, increase emission power (including mounting
radio frequency power amplifier in extra) without authorization; it is not allowed to connect
antenna or change to use other transmitting antenna without authorization;
● It should not have harmful interference to other legal radio communication business when using;
once there is interference, stop using it immediately and take measures to remove the interference
before continuing to use;
● Using micropower radio equipments must endure the interference of various radio communication
businesses.
● Never use it near the plane or the airport.

● Wireless Remote Control Devices ★

Vehicles with Lock Core Typed Ignition Key
1 Lock up switch
2 Unlock switch
3 Luggage boot opener
4 Indicator light

● Vehicles with lock core typed ignition key – four kinds of wireless remote control keys can be
used in one vehicle. Consult FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for relevant details.
● Vehicles with intelligent entry and startup system – five kinds of wireless remote control keys can be
used in one vehicle. (Amount them, two kinds of auxiliary keys without the functions of
intelligent entry and startup the system can be selected). Consult
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for relevant details.
Locking up operations (vehicles with lock core typed ignition
key).

76
 Function of the key and the using method

● Engine Stop Method

Make the vehicle stopped completely and then press the switch of the engine.
● Power OFF, the engine stops.

Warning
Do Remember Not to Start the Engine Outside the Vehicle

● Do remember not to start the engine outside the vehicle because it is easy to cause accident. So be sure to
start the engine on the driver’s seat.

● Do not close the engine in the process of driving. If the engine is not in working condition, the braking

assistor and power steering gear will out of use, the braking efficiency will be reduced and the operation of

steering wheel will become heavy and easy to cause accident.

● Moving the vehicle within a small scope also needs to start the engine. If not start the engine but slide

utilizing the slop, it will be easy to cause accident.

● After operating the engine, if the operating indicator of the engine is green and twinkling, or there is
message remainder like “the steering lockup is not removed” in the comprehensive information display,

never drive the vehicle. Since the steering lockup has not been removed, it is easy to cause accident.

Attention If the operating indicator of the engine switch is red and keeps
twinkling, it means there is something wrong with the system

● If the operating indicator of the engine switch is orange and keeps twinkling, it means there is

something wrong with the system. Please contact with the nearest FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center

rapidly.
● During the process of driving, if the engine stopped while the vehicle is slipping, it is best not to pull the
key out or open the vehicle door before the vehicle stopped safely because there is the potential danger like
the steering lockup functions.
● If there is message remainder like “the steering lockup is not removed” in the comprehensive information
display, it means there is something wrong with the system. Please contact with the nearest FAW Sales and
Service Center rapidly.
● If the switch is locked, please contact with the nearest FAW Sales and Service Center.
Do not touch the engine switch with greasy hand.
● Do not let the beverage splashes and leaks into the switch of the engine. In case such situation happens,
please contact with the nearest FAW Sales and Service Center rapidly.
●If the vehicle is laid in hot environment for a long time, the surface of the engine switch will become hot and
incline to cause scald, so please operate carefully.
● If the vehicle interior lighting lamp in the front is on while the key hole lighting lamp is off, please contact
with the nearest FAW Sales and Service Center rapidly.

77
 General Knowledge
Engine
工作范围 Emergency Stop
During the process of driving, pressing the switch of the engine for over 3 seconds will stop the engine.
Unless there is emergent situation, do not stop the vehicle during the process of driving easily.
● Switch the Power to the ACC status.
● Under this condition, auto OFF function failed (see P62).
● When it is judged that the smart key is not in the activating area of internal vehicle signal transceiver (interior), it will no
t be able to start the engine with smart key.

工作条件
Working Conditions
●The switch can be removed by using the key intelligent function, cancel the key intelligent function. See
relevant details in P74 “The Removal of the Intelligent Function of the Key”.
● Please do not put the smart key on the instrument panel, sundry platform, floor or storage because there is
the possibility of being unable to switch the power. In addition, the engine will not be able to be started if the key is
in the luggage boot.
● If the operation of starting the engine has been executed but failed and operating indication type of the engine
switch is green and twinkling, it means the steering lockup devices have not been removed. There will be
message remainder like “the steering lockup is not removed” in the comprehensive information display. Under such
circumstance, please turn the steering wheel left and right, stump the braking pedal and press the engine switch.
● If the engine startup and stop operations are executed repeatedly within a short time, the engine will not be able to
start sometimes. Please start the engine again after 10 seconds.
●When the storage battery is lack of power, sometimes the steering lockup function will fail. So please be careful.

工作范围
Working Range
Within the activating area of internal vehicle
signal transreceiver (interior)
internal vehicle signal transmitter (interior)
internal vehicle signal transmitter
The engine can be started sometimes if it is very close to the window outside the vehicle.

Activating area (interior) Key hole

Key hole

工作范围 Devices
Anti-theft
Sometime the engine is not able to be started because of the
function of the anti-theft devices. (see P117)
When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity
Smart Key
工作范围
When the Battery of Smart Key is Lack of Electricity
When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity, the engine will not be able to get started with the intelligent function of the key.
When the battery of the smart key is lack of electricity, please insert the smart key into the key hole and start
the engine (system key function). Please see the details about changing the battery of the smart key in P305.
Specification of Internal Vehicle Signal Transceiver
● Using frequency: 50-190 kHz
● Emission intensity of magnetic field: 72dBμA／m(10meters, sub- peak value)

78
● Emission limits of stray: 27dBμA／m (10meters, sub-peak value)
● It is not allowed to modify the emission frequency, increase emission power (including mounting
radio frequency power amplifier in extra) without authorization; it is not allowed to connect
antenna or change to use other transmitting antenna without authorization;
● It should not have harmful interference to other legal radio communication business when using;
once there is interference, stop using it immediately and take measures to remove the interference
before continuing to use;
● Using micropower radio equipments must endure the interference of various radio communication
businesses.
● Never use it near the plane or the airport.

79
 Function of the key and the using method
Function of Smart Key

● The operations can be executed with the intelligent key (key

intelligent function)
The following operations can be executed only if you have the smart key
with you (in clothes pockets or bags) but need not to take it out:
● Lockup, unlock (see P57).
● Luggage boot start automatically (see P60).
● Switch power (see P61).
Smart key
● The start and stop of the engine (see P63)

● The Operations When the Battery of Smart Key is Lack of

Electricity
■ Mechanical key
Mechanical Key
If the battery has no electricity when locking, unlocking and luggage
boot lockup, the locking up and unlocking operation can be executed
with mechanical keys. The locking up and unlocking operations can also
be executed to the storage box.

Key hole
■ System Key Function
When switching the power and starting the engine, if the smart battery is
lack of electricity, the keys can be inserted into the key hole to switch the
power and start the engine.

Smart key

● Operations can be executed by utilizing the function of wireless

remote control key (see P79)
The Operations executed through the wireless remote control key function. (see P79)
LED display Luggage Through pressing the switch of smart key, unlocking switch,
boot cover
switch
luggage boot switch to execute the operations like locking up,
unlocking and luggage boot automatically opening.

Opening switch
Locking switch
80
 Attention Smart key is the electric parts of the inside signal transceiver. To
avoid malfunction, please follow the following issues strictly.

● Do not put it on the places with high temperature like the instrument panel.
● Do not dismount.
● Do not bend, drop or strongly knock it freely.
● Do not emerge it into water.
● Do not use key chain with magnet.
● Do not put it near to the electric products like television, audio, computer and other medical electric
instruments like low frequency therapeutic equipments.
● Do not clean it with ultrasonic wave cleaner.
● If the key gets contact with the fuel like the petrol, polishing composition, grease it will lead to the
phenomenon like distortion or crack.

General Knowledge
Smart Key and Wireless Remote Control Devices

● There are 3 keys in all (2 smart keys, 1 wireless remote control key).

gray
Smart Key Wireless Remote Control Key

● The wireless remote control key does not have intelligent function.
● The smart key utilizes the microwave. Using in the following environment will damage its function and lead to key
intelligent function, wireless remote control door lock up function are not able to work normally. In this moment,
please adopts the mechanical key and system key function to operate.
·If there is strong electric wave generation equipments like television tower, power station, broadcasting station,
airport, etc.
· Having the wireless communication equipments like wireless interphone, cell phone, etc.
· There are many smart keys around.
· The key contacts with the metal products or being covered
· Electric wave wireless remote control key is used around
· The key is put near to the electric products like computer
● Special processing techniques are required to manufacture the key, so please do not purchase it from the shops other
than FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
● If the key was lost by careless, to avoid theft or accident, please contact with FAW Sales and Service Center fast.

Working Range of Key Intelligent Function

If intelligent operation is needed to be executed, the smart key and
vehicle will automatically verify the ID code ※ only if you have the smart
key with you and entering into the activating area of the smart key (interior and external
vehicle signal transceiver activating area), it is valid only if they are matching.
● When the storage battery (battery) of the smart key is lack of electricity, being disturbed by
strong electric wave and being in the noisy environment, it needs to reduce the activating area
and sometime it may do not work. In addition, it will also be influenced by the shape of the vehicle body. It is out of work in
some position
.※ Verifying with the ID Code means verify the ID code of the vehicle with the ZD code of smart key.

81
 Function of the key and the using method
Other Functions

● Switching Function of Unlocking Mode

Switch of luggage cover Press the lock-up switch of the smart key and the switch of the luggage
boot cover at the same time for five seconds, for every press, it is
switched to unlocking mode, just as the following chart.
Locking switch
Buzz Buzz
Comprehensive
Unlocking Outside Inside
Messages Display Mode Instruction
mode the the
Screen
Vehicle Vehicle
Grasping the door pull of the
Unlocking driver’s seat can only unlock the
buzzing
of the car buzzing car door key of driver’s seat. If
three
door of one time grasping the door pulls of other
times
driver’s seat seats, it will unlock all the car door
keys.
unlocking Whichever door pull is grasped, all
Buzzing Buzzing
of all car the car door keys would be
two times one time
doors unlocked.
independent
unlocking The car door would not unlock
Buzzing Buzzing
of unless its own door pull is grasped.
one time one time
individual
car door
The current selected unlocking mode will be showed on the display screen of comprehensive
information, at the same time, will send out different buzz warning sound according to different modes.
● When the car door of the driver’s seat is unlocked, there will be three bleeps outside the vehicle and
one toot inside it.
●When all the car doors are unlocked, there will be two bleeps outside the vehicle and one toot inside it.
● When the car doors are unlocked independently, there will be one bleep outside the vehicle and one
toot inside it.

General Knowledge
Working Conditions
工作条件
When the power switch is at the position of “ OFF” or “ACC”, it can be switched over.
工作条件 Mode
Unlocking
● Using the intelligent function of the key, the mode could be resettled to choose the car door which
can be unlocked through intelligent function.
● Under the unlocking mode of the driver’s seat car door and the unlocking mode of all car doors, in
order to ensure the safety of the driver, if getting into the vehicle with the smart key through the car
door of the driver’s seat, then other car doors except the driver’s seat could not be unlocked by the
smart key.

82
 During the reposition of the unlocking action of the smart key, you should get off the vehicle with
the smart key and further more keep away from the active region. However, sometimes it can not
be unlocked even five seconds after getting off, at this time, wait for another five seconds before
carrying out the unlocking operation.

● The Removal of the Intelligent Functions

Smart key
removal Removal 0FF Removal 0N
switch (Smart Key Works) (Smart Key Fails)

Press the smart key removal switch under the driver’s seat and make it in the status of “Removal ON”
to make the smart key is not able to work.
● Press the switch again to make it in the status of “Removal OFF” and resume the intelligent
function of the key.

Attention
There is the switch group of tyre pressure alarm system in its left part.
Do not press it wrongly

● Saving Electricity Function

If the smart key is in the activating area of external vehicle signal transreceiver for a long time (see P58,
P71), the smart key and vehicle will communicate regularly, so it will consume the electricity of the
smart key and the storage battery of the vehicle. To avoid meaningless electricity consumption, you can
select one of the following methods to control it.
● The smart key has not communicated for more than 14 days, or the smart key is in the activating area
of external vehicle signal transceiver surpasses the recovery of the intelligent function of the key.
Get close to the vehicle, press any switch in the key (LOCK, UNLOCK, switch of luggage boot),
verify the ID Code.
Press the door switch in the vehicle door handle and execute the lockup operation.
Insert the mechanical key into the key hole to execute the unlocking operation.

General Knowledge
工作条件
If the vehicle has not been used for a long time
Intelligent entry and startup system send signal to external vehicle to communicate regularly
when it is in locking up status. Therefore, if the vehicle is not used for a long time, the storage
battery of the vehicle will lose power. If the vehicle is not used for a long time, set the smart
key removal switch at the position of “Removal ON” (intelligent function of the key does not
work).

83
 Function of the key and the using method

● The foot illumination function below the rear view mirror of the
vehicle door

For the convenience of identifying the ground situation in the night, foot illumination light is set
below the rear view mirror of the vehicle door.
Under the following situations, the illumination time is about 15 seconds.
Interior front part illumination (when the type of interior switch is vehicle door) is lightened at the
same time.
● Taking the smart key and entering in the activating area of external vehicle signal transceiver
(vehicle door).
● When unlocking with the wireless remote control key function or interior electric door switch (see
P93).
Under the following situations, turn off the light immediately:
● When taking the smart key and pressing the door switch in the vehicle door handle
● When locking up with wireless key function and vehicle door electric door switch
● When the transmission control is set in the shift other than shift .

General Knowledge
Working
工作条件Conditions
The foot illumination light below the rear view mirror of the vehicle door will be lighten when the
smart key enters into the activating area of external vehicle signal transceiver (vehicle door) from
outside area. If staying within this area for a long time, the light will not be on continuously. In
addition, if the key stays in outside for about 3 seconds before entering into the activating area, the
light will not be on.
工作条件
Function Variation, Removal
The function can vary as below. Consult relevant details from FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Center.
● The Removal of the foot illumination function below the vehicle door rear view mirror.
● Change the persistent time of the light from being on to being off.

● The opening and closing mechanism of door glass, skylight (limits to the type
with skylight)
When utilizing the key intelligent functions and press the door lock in the handle of the vehicle door
for more than 3 seconds, and press all the vehicle doors and close the skylight.
● Leaving the hand from the door switch, it will stop closing.
● When starts to closing, the buzzer will resound.

84
 Do not press the vehicle door switch meaninglessly for a long time.
Warning Getting too close to the vehicle door handle is easy to lead to the closing
operation unconsciously and cause the clamping injury to the hand or head

Attentio If all the vehicle windows and skylights are closed, do not
n press the door switch continuously.

General Knowledge
Working
工作条件 Conditions
● When the smart key inserting into the key hole or the power switch is at the position of
IG or ACC, it is not able to work.
● The function of closing door glass, skylight can be removed. Consult FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service Center for relevant details.

The Operation does not utilize the key intelligent functions

● Mechanical Key
Mechanical
When the smart key battery is lack of electricity, you can use the
mechanical key inside the smart key to execute the vehicle door locking up
Key and unlocking and luggage boot cover unlocking operation. In addition, it
can also lock up and unlock the storage box.

The method of door locking up and unlocking……………………………………See P89

The lockup and unlocking method of car door glass, skylight(vehicles with
skylight)………………………………………………………………………………See P98, P103
The unlocking method of luggage boot cover………………………………………See P104
The lockup and unlocking method of the storage box………………………………see P241
Mechanical ■ The method of pulling out the mechanical key
Key 1 Untie the lockup and lock catch
Move the lock catch of the smart key along the arrow
Lock
direction,and then untie the lock catch.
Catch

2 Pull out the mechanical key

Lock When laying back the key
Catch

85
 Move the lock catch of the smart key along the arrow direction, and insert the mechanical
key into the previous place according to the instruction of the left picture.

The using method and function of the key

General Knowledge
工作条件
Mechanical Key
The locking up and unlocking of the storage box can only use mechanical key. When checking the
smart key at hotels or some other places, you should pull the mechanical key out of the smart
key(or wireless remote control key). (see reference on P79）

● The Function of Wireless Remote Control Key

LED display People can lock up or unlock all the car doors through electric wave
Luggage boot after leaving the vehicle(about 1m).
cover switch

Unlocking switch

Locking switch

The method of lockup and unlocking．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．．see P111

The lockup and unlocking method of car door glass, skylight(limited to vehicle types with
skylights)．．．
．．．．．．．………………………………………………………………see P111
The unlocking method of electric luggage boot cover．．．．．．．．．．
．．．．．．．．．．．．see P111

● The Function of the System Key

When the smart key is lack of electricity, insert the smart key into the key hole and then you will be
able to switch power and start the engine.
■ The Function of the System Key
Insert the key into the key hole
When pulling it out, grasp the main body and pull it out
against one’s own direction.

Key hole

86
 Attention
Insert the key in place

● Insert the key in place

●。When inserting the key, avoid overexerting or inverse insertion, or it will cause malfunction.
Do not insert into the key hole. Do not insert the key with water or oil into the key hole, or it will cause
malfunction, and at this time insert the key after wiping it clean.
●Do not insert the key with water or oil into the key hole, or it will cause malfunction, and at this time insert
the key after wiping it clean.
●Do not insert the key when the key body appears damage(nicks or cracks), or it will cause malfunction.
●Do not insert keys with glue, or it will leave in the key hole or cause malfunction.
●Do not pull the key chain when pulling out the key, or it will cause malfunction.
●Do not force to pull the key out of the key hole when the key stuck in it, or it will cause malfunction.
●Do not touch the opening surface of the key hole with oil hands.
●Do not insert fingers or other objects into the opening part of the key . It is easy to damage and cause
malfunction.
●Do not splash drinks into the opening part of the key hole, if happened with carelessness, please contact
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center immediately.
●If touched with petrol or other fuels, polishes, oil materials, the key will cause deformation or crack
phenomenon.

General Knowledge

When pulling out the key

When pulling out the key. The key can be pulled out when the power switch is at the position of OFF, ACC and the shifting
lever is at .
● The power switch will be off automatically when pulling out the key with the power switch at “ACC”

Key Hole
● When the power switch is at the position of IG or when the engine is under the state of operation, the
key will be locked and can not be pulled out.
● When pulling out the key during locking up, it will slip several millimeters forward. In this state, the
key won’t be pulled out even if the power switch is set at OFF or ACC position.

The specifications of smart, wireless remote control key

● Frequency range: 315-316MHz
●Transmit power: ≤6000μV／m(field intensity)
●Emission limits of stray: ≤≤600μV／m(field intensity)
●Utilized bandwidth ≤≤300kHz (KHz)
● It is not allowed to modify the emission frequency, increase emission power (including mounting

87
radio frequency power amplifier in extra) without authorization; it is not allowed to connect antenna
or change to use other transmitting antenna without authorization;
● It should not have harmful interference to other legal radio communication business when using;
once there is interference, stop using it immediately and take measures to remove the interference
before continuing to use;
● Using micropower radio equipments must endure the interference of various radio communication
businesses;
● Never use it near the plane or the airport.

88
 Function of the key and the using method

Under the following situations

During the process of driving, if the following situation happened, corresponding measures should
be taken. The measures must be taken on the basis of operating intelligent entry and startup system.
● When the intelligent function of the key does not work
Please confirm the following situations:
key intelligent function removal switch is set at the position of
“Removal ON” (see P74).
There is smart key in the key hole.
The smart key does not have the battery.
The electricity saving function has not worked (see P74).
The smart key is not taken. Only the wireless remote control key
is available (see P72)

● When leaving the car at the shop or gas station

Set the switch of the power at the position of OFF, take the smart
key, lock the door.
Check the locking status within 3 seconds after locking the door

● When checking the vehicle key in the restaurant or lending the

vehicle to others.

Please hand over the key as the following methods:

1. Pull out the mechanical key from the smart key or
wireless remote control key (see P79).
2. Set the luggage opening removal switch at the position
of “ON” (see P107) if necessary, lock the storage box
(see P261).
3. Take the mechanical key with you, give out the smart
key or wireless remote control key.

89
 ● When the person with other standard smart keys in the vehicle

The anti-back locking function of the key functions. It is

not able to lock from outside (see P83)
Mechanical key (see P89)

● When the person with other standard smart keys is riding the vehicle

When it is not able to unlock with the smart key,

please use the following method.
Utilize the mechanical key (see P89)

Issues need to be known and mastered

Smart key has may functions which are convenient and practical. However, in different using
environment and conditions it may do not work and sometime malfunction may be caused because
of misoperation.
Please read the following issues so as to use the smart key correctly.

● Issues need to be known

■ The smart key must be taken by the driver.
■ Alarm sound and alarm indication.
Interior alarm sound
External alarm sound Du
Dududu

Comprehensive message display

90
 Function of the key and the using method

To avoid the phenomenon like smart key being taken out by passengers from the vehicle and
cause the engine is not able to restart, or the vehicle being started by accident because of
misoperation, or the vehicle being stolen, intelligent entry and startup system set the alarm
remainder or remanding with the comprehensive message display. If the alarm resound or alarm
remainder appears, it is a must to confirm the situation of the vehicle and smart key (see P82).
■ Smart Key system adopts the microwave
When the smart key is taken together with the cell phone, covered by metal products or laid near
the electric products like the computer, the intelligent function of the key will fail sometimes.
■ The activating area of smart key may reduce sometimes, or fails to work.
When the battery of the smart key is lack of electricity, or being in the noisy environment and strong
electric wave environment, it may reduce the activating area and sometime it may do not work. In
addition, it will also be influenced by the shape of the vehicle body. It is out of work in some position.
■ After locking the vehicle door, if the smart key is in the activating area of external vehicle
signal transceiver, it will consume the electricity of vehicle storage battery and smart key
battery.
If the smart key is in the activating area of external vehicle signal transreceiver, the smart key and
vehicle will communicate regularly, so it will consume the electricity of the smart key and the
storage battery of the vehicle if it is in such kind of status for a long time. If the vehicle is not used,
please do not put the smart key around the vehicle (within 5 meters).
■ Under the locking condition, the vehicle door will verify regularly so it keeps consuming the
electricity of the storage battery of the vehicle.
Under the locking condition, the vehicle door will send signal regularly so if the vehicle does not
move for a long time, it will consume the electricity of the storage battery. So it the vehicle is not
used for a long time, please set the key intelligent function removal switch at the position of
“Removal ON” (the intelligent function of the key does not work).
● See the details about removing the intelligent function of the key in P74.
■ The electricity of the battery of the smart key is often in consuming status.
● Since the smart key is often communicate with the vehicle so it needs to consume the
electricity in the key. The service life of the battery is different for the using conditions, but
normally it can maintain 1 – 3 years. (Even if it is not used at all, it is consuming the
electricity). When the electricity is limited, please replace it with new battery.
● The smart key often receives the electric wave, if it receives the strong electric wave for a long
time, the electricity consumption is obvious. So please do not put it next to the electric parts.
Main Electric products with large influence (it is expected to keep 1 meter’s distance in
normal time) (example) -
Television, computers, electromagnetic wave therapeutic equipment, power station, cordless
telephone in charge, mobile phone, electronic medical equipment and so on. When replacing new
batteries, please use the screw with high precision. You will be able to operate it by yourself by

91
 referring to the contents in P305 “the replacement of the battery of smart key”. However, to
avoid accident (battery damage), it is best to go to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for
replacement.
■ Having the function of mechanical key and system key.
When the battery of smart key is lack of electricity, you can utilize the mechanical key in the
smart key to lock and unlock the vehicle door.
Insert the smart key into the key hole can start the engine, too.
●Mechanical Key…………………………see P76.
●System key function………………………see P77.
■ Wireless remote control key does not have the key intelligent function (see P72)
■ The function that the intelligent operation can be removed
Setting the key intelligent function removal switch at the position of “Removal ON” will be able to
make the key intelligent function out of work.
●Remove the key intelligent function……………………see P74.

92
 What’s more, under the following situations, the key intelligent function does not work. If the key
intelligent function does not work, please confirm it.
● When the smart key is in the key hole
● When the smart key has no battery
● When the Power save function works
The electric wave that has been ejected will have effect to the medical
Warning
electric instruments like cardiac pacemaker. Please confirm it with the
medical electric instrument manufacturer in advance.
Warning alarm·early warning function and warning indication

● Warning alarm·early warning function and warning indication

Interior alarm sound
External alarm sound Intelligent entry and startup system to prevent starting again or
Du misoperation, warning can be resound inside and outside the
Dududu
vehicle or utilize the comprehensive message display to warn (see
P176), so as to draw the attention.
If the alarm resound or warning remainder appears, make sure to
check the situation of the vehicle and smart key.

● Early-warning function of the alarm sound

■ The function of preventing forgetting to shut down the power
Warning sound in the vehicle
Remainder of forgetting to cut down the power
Du…（Continuous buzz）
When the power switch is in the position of ACC, if the transmission control is set in the shift of
at this moment, open the driving seat, the power alarm will resound in the vehicle and make
the buzz like “Du, Du…”. When the power switch is in the position of OFF, no warning shall buzz.
When the power switch is in OFF position while the steering devices are not locked, if opening the
driver’s door at the moment, the warning alarm shall resound in the vehicle.

Remainder of forgetting to cut down the power

Warning Sound out of the vehicle

Hua（lasts for about 2 seconds）

93
When the power switch is in the position of ACC, IG or the engine is in working conditions, set the

transmission control in the shift of , close all the vehicle doors, when you preparing to lock up

the door by pressing the lock in the door handle utilizing the key intelligent function, there will be

the sound “Hua” which is to remaind the power is not shut down. It is not able to lock up at this

moment.

94
 Function of the key and the using method

■ Alarm of incomplete vehicle door closing

Warning Sound out of the vehicle
Remainder of forgetting to cut down the power
Hua（lasts for about 10 seconds）
When the power is in OFF position while one of the doors is in open status, if utilize key intelligent
function to press the vehicle door handle locking up switch, the warning sound out of the vehicle will last
for over 10 seconds. The following methods can stop the buzzing of the alarming sound.
● Close all the vehicle doors
● Press the unlocking switch in the smart key.

General Knowledge
工作条件 vehicle door closing
Alarm of incomplete
When opening and closing the vehicle door, if touching the door lock switch and the incomplete
door closing alarm begins to work so be careful not to touch the door lock switch when opening
and closing the vehicle door.

■ Function of Preventing the smart key from being back locked in the vehicle

Warning Sound out of the vehicle Remainder about the smart key back
Hua（lasts for about 2 seconds） locking in the vehicle
When the power switch is in OFF position and all the vehicle doors were closed while the smart
key was left in the vehicle, utilizing the intelligent function of the key to press the door switch in
the door handle, the alarm sound “Hua” comes out from the outside of the vehicle and is not able
to lock up (it is still not able to be locked up even if the vehicle door switch is pressed to the
locking status side and then close the door).
General Knowledge

Function of preventing
工作条件 the smart key being back locked in the vehicle
● If the smart key was left on the instrument panel, sundry platform, floor, storage box, the
Function of preventing the smart key being back locked in the vehicle may do not work
sometimes.

■ Function of preventing the smart key being back locked in the luggage boot
External Alarm
Remanding of the smart key being back
Hua（Lasts for about 10 seconds） locked in the luggage boot cover.
When putting the smart key into the luggage boot cover, the alarm buzz will resound for 10 seconds.
Although the boot cover can be closed at this time, if pressing the opening switch of the luggage
boot (see P60), the boot cover can be opened.

95
 Attention
Do not put the smart key in the luggage boot

● The function of preventing the smart key from being left in the luggage boot of the smart key may do not
work according to its location (near the spare tyre, side part of interior of luggage boot), status (near the
metal bag and metal products) and the electric environment of the surrounding.
● If the smart key is locked in the luggage boot, according to the function of preventing preventing the smart
key being back locked in the luggage boot, the boot can be opened. So pay attention to anti-theft.
· If the external alarm buzzed when locking the luggage boot, make sure to check the situation of the luggage
boot.

General Knowledge
The anti-back
工作条件 locking function of the luggage boot key
When closing the luggage boot cover, if the smart key is too close to the luggage boot, it will
cause external vehicle alarm buzz so as to draw the attention

● The early warning function of the alarm buzz

Main alarm mark
When the smart key is not in the vehicle, it will alarm in the
comprehensive message display.
· (main alarming mark) twinkling

Comprehensive message display

The battery is ■ The remanding of lacking of electricity of the smart key
lack of electricity

The power switch is in the position of IG, or after 20 minutes’ starting the engine, if set the power
switch in the position of OFF, it will remind that the voltage of the smart key is low.
● The remanding time is as long as about 5 seconds.
● Interior alarming sound “Du (One time)” Buzz at the same time

General Knowledge
Alarming
工作条件Indication
When the voltage of the battery of smart key is close to 2V (3V in general), the indication will
appear. When indication appears, please replace the battery of smart key (see P305).

96
 Function of the key钥匙的功能及使用方法
and using method

Please set at
■ Transmission control position alarming instruction
shift P

When the power switch is in the position of ACC, IG, or the engine is running, unless the
transmission control is in shift, there will be alarming indication only if the driving door has
been opened.
● Interior alarming sound Buzz “Hua” (continuously) resounded continuously at the same
At this time, even the key was taken out of the vehicle, and close the door, interior alarming buzz
will buzz “Hua” continuously.
· The message like No key was found will display alternately.
Under the following situations, the alarming buzz stops.
· Putting the smart key into the vehicle. (verify with the ID code in interior and judged the smart key
is in the vehicle).
· Set the transmission control at the position of shift; the power switch is shifted to OFF
position.

Without ■ The alarming indication of no smart key

finding the key

Under the following situations, it will remind the smart key is not in the vehicle
● When pressed the switch of the engine and judged the smart key is not in the vehicle through
verifying ID code in interior.
· Remanding lasts for 5 seconds.
·Interior alarming sound “du (one time)” buzzing at the same time.
●When the power switch is in the position of ACC, IG, or the engine is running, unless the
transmission control is in shift, there will be alarming indication only if the driving door has
been opened.
· Interior alarming sound “du (one time)”, external vehicle alarming sound “Hua, Hua, Hua” (three
times) will resound at the same time.
One of the following methods can stop the alarming sound.
· The power switch is in the position of ACC, IG or the engine is working, open and close the
vehicle door except the driver’s and judging the smart key is not in the vehicle through verifying

97
 ID code in interior.
· Interior alarming sound “du (one time)”, external vehicle alarming sound “Hua, Hua, Hua” (three
times) will resound at the same time.
One of the following methods can stop the alarming sound.
· Put the smart key in the vehicle. (verify the ID code in interior and judged the smart key is in the
vehicle)
· When the power switch is shifted to OFF position.

98
● The power switch is in the position of ACC and IG, or the engine is running, the transmission
control is set at other shift except , opening and closing the door at driving seat side.
●Interior alarming sound “hua (continuous alarming)”, external vehicle alarming sound “hua”
(continuous buzzing) begins to buzz at the same time.
●The warning Please shift to “P” appeared alternately.
●One of the following methods can be adopted to remove the alarming sound.
●Put the smart key into the vehicle. (verifying with the ID code in interior and judged the smart
key is in the vehicle), turn the power switch to OFF position.
●Shift the transmission control to P shift.

General Knowledge
Interior
工作条件alarming sound
Before driving, if it is judged the smart key is not in the vehicle through verifying ID code in
the vehicle, the alarming sound will buzz again when started to drive.

No Key Found ■ Steering lock confirmation warning indication

It is indicated that the steering locking devices are abnormal

attention When alarm appears, go to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for
check.

General Knowledge
工作条件 Remanding
Alarming
Alarming remanding appears when the intelligent function of the key is abnormal

Warning indication of ■ The indication of steering locking devices having not been removed.
Steering locking
devices have not
been removed
Warning indication will be given after the engine switch has been pressed
for 3 seconds while the steering devices are not unlocked.

99
 Function of the key and the using method
钥匙的功能及使用方法

General Knowledge
工作条件
Alarm indication
●Intelligent key function without start-up, if unusual, the alarm indication will also be occurred.

●Press the engine switch to start engine, the alarm indication will be eliminated. If the engine does not start, the steering wheel

can be turned around, and stamping on the brake pedal, press the engine switch again. Moving and stamping on the brake pedal,

the switch engine will be pressed.

■ Alarm indication of Intelligent key mismatching

Key mismatch

The prompting messages for the key hole will be mistakenly inserted intelligent key of other
vehicles.
●Alarm voice inter vehicle “Du(ringing once)” simultaneously ringing.

General Knowledge
Alarm
工作条件 indication
Intelligent function of key without start, if unusual, the alarm indication will be occurred.

The alarm indication will be occurred when intelligent function of key is unusual.

100
■Complete list for alarm voice and monitor alarm indication messages
Alarm voice inter Alarm voice
Display State
vehicle outer vehicle

Beep Power set in ACC, IG position, or engine in the work

Beep
(continue display state, gearlever without set in range switch, open
(continue ringing)
ringing) driver's door to take the intelligent key outside.

Du,Du……(disco Power set in ACC position, gearlever set in range

— —
ntinuity ringing) switch to open the driver's door.

Power set in ACC, IG position, or the engine running

Beep, Beep,
Du(ringing once) Beep(ringing 3 display and gearlever set in switch, gearlever without set in
times) range switch, open driver's door to take the intelligent
key outside.

Beep Power set in ACC, IG position, or the engine running

—
(approx.
ringing 2 display and gearlever set in switch, gearlever without set in
seconds) range switch, press the lock switch for lock.

Beep, Beep, Power set in ACC, IG position, or the engine running,

Du(ringing once) Beep(ringing 3 the doors that are opened except the drivers door, to
display
times) take the intelligent key outside.

Beep
(approx.ringin Power switch set in OFF position, intelligent key to be
— —
g2 forgotten in the car, press lock switch for lock.
seconds)

voltage for intelligent key battery nearly two V (normal

Du(ringing once) — display
as 3 v).

Within the activated region of the signal transmitter in

display (5
Du(ringing once) — the car, without bring the intelligent key, press the
seconds)
switch of the engine.

Beep
(approx.ringin Power switch set in OFF position, any of the door
— —
g 10 without fasten, press lock switch for lock.
second)

101
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows

Opening and closing for the doors and windows

● Lock and unlock methods of intelligent key function (see P57)

● Lock and unlock methods of wireless remote control key
reference to P111 the contents of “Use Methods for Functions of Wireless Remote Control of The
Intelligent Key”
● Lock and unlock methods of key(mechanical key)

unlock

lock
In front of vehicles

Turn right is unlock and turn left is lock.

●Locking and unlocking operation can be carried out on all the doors.
●Mechanical key is drawn from the intelligent key(see 76).

General Knowledge
Identification tag for key
The number will be carved in identification tag to ensure

key number the key numbers without leakage.

●The identification tag of key shall be safekeeping outside the vehicles.
●If the inadvertent loss of the key, you can make use of original identification tag of key
from the maintenance and sales centre of Red Flag with FAW to send for original keys.

102
 Lock operation (the vehicles with the key of key cylinder type
ignition switch)★

Lock or unlock of all doors, this switch can be slowly and prudently pressed.
● Lock: Press lock switch. At the same time, when locking all the doors, traffic indicator(turn
signal lamp) will be flashed once.
·All the doors will be checked whether indeed locking.
·If any door is not closed, locking switch to be pressed, lock will not be implemented, buzzer
will be rung l0 seconds. Unlock switch will be pressed to stop buzzer.
·Buzzer can be prohibited. The details can be contacted with the sales and maintenance center
of Red Flag with FAW.
●Unlock: Press unlock switch. At the same time, when unlocking all the doors, traffic indicator(turn
signal lamp) will be flashed twice.
·This performance can be customized for: press lock switch once only driver’s door will be
locked, and all doors will be locked by press twice. The details can be contacted with the sales
and maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.
·Response function (turn signal lamp to flash) can be customized to open or close. The details
can be contacted with the sales and maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.
Unlock operation (the vehicles with the key of key
cylinder type ignition switch)

Wireless remote control device can operate all the windows and skylights.
●When the keys in the ignition switch or in the key hole or when the ignition switch has not closed,
this function will be prohibited to use.
●Open: Hold down the unlock switch for 3 seconds. Beeps sounded, all the windows and skylights
will be opened.
●Close: Hold down the lock switch for 3 seconds. Beeps sounded, all the windows and skylights
will be closed.
●When the switch is released, the operation will be stopped.
●This performance can be canceled, or customized for: the windows and skylights can be
independent on / off or (skylights) can be independent sliding closed. The details can be contacted
with the sales and maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.

103
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows

● The emission frequency will not be allowed to change and transmitter power (including
Attention
installation of additional RF power amplifier) will be allowed to increase as well external
antenna or use other transmission antennas will be prohibited;
●Without harmful interference for all the legitimate radio communications when it is operation;
once interference will be found, operation shall be immediately stopped to take measures to
eliminate the interference and then continually use；
●The use of micro-power radio equipments, we must endure the interference of all kinds of radio
business or radiation interference from industrial, scientific and medical applications;
●In the vicinity of the airport and aircraft will be prohibited to use.

Side doors

● Use key to lock and unlock the doors

Used for the vehicles with the key of key cylinder type
ignition switch

The key will be inserted into the key hole and turn the key.
●Lock: the key will be turned left.
●Unlock: the key will be turned right.
●Together locking and unlocking with all the doors and the driver’s door.
●This function can be customized for: the key to be turned right can only unlock the driver’s door,
turn right twice can unlock all the doors. The details can be contacted with the sales and
maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.
●Unlock the doors, ignition switch lights or keyhole-lights, lights at the bottom and the lights inside
car will be lit about 15 seconds. (The details can be found in Chapters 1-4, “Lighting Enter
System.”)

Every switch on the door can respectively operate windows, the switch on the driver’s door
can be used to control windows in the passengers’ side doors.

●Ignition switch must be set in ON.

●Normal operation: simply press and hold the switch, the window will be mobile.

·Open: the switch will be gently pressed.

·Close: the switch will be gently pulled up.

●If press the windows lock switch at the driver’s door, the window at the passenger side will be not
operated.

104
●Switch lights will direct to the switch which can be operated.
●Automatic operation: the switch to be completely pressed or pulled up, and then released, the
windows will be fully opened or closed. Need the window to stop in the halfway, the switch with
opposite direction will be lightly pressed and then released.
●The operation of the key to close: Even closed ignition switch, it will be worked about 43 seconds.
When any of the front door is opened, the work will be stopped.
●If the indication lights blinking, power windows should be reset. The details can be found in the
following: “Reset power windows”.

Used for the vehicles with the key of key cylinder type
ignition switch

Since the outside to operate

Use mechanical key——
●Operation key in the key hole of the driving door can open and close the windows.
●Open: turn right and hold the key.
●Close: turn left and hold the key.
●After locking or unlocking the doors, all the windows will be moved. At the same time, the
windowing will begin to move.
●When the key is released, the operation will be stopped.
●This performance may cancel, or customized for: use the key can not open or close the windows.
The details can be contacted with the sales and maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.
●Use wireless remote control device can also operate the windows. The details can be found in the
Chapters of the “Wireless Remote Control Device”.

105
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows

● The lock and unlock method for used of door switch

Unlock
Lock

Door switch

Press outside of the switch for the lock state, press interside for unlock state.
●Closing operation can be carried out for all the doors at the driver's seat within the same time.

General Knowledge

Working conditions
●Has nothing to do with the position of power switch.
●If continued to press the switch, sometimes it will be malfunction. Temporarily
removed the fingers from the switch, and then re-pressed.
Safe-guard functions
The function of use the door switch to lock will be removed to prevent stolen.
(To prevent the conduct of pressing the door switch between the window frame and
cracks in the window to lead to open the door). According to the following methods to
lock, automatically start anti-theft function can be done.
●The key will be inserted into the lock of the door’s key hole.
●Lock with key of wireless remote control.
●Use wireless remote control key to lock, if the door is not open, it will be
automatically locked after 30 seconds (see P111).
●Locked is to use of key’s function.
●After use key with intelligent function to lock, if the door do not open it will be
automatically locked after 30 seconds.
●Use door button to lock(see p95)

Convenient functions
Impact activation unlock devices of the door
When the vehicle has strong impact on all around directions, unlock operations
will be automatically carried out for all the doors.
●The impact is too small to detonate SRS airbags, or sometimes invalid
according to the form of the accidents.

106
 General Knowledge
Customized function
All functions of electric door lock can be set by the users according to their own
preferences. (also can be entrusted from the sales and maintenance center of Red Flag
with FAW to set).

Closed all the doors, (the power switch set in OFF position or shift power switch from
the ACC to IG position, etc.) in about 10 seconds, according to the methods shown in
the following table, operating gearlever and lock switches.

●According to the methods that are listed in following table to change operation, the
functions will be shifted between valid and invalid. (If the set for current each
function is valid, the shift is to be invalid, the reverse is also true.

●After change of operation is completion, locking and unlocking operation will be

repeated.
Change methods
Functions Contents Position for
Door switch
gearlever
When the power switch set in IG Press the right side
Linkage for
position, all the doors are closed, of the switch(Lock
gear lock
if the gearlever shifts from side) about five
Automatic
range switch to the other, all seconds then remove
lock※
the doors will be locked. range the fingers.
switch Press the left side of
Linkage for When the power switch set in IG
gear lock position, if the gearlever shifts the switch(unlock
Automatic side) about five
from other to range switch, all seconds then remove
lock※ the doors will be unlocked. the fingers
Linkage for
When the power switch shifts Press the left side of
doors of
from the IG to ACC or OFF The range the switch(unlock
driver’s switch
position about 1O seconds, if the side) about five
sets
driver's door is opened, all the except seconds then remove
Automatic
doors will be unlocked. the fingers
lock※
※Initialization set of the functions(factory settings) is in invalid state.

107
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows

● Locking and unlocking methods for door lock button

■Lock·unlock in the vehicle
Press the front of the door lock as the lock state, the
Door handle inside car
back as unlock state
Door lock button Lock
Unlock
■The methods for the lock outside vehicle

Door internal lock button will be set up to the lock position,

which can directly close the door with grip of the door handle.
Door internal lock buttons will be set up to the lock position,
Door internal lock button which can be directly closed rear doors.

Door handle

Common sense
Convenient functions
Even only the lock buttons of the driver's side door set to the lock position, as long as pull the car
door handle, the door can be opened.

● The use method for child protection devices handle

Rear Door
Unlock Child protection devices handle will set in locking position to close the
door.
●Use the internal door handle can not open the rear doors.
Lock

Child protection devices handle

108
 General Knowledge
Child protection devices handle
In the process of traffic, in order to prevent the child passenger opened the door, regardless
of the location of the door lock buttons, use the internal door handle can not open the rear
doors.
The doors unlock method for children safety protection to start
Device handle will be set in the lock state, pull the door handle outside the vehicle can open
the door.
If the need to open the door from internal, down the windows so as to door lock button set in
unlock state, pull the door handle from the outside vehicle, the door can be opened.

Warning Before drive on the road, all the doors make sure in the lock
●Before drive on the road, all the doors make sure in the lock state. If the doors are not lock,
the phenomenon of the door suddenly opened traffic may be occurred in the process of traffic,
which may cause accidents.
●Warned children not to touch the doors. If closed door, cradling hand, head, neck and other
parts, it will be very dangerous to lead to serious accidents. If the doors are open in the traffic,
children are easily left out from the car, causing serious injury or even death.

General Knowledge
Convenient functions
Reminded position for forgotten pull out the key
When the power switch set in OFF or the ACC, open the driver's door, sounding "Du, Du", it
indicates that did not pull out the key. In order to prevent the keys locked in the car, the car is
locked after confirmation of hold the key.
●The volume and cycle of the indication devices may be adjusted. Related details can be
contacted with the sales and maintenance center of Red Flag with FAW.
Lighting access system(see p252)
Under the door of a state and position of power supplies and gearlever, lighting fixtures of the
parts lit and go out.
To prevent power loss from the battery
If the key did not insert the keyhole and the door to be opened, in order to prevent loss battery
power, the front of the car lights (switch to the door, the key hole in the lights will be
automatically extinguished after about 20 minutes.
Effect of locking and unlocking in the process of traffic
Effect of locking and unlocking in the process of traffic can be chosen, as follows.
< The doors with locking in the process of traffic>
●To prevent the door mistakenly opened by the staff that are on the car.
●To prevent malicious intrusion into the car.
●Use together with the seat belts, in the event of an accident involving the collision
possibility decreases to throw out of the vehicle.
< The doors with unlocking in the process of traffic >
●In the event of emergency, rescue activities is facilitation from outside car.
When you leave the vehicle, the engine must be switched off and lock the doors. The
possibility existence of stolen vehicles or stolen inside items, valuables will not put in car.

109
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows
Opening and closing for the windows

● The use method of the electric window

Switch from driver seat side Switches of deputy driver seat side and the rear seat

Windows switch for left of rear seats

Windows switch for driver Switch for windows of the doors

Total switch for lock of doors

Windows switch for right of rear seats Windows switches of deputy driver seat

Switch of driver seat side can control movement of all windows.

Switches of deputy driver seat side and the rear seat only can lift and fall related doors
■Lift and fall methods for windows
Pressing switch down, windows fell, rising the switch, it lifts. When fingers shift switch, the
window will be stopped in the current location.
■Automatically lift and fall methods for windows
●When the need full opened, press switch and then fingers will remove it. Need to stop in the
halfway, lightly raise switch.
●When the need full closed, rise switch and then fingers will remove it. Need to stop in the
halfway, lightly press switch.
Common sense

Working conditions
When the power switch set in IG position or the engine working, it can be used. But switches
of deputy driver's seat and the rear seat, windows lock switch set in ON position (see Pl00) is
invalid.
Safety performance
Anti-clamp functions
When raise windows, if the perception of foreign body between the window frame and
windows f. q, the windows will stop rising, and automatically leave space.
●After key OFF, the anti-clamp functions will start, also can be operated remote control key
or door key so as to start during the window closed.
●According to the different traffic environment and conditions, when the windows will bear
the same impacts and load from the clamped foreign body, it could trigger anti-clamp
functions.

110
 Common sense
Convenient functions
Starting function after key OFF
After turn off power in about 45 seconds ,the door glass can be a switching operation. But
within 45 seconds ,if open and close t he driver's door, glass doors will not be able to
take-off and landing.
car door open and close linkage key device
In the key of the driver's door inserted into the key hole along unlock direction for fastening
and maintain fixing, it can open all the glass doors, locks along the direction of the
commissioner for fastening and maintain fixing, they can close down all the glass doors.
●The functions can be discharged or make the following changes. For the details ,please
consult FAW Maintenance Centre Advisory.
·Only switch operation
·Only shut down operation
Wireless Remote Control Key Linked Switch
Continued access. Under the Lock key wireless remote control switch to more than 3
seconds, all the glass doors closed Pressing wireless remote control switch to unlock the key
to more than 3 seconds, all the glass doors open. (Refer to P111).
●The functions can be discharged or make the following changes. For the details ,please
consult FAW Maintenance Centre Advisory.
·Only switch operation
·Only shut down operation
Smart keys can use wireless remote control function keys and control movements glass
doors. Smart key linkage closed (see p75)

Warning Warning against staff from avoiding serious injuries and we must
follow the instructions to do.

●Before the shutdown power windows, power windows shall be confirmed in the vicinity
of no one. At the same time, all the passengers to confirm the head, hands and other
parts of the body in the car, if the passenger head and neck, head or hands in the
windows were closed card interpretation, this will result in death or serious injury. Any
person in power windows closed, will he or she have to confirm the safe operation of the
windows.
●When a child in the car, in unattended circumstances, while their use of electric window
switches. Lock switch to use the windows to prevent them from accidents, the use of
animation shape.
●Leave vehicles to confirm and remove the ignition keys.
●Do not let any crew members (especially children) left alone in the car, especially in the
key points of fire still inserted circumstances. Otherwise, he / she may use electric
window switches may be windows jammed, nobody care of the passengers (especially
children), will be a serious unexpected accidents.
●Do not attempt to use the windows grip any part of the body to function deliberately jam
operation .
●Before close all windows in the moment and if objects were jammed, jam prevention
111
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows

Common Sense
Initialization Settings
Due to the replacement of the battery or battery fuse and cut off the connection with the
vehicle, the electric windows, skylights function (see P99) initialization settings shall be
conducted .
● If electric window is no settings of initialization, the following functions will not be
achieved.
• Use the switch on the driver's side of driver's seat, the rear door glass manipulation
·Automatic glass doors movements
·Function prevention from jam injury
·Function prevention from after starting function
·Car door opening and closing key linked devices
·Wireless remote control key linked devices
·Intelligent key functional linkage closed devices
● When initialization settings has not done on the electric window, the work of flashing
light switch. on .
■Way of initialization settings
Initialization settings of electric windows will be done respectively for each chair and car
door glass.
Can not switch on the driver's side of driver's seat, rear seat electric door glass initialization
settings.
<Set Order>
1 Power switch will be placed IG bit, or start the engine.
2 Pressing the button switch and open half of glass car door .
3 Press up lift switches and close all glass car doors .
After the doors are closed ,keep one second .
After initialization settings of electric glass car doors, indicators of switches changes from
flashing lights to full lighting state .
Switch of driver seat side Switches of duty driver seat side and rear seat
驾驶席侧开关 副驾驶席侧开关、后排座椅开关

Working lights
Working lights

112
● Use method of switch of Glass car doors
Pressing a glass door every ,switch between. in the ON and OFF switch.
When switch is under the state of 0 N, in addition to driver's door glass, other electric glass doors
are not fixed.
● When switch is under the state of ON, in addition to driver's door glass switch, other glass doors
of work lights are switched off.

Deputy driver's seat switch

Lock stop switch of car Sswitches of back chairs
Switches of Driving Seat
doors

Driver's door glass can take-off and landing

Lifting available
ON

Glass car doors can all take-off and landing

Lifting unavailable
OFF

Warning Not to spread out your hands or head out the window in travel .

●In the road, not to hand out a window from the top position from the car. If scratching
object outside from cars or encounter emergency brakes, which is likely to cause serious
injury or even death.
●When close the window, careful for not to clip the hands or others, wrist, head, neck and
other parts, so as to avoid causing serious injury.
●Do not let children operate the door glass. Glass doors open or closed, the Department
may get the folder, wrist, head, neck and other parts, causing serious

Attention In nearly closed all the windows anti-injury will blind partial

●Inder to really do a thorough closed door glass, in almost all closed, the agencies will
occur finger injury partial blind spot. It should be taken not to hurt fingers, etc..
●Pressing force d injuries sustained finger may have defective switches, careful for not to
finger such as injury .
●Because of jam injury caused by automatically when the car closes , continuous pressure
switch (about 10 seconds above), will be closed.
●Do not switch on the driver's side door switch at the same time and other contrarian, so
easily damaged electric windows.
●In full or full glass door after it will not continue to press the same switch (door key
linkage switch device, the need to rotate keys along the same direction), so easily
damaged electric windows
113
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows
Opening and Closing of Car Door Glasses

Tilt Tilting switches

Reset Sliding switches

ON

OFF

■Sliding switches
●When open skylight
When slide switches press from inside pressure, the window automatically opens.
• Before fully starting, suspended once and then click once to open the window .
• In order to prevent from outside winds into inside car and fair water fins will automatically lift .
●When the skylight closes
Press the front end of sliding switched and it will automatically close the car doors .
■Tilting and resetting
●When the skylight open
When the skylight is under close state , passing tilt switch of “tilt” end ,automatically open tilt
skylight.
●When skylight close
When the skylight opens, press the resetting end of tilting switch and skylight automatically close .
●It need suspension in the course of open skylight
Pressing sliding switches or tilt switches.

Warning
In the road, not to hand out a window from the top position from the

●In the road, not to hand out a window from the top position from the car. If scratching
object outside from cars or encounter emergency brakes, which is likely to cause serious
injury or even death.
●When close the window, careful for not to clip the hands or others, wrist, head, neck and
other parts, so as to avoid causing serious injury.
●Do not seat under opening of skylight to prevent subsidence or thrown out of from car,
causing serious accidents and even death
●Do not let children operate skylights. Close skylights may come to head, neck and other parts,
causing serious injury.

114
 Attention If the items out from the skylight might stretch vehicles and lead to
the accidents
●If the items out from the skylight might stretch vehicles and avoid the accidents due to it .
●When left or washing vehicles must ,it shall completely closed sky window. Also
confirmed skylight in the water and there is no snow to open later. If water or snow goes
into the car, or dropping to the floor mats under the sound of electrical parts will cause
vehicle fire or failure.
● Sustained press jam injuries maybe force switches and lead to failure., please care for
your fingers .
● In order to really do a thorough close skylight, blind spot may occur before it is all
closed and care for injury of fingers .
●Before or after skylight opens and closes in full, pleas not continuous pressure switch, to
avoid damage to sky window.
● As the result of the fault trigger to damage injury ,it can not shut down automatically
when the skylight can be continuous pressure switch (about more than 10 seconds), will be
closed.

General knowledge
Working conditions
It can be used while power switch at IG position of the or under
Security Features
Prevention From Injury
When automatic sliding window on closed or tilted skylight automatically reset closed, and
if the perception of a foreign body, skylights will be suspended, leaving a little space.
● Prevention from injury devices can work after ignition switch OFF, and in the use of a key
or remote operation of skylight closed , door keys in the course of work. H
● traffic environment and under different conditions, the same day window by cradling the
foreign body and the impact of the same load, and may also prevent from trigger injury
function.

Sun Shield
●Can manually open and close.
Full stop function
When automatically open skylight, in full start before the suspense. If traffic is in this
position, it will be smaller acoustic flow.
Convenient Function
Starting after key function is 0FF .
After switching off the power switch about 45 seconds, it can still be carried out
on the skylight switching operation, but within 45 seconds if the driver's door
opened and then closed, will not be able to open and close a window.
Intelligent key functional linkage closed devices (see P75)

115
 General knowledge
Convenient Functions
Linked switches of car doors will
Insert the key into the key hole of driver's door and fasten fully on the direction of open lock,
the sky window will be opened .On the contrary , sky window will be closed .
● The functions can be discharged or make the following changes. For the details ,please
consult FAW Maintenance Centre Advisory.
·Only switch operation
·Only shut down operation
·Sliding is changed to tilting
Wireless Remote Control Key Linked Switch
By pressing and holding the wireless remote control key switch Lock until 3 seconds or more,
skylights will be closed. By switch of pressing wireless remote car door to three seconds or
more , this sky window is opened (see P75).
●The functions can be discharged or make the following changes. For the details ,please
consult FAW Maintenance Centre Advisory.
·Only switch operation
·Only shut down operation ·Sliding is changed to tilting
·Sliding is changed to tilting

Setting of Initialization
Due to the replacement of batteries to cut off the connection for the link to electric windows,
please conduct function (see P99) initialization settings for skylights.
● If skylights have no initialization settings, the following functions will not be achieved.
· Automatic switching skylight
· Prevent from injury function
Starting function after key switch OFF
Linked open and close switches of car door key
·Wireless remote control door locks linked opening and closing device
·Intelligent key functional linkage closed device
■Way of Initialization Settings
1 setting power switch at IG position or start the engine.
2 Setting skylight into full open condition (see P101).
If skylights are installed in the open state, sustained pressure the front end of sliding switches
until it completes closure.
3 Continue to push the front end and tilt-sliding end of switches.
●In sustained pressure switch, skylights in accordance with the order of tilt → reset → sliding
open → sliding off .
●In the setting of initialization, requires sustained pressure switch. If fingers removing
switches, the need to set up from scratch.
4 Skylights are all closed, initialization setting will be completed.

116
 Opening and Closing of Electric Luggage
Suitcase

● The way to open cover of luggage carrier by intelligent functions of keys (machinery keys)
Please contents of The Way to Open Cover of Luggage Carrier by Intelligent Functions of Keys of
60 Page. ★
● The Way to Open Suitcase

Use for the cars with lock cylinder ignition keys)

If you want to open suitcase ,please press switch of

suitcase and last one second or more .
●If the keys in the ignition switch or key hole or if the ignition switch has not closed, it can not use
wireless remote control device to open the suitcase.
●If cling to hold down the switch to open the suitcase, the lock can not be re-operation, this time to
be open and then click the button.
● Operation of windows and skylights
Open operation (use for the cars with lock cylinder
ignition keys)

117
 Opening and closing for the doors and the windows
luggage carrier

From outside (the cars with Lock cylinder ignition

keys)

From inside

Open the suitcase：

●From outside ——Insert into main key(use for the cars with Lock cylinder ignition keys)or
machinery keys (use for the cars with smart entry and start system).
● From inside——Bottom switch on
The suitcase can be opened by wireless remote control device ,see Wireless Remote Control Device
of this Chapter .
● The way that switch is open by cover of suitcase（inside vehicle）or/and open cover of suitcase .
Press open switch of suitcase（inside car）and suitcase can be
open automatically.

Open switch of suitcase（inside car）

● Using the key (mechanical key)to open the trunk lid

118
 Insert the key in the keyhole, dextrorotate, and then open the
lid.
●While utilizing the mechanical key to open, it can't open
automatically and completely. Please open it by hand.
●Have nothing with relieving trunk lid of ON, OFF switch,
Mechanical can open the trunk lid.
Key
●Remove the trunk lid and open the switch
Press once and remove the opening switch of the trunk lid, switch over between ON and OFF 。
●Relieve the open switch of trunk lid and set up at ON position, can't utilize open switch of trunk
lid (in the car, outside, remote) to open the trunk lid.

ON OFF
( The truck lid can't open ( The truck lid can open
automatically ) automatically )

Removing the opening

switch of luggage boot

119
 The opening and closing of door, door glass, etc.

Warning Work, for security of guaranteeing, operate in case that

finger insert hand wounded in electronic switch trunk lid.

●In the trunk lid of the electronic switch, in order to guarantee the security, it is operated
that be careful in case that the finger is carried in order to cover. In addition, should look
out for the carry-on bag or tie too. Don't let children operate.
●The suitcase is cover and don't be added not to be the original packaging decorating one
of FAW. Otherwise can't operate automatically, it is apt to make the case lid of the
electronic trunk break down. In addition, the opened trunk lid while closing and covering,
may cause trunk lid whereabouts and cause serious personnel injury.
●Electronic trunk lid meeting barrier can be perceived unusually in switch work, stop
automatically, need replacing with hands at this moment. It may cause the case lid of the
trunk to fall and lead to the fact personnel are injured when some replace the positions.
When operating the case lid switch of electronic trunk, should confirm that has not gone
on after the barrier around.
●When the engine shuts down and operates the lid of the electronic trunk under the state,
if switch the power switch to IG position or start the engine, Judge that lead to the fact
the system to be unusual for battery voltage, enter the manual operation mode. This
kind of operation is very dangerous, apt to cause the contingency. While opening and
closing the case lid of the trunk automatically, don't switch to IG position or start the
engine.
●It is manned in the trunk to forbid, so as not to cause the serious personnel's injury when
the vehicle applies the brake or the collision accident happens promptly even death.
●It takes in the trunk lid of the switch to pay attention to injure the finger. Otherwise it is
apt to cause personnel's injury.
●Don't let children operate the switch of the trunk lid. May insert it to position such as the
hand, head, neck while closing the case lid of the trunk, causing the serious personnel's
injury.
●Confirm while driving a vehicle the trunk lid is in totally closing state. Otherwise, the
trunk lid may be opened suddenly, causing the contingency.
●Don't go vehicle under opening trunk lid state, if drive a vehicle under opening the trunk
lid state, the waste gas that the vehicle discharges will be invaded in the car, cause the
carbon monoxide to be poisoned, form serious personnel's injury even death. Must
confirm the trunk lid is in totally closing state before driving a vehicle.
●Don't let the child play in the trunk. It is unable to open the case lid in the trunk. It will
be apt to cause the serious personnel's injury even death under heat radiation inside that
imprisoned.
●The suitcase must be used under the circumstances that the case lids all the opening state.
Unless it is the in half-open state, use or the courses of automatic switch, because trunk
lid whereabouts and resulting in injure.
●The case lid of the trunk please press and close outside the car. Utilize trunk lid assist,
draw on (according to P109) close case lid of the trunk may insert stopping and wrist
directly, cause the serious personnel's injury.

120
 Attention Open or close the electronic trunk lid, must confirm that
whether have snow or article on trunk lid.
●Before open and close the case lid of the trunk in electronic way, must confirm suitcase cover, have snow or article wait for, and not Frozen. If exerts
oneself too quickly while operating the case lid of the trunk, it is apt to damage the case lid of the trunk.
●Don't exert the meaningless external force to the case lid of the trunk when open and close the case lid of the trunk in electronic way, it is apt to

damage the case.

●If need stopping while holding the operation of closing the case lid of the trunk midway in electronic way, please press the case lid of the trunk and
start the switch (in, outside, and remote )Replace it for manual operation after stopping operating automatically. Situation that result in being injured

that some may cause the trunk lid and fall while replacing the position. And press the switch again, and confirm the situation around the trunk.
●Before opening and closing the suitcase, drivers must confirm the nearby situation, can guarantee case lid's of the trunk security and open to close.
●hen open and close the trunk in the gale environment, must be careful.
●The trunk lid being opened degree under gale function may be too big, causing the case lid of the trunk out of shape.
●Under the state of shutting down of the engine, don't light the light of the suitcase for a long time, may make the battery lose the electricity.
●Notice that don't forget the key in the suitcase.
●Don't draw and drag and lie in the left light thread of suitcase to close the trunk lid, don't hang the hook on the light thread either. It is apt to make the
line of core getting broken, form the vehicle trouble.
Because there is shock attenuation support which supports the trunk lid in installation in the suitcase, In order to prevent the shock attenuation pillar
from being damaged or worked badly, please observe the following items.
·Avoid plastics slice, some foreign matters pull rods attached to support of putting up things, gluing materials etc. In order to prevent foreign matters
such as the fiber, etc. from adhering to, don't touch the support with the military glove, If there are foreign matters that are affixed to support, then
the support can't move smoothly. When open, it keeps strength probably damaged.
·Ornament that don't be hung on the trunk lid beyond the original packaging products of the First Automobile Factory of China, etc. use one. The
preponderance of the trunk lid, when open, the support may not be supported.

·Don't pull the support with hands or pull the support horizontally hard. Will cause support to be unable to be turn on to close the trunk lid
crooked.

Lamp
wire
Bracket

121
 The opening and closing of door, door glass, etc.

General Knowledge
The working of electronic trunk lid
(Needn't consider the position of switch while using)
●While meeting the following conditions of work, the trunk lid can open automatically and completely.
< Possible condition of work >
·When removing the trunk lid and opening the switch and putting in OFF location.
·When the switch occupies IG position or the engine is at the working state, besides condition described
above, it should have gearshift lever put on " "block by location.
●Start and do completely except being automatic, like working technique of the ordinary trunk lid, can turn on
or off manually.
●In the course of opening automatically completely, if press the trunk lid and start the switch (in the car, outside
the car, remote control) again, can switch. If press switch again, will switch to operate automatically and
completely. However, can't all open when the trunk lid is close to the state of holding completely and
automatically. In addition, relieve wireless lock suitcase of key automatic to all hold while working (consult
P111) in key intellectual function (according to P74) of relieving, The still usable switch stops opening and
operating automatically completely. Under the opening status, the complete opening operation is not able to
be executed. In addition, even if the removal key intelligent function (see P74) and removal wireless door
lock key is open, you can still utilize the switch to stop the automatic all opening operation.
● When the vehicle is leaning, operating the luggage boot cover will more difficult than in flat conditions.
Sometimes there will be the situations like sudden opening and closing.

While depositing the key in places such as the hotel, etc.

When the vehicle is in the state of sloping, it is difficult to open and close to
the trunk lid than under the smooth state, made the situation closed
suddenly sometimes. Press and remove the trunk lid and open the switch,
set up it in ON position, lock and stop storing the thing box with the
mechanical key, hand the cloakroom the intellectual. It is unable to open the
Remove the opening trunk lid to utilize the trunk lid to open the switch. In order to guard against
theft, please don't put the valuables in the suitcase.
switch of luggage boot

Convenient Function
Trunk Light
When open the trunk lid, the bright light in the trunk at the same time lights,
benefit and confirm articles at the night.
●In order to prevent the battery from losing the electricity, after about 30 minutes,
The trunk lid assist
the light of the suitcase goes out automatically。 catch
The trunk lid assist catch
Operation of drawing the trunk lid under benefiting.。

122
 General Knowledge
General knowledge trunk lid parking of panel warn trigonometry reflect light board
Panel enclose, park, warn trigonometry reflect light board in trunk
lid. While using at night under the state of emergency, only need
open the trunk lid and bring rear to pay attention. But this set square
not standard that the legal provisions use warns the board, so when
the vehicle breaks down on the expressway or car accommodation
road, please adopt, park, warn board or park indicator(users are
obligated to park to install)

Parking Waring
Alter the function of the electronic trigonometry reflect
light board
To remove the function of the trunk lid of the electronic switch. Please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center。

● The device for the trunk lib being locked conveniently

When the case lid of the luggage is closed to position of half, this servicing unit is started, close
completely automatically.
Warning Because trunk lid get half imprison position, help lock device start, close completely

automatically, so it takes to pay attention to and hurt the finger, it is apt to cause the

serious personnel's injury.

Attention Help in the case lid of the luggage while locking the device to activate the state, don't

exert the too quickly external force

●Case lid help, lock device start, don't exert the too quickly external force in trunk. Otherwise, it is apt to

damage this device.

●At the repeated switch suitcase within short time, this device does not work sometimes. At this moment,

General Knowledge
The device for the trunk lib being locked conveniently
From the half-open position of the above while reaching the half-open position in the trunk lid, this device is

activated, can close and operate automatically completely. Have nothing to do with the position of switch.

●If this device does not work, can open the trunk lid over half again, then the regeneration is closed.

●Even if this device in state of activating, can press trunk open switch (in, outside, remote control) to rise and

open operation。

● It will be ok if not using the device but close the luggage boot manually.

123
 The opening and closing of door, door glass, etc.
Wireless remote control key function operation method of the intellectual key.

● Lock-up and Opening Method

Vehicle with intelligent entry and

startup system

About 1 m
Locking up
switch
LBD
Opening switch

Luggage boot cover switch

Lock up unlock
Vehicle without intelligent entry
and startup system

LBD
Locking up

switch Twinkle 1 time Twinkle 2 times

Luggage boot cover switch

Opening switch

Press the lock-up switch once, all doors are closed; press the unlock switch once, all doors are
unlocked.
●When the lock is stopped, the light glimmers promptly to glimmer once. When unlocking, the light
glimmers promptly to glimmer twice.。
●Be steady and accurate while operating the switch
●Push switch, and LED bright light
●hen pressing the lock-up switch, this operation must confirm reaching the firm state.
● After pressing the unlock switch, if it does not open the door within about 30 seconds, it will
lock-up automatically again. (lock-up automatically)

General Knowledge
General knowledge alters the key function of wireless remote control.
The function of wireless remote control key modifies as follows modification. Please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for details.
●Press the unlock switch once, only open the driver seat door, press once again
(altogether twice) and open all doors.
●The automatically-lock-up time sets up about 60 seconds.

● The Opening Way of Electronic Truck

Press the truck switch for about 1 second, the truck lid is opened automatically and completely。
●It should be steady and accurate to press the truck lid switch.
●If it cannot open smoothly, and continuously press the truck lid switch for more than one second
which cannot open it completely. Please press switch again.

124
 General Knowledge
Change Functions of the Electronic Truck
Can completely remove the function of the electronic truck lid.

Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for details.

●Door Glass, Skylight(Limited to the vehicle with the skylight )Closing and Opening
Methods
Press the lock-up switch for about more than 3 seconds continuously, all doors glass and skylight
are closed, press the unlock switch for about more than 3 seconds continuously, all doors glass and
skylight are opened (the details about opening and closing the skylight, please contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center)
●While removing the finger from the switch, glass of door and skylight stop in the present position.

General Knowledge
Alter the rise or fall operation of the glass of door.
Can relieve rise or fall operation of key door glass with remote control, or its functions
modify as follows. Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for
details.
●Only work while opening the door glass.
●Only work while closing the door glass.
●Only work while opening the door glass and skylight.
●Only work while closing the door glass and skylight.
●Press the unlock switch continuously, open all doors glass, make the skylight in the
state of sloping, press the lock-up switch continuously, all doors glass is closed, the

The key to remote control is the electronic devices and components. If

Attention assaulted strongly, apt to break down, so please pay attention to the
following several points.

●Don’t lay on the high temperature positions like instrument panel etc.
●Don’t dismantle it.
●Don’t break or press serious impact.
●Don’t dip in the water.

125
 The opening and closing of vehicle door

General Knowledge
Working Condition
●The key to remote control changes to some extent according to the range that the surrounding environment
may be activated. For guarantee to work, please in use from range within the vehicle 1m.
●If following articles are stuck on door glass, but when the car operates remotely at rear, because shield, it will
influence and accept the intensity of the signal, the activate distance will be shortened.
·Contain the glass membrane of the metal composition
·Other metal ones (aerial beyond original packaging part of the First Automobile Factory of China, etc.)
●When the key is inserted in the keyhole, the key to remote control is invalid.
●In the door while not closing the firm state, only unlock the function and come into force.
●When a certain door is in the state of opening, locking be unable to come into force to stop the switch.。
●Even if press the lock-up switch, unlock the switch continuously, all can't lock the door to stop and unlock and

operate again. Need press switch again.

Change Battery
When the phenomena appear such as press remote control is ineffective, activating the distance is obviously
shortened, LED becomes dark, and LED is not lighting, these may come from the battery of losing the charge.
Please change the battery.
While changing the battery, can use the accurate screwdriver that the business is sold, is changed by users
themselves. According to the " the key battery change " content of P305( can change in FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Center).

Lost the Remote Control Key

When the key to remote control is lost, in order to guard against theft and prevent the accident, please contact
with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
●when the key to remote control is lost, can remove the key function of wireless remote control. please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center about relevant details.

General Knowledge
Convenient Function
The illumination enters the system (consult P252)
According to door state, the positions of the switch and gearshift lever, offer lighting to every position.
The door has not been turned off the firm alarm buzzer
Imprison firm state press, lock stop switch, buzzer ring 10 seconds nearly in door. Shut the door or press
unlocking the switch of the key to remote control again, the buzzer can stop ringing.
●Can remove this function. Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for details
The Store function (consult P129)
After utilizing the key to remote control to unlock, while opening and driving the door of the mat, can access
the driving mat position that has been already registered.

126
 Switch of Filler Cover

● Switch of Filler Cover

Press the opening switch of refuel access cap lying in lower right of
driver seat, can open the access cap.
Close the refuel access cap, press with hand, and hear sound of "
screech ".
Opening switch of oil tank

● Switch of Oil Tank Cover

close
open

clutch

Catch the fuel tank cap, and can be opened on the left.
While closing, want to catch fuel tank cap dextrorotation, until send out " screech " sound.

warning Should pay attention to the following items while refueling

●Should observe the following items while refueling。

·The engine must shut down.
·Turn off the door and car window.
·Don't let cigarette fire source close to vehicle.
·Before opening refuel access cap, the fuel tank cap, it is needed to remove because of being exposed to
metal parts such as the automobile body, etc. causing static that health carrying. At the electrification,
might discharge as health spark cause fuel to be on fire, thus lead to the fact and burn.
·When open the fuel tank cap, should catch hand of fuel tank cap, turn on slowly. When with high
temperatures, pressure of fuel tank relatively high, overflow fuel from fuel tank mouth probably. When
unscrewing the fuel tank cap, if send out the sound of " make a din ", please don't continue opening the
fuel tank cap. After the sound disappears, open slowly.
·Don't get back in to the car, keep in touch with electricity person or thing while refueling (possible with
electricity again)
·The personnel who does not remove the static mustn't be close to cheering the mouth on.
·Finish refueling, close fuel tank cap, from dextrorotation to sound to send out " screech ", and confirm.
·Don't use the products beyond the original packaging fuel tank cap of FAW suitable for the vehicle.
·In addition will observe and refuel all a common attentive matters that show inside the station.
● While refueling, avoid sucking and volatilizing the fuel. Contain and is harmful in the fuel
composition, so should arouse attention.

127
 The opening and closing of vehicle door glass

Attention Use lead-free fuel

●Appointed fuel is lead-free petrol, make sure the right Fuel is feeding.
●Other fuel(bad petrol, diesel, kerosene, alcoholic fuel)will affect the engine start, which
will cause knocking and power reduced, continuous use will Lead to the engine failure
and fuel leakage.
●No fuel should be spattered onto the body, because it will erode the plating

General Knowledge
Position of filler cover
Filler cover is in the rear side of the driver seat.

Capacity of the oil tank

The capacity of the oil tank is about70L,please fill the lead-free oil.

Bracket for oil tank cover

Put the cover onto the bracket while filling.
Oil Tank Cover

Oil Tank Bracket

Filler cover

When filler cover can’t be opened due to failure, please check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre

128
 Open and close of the engine hatch cover
`
● Opening methods

unlock switch of the 1 Lift the unlock switch of the engine hatch cover.
engine hatch cover
Lift the unlock switch of the engine hatch cover in the left-down of the
driver seat panel, and there will be a slot in the hatch cover.
2 Poke the lock latch
Put hands into the slot , and press the lock latch, then the
hatch cover of the engine will be opened.
lock latch

● Closing methods
1 Put down the hatch cover of the engine.
2 Press the hatch cover of the engine.
Press and lock the hatch cover of the engine.
3 Confirm whether it is locked or not.
Shake the front of the engine hatch cover to make sure it is locked.

warning
The unlocked hatch cover will open in driving to cause accident 会在行车

Attention Don’t close with gravity, which will cause the sink and deformation of the
hatch cover.
●Don’t close with gravity, which will cause the sink and deformation of the hatch cover.
●Install shockproof bracket on the hatch cover to support, then obey the following items.
●No plastic pieces, paste on the pull rod of bracket, and don’t touch with hands.
●No decoration parts should be on the hatch cover, because the weight of the hatch cover
can’t support when opening the bracket.
●Don’t pull the bracket with force, which will cause the bracket bent.

129
 Anti-theft system
Engine Stop Devices
●Stop devices of the engine
In order to prevent the vehicle from being stolen, signal launchers are put in the key inside, unless
use the key registered again, otherwise can't start the engine.
●Each car of signal registering in the key is different。
■During the use of the key intelligent function.
●When closing the power of vehicle, the system is started, the theft-proof indicator lamp (according
to P118) glimmers.
●Carry the intellectual key that has already registered the signal, push the engine switch, the engine
shuts down the device is removed, the theft-proof indicator lamp goes on
■During no use of the key intelligent function.
●While pulling out the lower key from the keyhole, the engine shuts down the device is started, the
theft-proof indicator lamp (according to P118) glimmers.
●Insert the key already registered in the keyhole, the engine shuts down the function is removed, the
theft-proof indicator lamp goes out.

Attention Key is the electrical part with in-car sensor, please obey the
Following items.
●Don’t bend the key or apply fierce strike.
●Don’t put it in the high temperature places.
●Don’t use the magnetic key chain.
●Don’t clean the key with ultrasonic washing liquid.

General Knowledge
Anti-theft alarm light
Anti-theft alarm light will flicker even in no automatic alarm condition.

Quantity
No more than 5 keys in one car, for more information please contact the FAW centre

Model of the engine stop device

●Frequency：50-190kHz
●Magnetic intensity：72dBμA／m(10m)
●Stray emitting limit：27dBμA／m(10m)
●Don’t change the frequency, increase the power, connect other antennas or change to other
emitting antennas
●No harmful interference to the legal wireless telecommunication service. Once there is, please stop
and take effective measures too do .
●Bear the radiation from all kinds of wireless telecommunication, industrial, science and medical
equipment by using the micro-power wireless devices.
●Don’t use nearby the airport.

130
 Auto Alarm（Anti-theft System）
● System working(alarm)
The following cases is judged to theft when the alarm system is in alarm system. Then it
automatically alarm.
●When opens the hatch cover of the engine.
●When the terminal of battery is out(including charging and change of the battery)
●When the anti-invasion sensor(see P119) senses the abnormal action in car(By pressing the OFF
switch to unlock the working condition)
●Use other methods except intelligent key, wireless remote control key and mechanical key to open
the door or the trunk.
●The switch of the power is in IG condition when no intelligent key or the key system used.

General Knowledge
Alarm
Vehicle speaker and safety speaker hoot for 30s at the same time, and the emergency light flickers, which tell
people there is abnormality. The door locked by force when the door is opened during alarm.
●Stop alarm by:
• Using intelligent function keys, wireless remote control key functions, machinery key to open the door, or
suitcase
• Using function keys or smart key system (equipped with smart entry and start system except for the cars) will
be living in the power switch when the IG position
• Use the key wireless remote control switch or key and unlock the door when the boot
• Insert key hole will be key, the engine switches placed at the ON position
After about 30’s alarm, the system will be in working conditions again.

● Make the system in working condition

1 Lock the door after opening the door, trunk cover and hatch
cover.
Anti-theft lamp lights(system is in standby condition)
2 System goes to working condition automatically after about
10s.
Anti-theft lamp shifts to flicker condition.
Anti-theft indicating

light

131
 Anti-theft system

General Knowledge
Working condition
●System can’t go to working condition by operating any one of the follows after about 10s.
·When open any door, trunk cover or hatch cover of the engine.
·When open any door.
·When re-connect the battery.
·When press the switch of the engine.
·When insert the key into the key hole.
● Operating any one of the follows
Will relieve the working condition of the system
· When utilizing key intelligent function, wireless remote control function, mechanical
key to start the door or luggage boot
·When utilizing key intelligent function, or system key to set the power switch at the
position of IG

Anti-theft light
The anti-theft light is flickering to show the stop device is in working condition(see P117)

Attention Don’t make system in starting when there is passenger and

the door is open.
●Auto alarm system can start when there is passenger and when the door is open, so don’t
make system in starting when there is passenger and the door is open
●Please relieve the working condition with wireless remote control, key when the door is
locked by force, and don’t leave the key in the car.

Stop devices of the engine

● Function of the anti-invasion sensor
The anti-invasion sensor alarm by detect the action of people invaded in the car with electric
wave.(Read Automatically Alarm(Anti-theft system) in P118

● Stop anti-invasion sensor working

132
 1 Set up the engine switch in OFF location, push and lie the roof
and control 0FF switch defending invading the transducer in the
box.

OFF button ofanti-theft sensor

2 Pace (the state of awaiting the opportune moment)

comparatively fast that the theft-proof indicator lamp glimmers

At time when theft-proof indicator lamp glimmers fast (up to
about 5 minutes) to set up the auto alarm. (consult P118)

Anti-theft
indicating
light

General Knowledge
The guard against invading sensor
Can perceive the movements in the car to invade the transducer to prevent from, but can perceive vibration
and noise outside the car sometimes.
The working state of removing the guard against invading sensor
●Even stop removing and defending invading the working state of the sensor, autoalarm will still last.
●Under awaiting the opportune moment the state, while pushing the engine switch or pushing and unlocking

the switch and unlocking, can resume working state. And after 5 minutes, after the pace of glimmering of

the theft-proof indicator lamp returns to normal, can resume the working state. And after 5 minutes, the

twinkling speed of the anti-theft indicating light resume to normal status. It can also recover to working status.

The automatic recovery of the guard against invading sensor

Only while pushing 0FF switch defending invading the transducer, could stop the transducer work. While

establishing autoalarm again, defending invading the transducer will resume the working state (in 0N state

systematically) automatically.

133
 Anti-thief systom
Attention In following cases, the guard against invading sensor can
work.

Establish the theft-proof device in the following cases, can activate and guard against invading
sensor, make the autoalarm can enter the working state.
●While leaving passengers or pet and leaving the vehicle in the car.
●Hang mascot, ornament, or hang clothes on the hood, have apt moving articles in the car.
●The glass of door or the skylight is at the opening state.
●In the stereoscopic parking places with vibration and strong noise.
●While using the washing car machine under high pressure and automatic washing machine.
●Because of hail, thundered., when the vehicle is assaulted vibration continuously.

The regulation of the guard against invading sensor

●Can't change and launch frequency, strengthen the power of launching without authorization
(including installing the amplifier of power of radio frequency additionally), Can't use other
transmission aerial instead;
●Can't produce and interfere with various legal radio communication service harmfully while using;
Find that there is phenomena of interfering, should be out of use immediately, can continue using
after taking measures to dispel interfering with;
●Use the radio apparatus of little power, must stand employing the radiation of the apparatus to
interfere with in interference or industry, science and medical treatment of different radio
business;
●Can't use near plane and airport.

134
Correct driving posture

In order to choose the correct driving posture, please adjust the seat according to the following
instructions
can operate the steering
wheel comfortably The center of headrest
behind ears

back close to backrest of

the seat
Pedals can be trodden
properly
Correct wearing of seat belts（Refer to P139 “Correct
wearing of seat belts”）

Warning Warning：don’t adjust the driver seat when driving

●don’t adjust the driver seat when driving. Seat adjustment would cause unexpected
movement so that the driver lost control of the vehicle, thus accidents may occur。
●don’t put items under front seats. If the item is pinched, the seat can not be locked,
accident may occur
● Do not put cushion between the backrest and body. The cushion does not only affect
correct posture, but also the normal function of seat belt and headrest in the event of
sudden crashes, causing serious injury or even death.
● Do not carry items at the codriver’s seat. When emergency braking or steering, it’s easy
to toss out items and touch the items and the crew, damages goods, and driver is distracted
thus may result in accidents.
● When the car is going, do sit in the seat and don’t move in the car. Otherwise the body
will be thrown out and get injured on the head due to inertia in the event of emergency
brake or unexpected crashes, may lead to life-threatening major incident.
Warning: the following instruction must be followed, otherwise, SRS air
Warning bag may not work normally, and may cause fault explosion so that
serious accident even casualty may happen.
● Items (such as common seat covers) not equipped with original vehicle should not be used
on the front seats. If SRS side air bag is covered by such items, its normal function would
be affected. Be sure to read the product introduction carefully before choosing
Non-exclusive seat covers and to fix them correctly.
● If coating of seats needs to be replaced, installation or dismantling of the front seats needs
to be done for repairs, you should contact the red flag with the FAW-Hongqi sales and
maintenance centre for consultations. Plus, do not carry out any modification of the front
seats.
● No strong hitting of the sides of front seats and other parts where SRS airbags would
expand.
135
 Attention Note: Take into account the people around you and surroundings such
as items etc. when adjusting the seat

●When adjusting the seat, take into account the people around you and surroundings such as
items etc. for, you would hurt other people or damage items.
●When adjusting the seat, don’t put you hands under the seat or on movable part.
●When cleaning the internal room of the car or picking up items on the ground, you may get
hurt if you put your hands under the seat for you may touch the lead rails of the seat or the
seat frame (base part) that would hurt you. So do be careful.
●Press electric seat switch to adjust seat and make it in place, after that don’t repeat the
adjusting movement of the same direction for it’s easy to damage electric seat.

136
 Front seats
Adjustment of front seats

● Seat adjusting methods:

waist hardness adjustment

(waist bracing)

backward-forward and up-down adjustment backrest gradient adjustment

* Shapes and appearance varies due to different levels of cars

adjusting position switch operation and movement
backward
Backward-forward forward Effective when switching
adjustment backward-forward operation

Effective when switching

Front end up Seat up
up-down adjustment up-down operation
●Press the front button of the switch
driver seat to adjust the front end of seating
washer in up-down direction
Front end down Seat down ●Press the back button of the switch
to adjust the whole seating washer in
up-down direction
tilt backward
upright Effective when switching
Backrest gradient
backward-forward
adjustment
operation

waist hardness Press the front button of switch, the

adjustment of backrest waist of backrest becomes harder, press
(waist bracing) the back button, the waist of backrest
soften
driver seat Harden becomes softer.

137
 front seats
● headrest adjustment methods:
■up-down adjustment:
except codriver’s seat with footrests

●Lift it up directly to raise up

●Press button to lower it down
●Pull it out directly when pressing the button to dismount
button

codriver’s seat with footrests

●Lift it up directly to raise up

adjusting ●Press button to lower it down
button
● Lift it up directly when pressing the turnover button, then
pull it out when pressing adjusting button to dismount.

turnover
button
■backward-forward adjustment
except codriver’s seat with footrests

Press（pull）in the adjusting direction.

138
 Warning Warning: Don’t drive when the headrest is pulled out in case the neck will be
shocked fiercely so that you life will be threatened if a sudden crash happens to
the car. Please adjust the height of headrest center to the back of ears.

Note: The headrests are for the front seats only. When installing, confirm
Attention whether click sound is heard. If the headrests of front and rear seats are
wrongly installed, they can not be totally locked thus will injure the crew in
the event of sudden crashes

● the methods of codriver’s seat adjustment from driver’s seat and back seat

Backrest gradient adjustment

Efficient when switching backward-forward operation.

upright tilt backward

backward
forwar
Backward-forward
adjustment

Attention Note: Don’t operate it if there is a passenger on the codriver’s seat

for it may injure the passenger.

139
Methods of application of the deriver seat pre-adjusting
device based on computer memory technology
Front seats

Store driver seat position, steering wheel position, and

other positions in three-dimension mode, and can call
out memory mode with one key.

● storage methods

1 Adjust the seat, steering wheel to comfortable positions.

For the adjusting methods of every part, please refer to the
corresponding method introduction (Refer to next page).

2 Press one switch among ① ~ ③ according to the storage

mode you choose when pressing adjusting switch until a
crashing sound is heard .
set
The button you press will store the driver seat position.
switch

● Calling out methods:

Press a switch among ① ~ ③ that needs to be called and has stored the deriver seat position until a
crashing sound is heard.

■Need to call out before driving

Open the driver's door, and press the switch that needs to be activated in about 30 seconds, seat
position can be adjusted. Steering wheel position will be adjusted automatically when pressing the
engine switch or inserting a key into the key hole.
■Need to stop in the process of calling out storage
●Any of the following operations will be able to stop the driver's seat and steering wheel adjustment
movement in the process of calling out storage.
• Press adjusting switch.
• Press any switch among ① ~ ③.
• place gear lever outside the gear " ".
● Any of the following operations will be able to stop the driver seat adjustment movement in the
process of calling out storage.
• Press one of the driver seat adjustment switches.

140
 General knowledge

Working conditions

It can be used when power switch is at IG position(※1), or when the motor switch is at
ON position (※2),and under the following conditions。
●The gear lever is at gear position when storing.
●The gear lever is at gear position when calling out.
Adjusting methods of every part :
adjusting methods of the different parts, please refer to the corresponding parts.
● Driver's Seat (Refer to P124)
• backward-forward
• Backrest gradient •up-down
● steering wheel (Refer to P148)
• up-down
• Backward-forward

※1 Cars equipped with intelligent entering and starting system

※2 Cars without intelligent entering and starting system

141
Methods of application of memory front seats
function

Driver position registered by computer memory device (Refer to P127) for

pre-adjusting driver's seat position can be called out automatically when
using an intelligent function key or the wireless remote control key function
to unlock and open the driver's door.

● registration methods:

1 Select one switch of ①～③ to register according to your own

preferences.
2Close deriver’s door
3 When pressing storage switch ( one of ① ~ ③), press lock switch
or unlock switch of registration key for about 1 second.
●buzzer ringing.
set switch ●can not register when a key is inserted into the keyhole.

General knowledge
Working conditions:
●Registration can be done only the following conditions are met.
the power is shut down ※ 1 or the motor switch is at the lock position ※2
·when the key is not in the key hole
·when driver's door is closed
●A key only can register one driver position.
●More keys were available on the switch① to ③ for registration.

※1 Cars equipped with intelligent entering and starting system

※2 Cars without intelligent entering and starting system
● Calling out methods
Use the intelligent function of the key or the wireless remote control key function to unlock and
open the driver's door. When the door is open, the stored driver position call be called out.

142
 General knowledge
● Discharging the storage of driver position:
Working conditions:
When pressing the set switch, press the stop lock of the switch to be discharged or the unlock
switch for about 1 second.
Buzzer rings twice
The calling out storage function can not be used if your favorite driver position is not
reregistered among the switch①～③.
General knowledge

Working conditions
When the power switch is at the status of OFF※1,or motor switch is at lock
position※2,and the deriver’s door is locked, the registered mode can be discharged.

※1 Cars equipped with intelligent entering and starting system

※2 Cars without intelligent entering and starting system

143
 How to use the front seat heater★ front seats
How to use the front seat heater

the seat can be heated

● operation method

1
Turn the twist switch

switch for
driver seat
switch for
codriver’s seat

busy light 2 Turn the twist switch and adjust your favorite heating
temperature.
The indicator light will be on when it’s working.

strong strong

weak weak

● How to stop it
Turn the switch to the stop position
●The indicator light turns off.

★indicates options due to the level of cars 144

 Warning: Please follow the following instructions when using the front
seat heater

●If the following people use it, may feel searing even cause low-temperature burns (red
spots, blisters). So they must be very careful when using it. Babies, children, the elder,
patients, people who are uneasy with movement, people with skin sensibility, overtired
people, drowsy people due to alcohol or medicine (sleeping pills, cold medicine, etc.)
●Do not use textile of sound insulation such as carpet or seating washer at the same time for
it may lead to low-temperature burns or damaged seats because of the overheating seats.
●Do not use when napping in case of being burned due to overheating seat.

Note: Do not put items with uneven weight on the seat s nor punch
Attention
the seats with pointed items such as needles and nails. This will
damage the seats.

●Do not put items with uneven weight on the seat nor punch the seat with pointed items
such as needles and nails. This will damage the seat
●When cleaning seats, don’t use organic matters such as benzene, petrol
and so on for this would damage heater and coating of seat.

General knowledge
Working conditions
Available when power switch is at IG position or when motor is working.

145
 Front seat
Seats with footrests

The backrest and headrest of codriver’s seat can be

adjusted according to user’s preference

● Seats with footrests

Warning

adjusting handle
Lift up the handle, then the middle pat of the backrest can be put down.
●The rear seats, codriver's seat can be adjusted in accordance with uses’ preferences.

Attention Note: don’t get you foot or hand pinched when adjusting
the rear seats in accordance with your preferences

●forward tilt headrest

forward tilt key
1 Lift the headrest to the top.

2 Press the forward tilt key and lift up a little then put down

the headrest.

Warning: Passengers should not sit on the codriver’s seat with the headrest
Warning
down in case of serious accident that may threaten people’s life. Make sure
the headrest is in position before driving if the codriver’s seat is taken.

146
 rear seats
adjusting switches of seats★

There are switches for the rear seats in the armrests of rear seats

backrest gradient adjusting switch for rear

seat(refer to P135)

rear seat heater switch(refer to P137)

● How to show the switches

Put down the backrest of the middle seats in the rear to the front.
●Can be used as armrests

★indicates options due to the level of cars 147

 Seats adjustment★ rear seat

● adjusting method of backrest gradient

forward tilt
backward tilt
Switch for the right seat

Switch for the left

Efficient when press the front or rear part of the switch.
headrest adjustment

● Adjusting methods of the headrests of left and right seats

■ up-down adjustment ■backward-forward adjustment

Button Press（pull）in the adjusting direction.

●Lift it up directly to raise up
●Press button to lower it down

●Pull out when pressing button to dismantle.

★indicates options due to the level of cars 148

● adjustment method of the headrest of the middle seat
● Pull the headrest forward until a crashing sound
is heard, then it is locked.
●Pull down it backward when pressing the
return button to return.
Take back button

● Press the dismount button to dismount it.

Dismount button
Warning: Don’t drive when the headrest is pulled out in case the neck
Warning will be shocked fiercely so that you life will be threatened if a sudden
crash happens to the car. Please adjust the height of headrest center to
the back of ears.

Note: The headrests are for the rear seats only. When installing,
confirm whether click sound is heard. If the headrests of front and
Attention rear seats are wrongly installed, they can not be totally locked thus
will injure the crew in the event of sudden crashes. Also In order to
prevent losses of battery power, it should not be used for long time
when engine is not working.

General knowledge
The dismountablility of headrest
The rear middle seat headrests of cars with deepfreeze can not be dismounted.

149
 rear seats
How to use the rear seat heater★

The seat can be heated

work busy light ●Press the front part of the switch, the seat heater will
stop work, while press the rear part, it stops working.
The busy light will be on when it’s working

Switch of ●The heater becomes weaker automatically as the seat

right side seat becomes hotter.

switch of left
side seat

Warning Warning: Please follow the following instructions

when using the rear seats heater

●If the following people use it, may feel searing even cause low-temperature burns (red
spots, blisters). So they must be very careful when using it.
·Babies, children, the elder, patients, people who are uneasy with movement,
·people with skin sensibility,
·overtired people,
·drowsy people due to alcohol or medicine (sleeping pills, cold medicine, etc.)
●Do not use textile of sound insulation such as carpet or seating washer at the same time
for it may lead to low-temperature burns or damaged seats because of the overheating seats.
●Do not use when napping in case of being burned due to overheating seat.

150
 Attention Note: Do not put items with uneven weight on the seat s nor punch
the seats with pointed items such as

●Do not put items with uneven weight on the seat nor punch the seat with pointed items such
as needles and nails. This will damage the seat.
●When cleaning seats, don’t use organic matters such as benzene, petrol and so on for this
would damage heater and coating of seat.

Adjustment can be processed at the tilt angle between the front

seats and the rear seat backrest

● how to return the rear seat backrests

When pressing the switch, the backrest of rear seat returns.

Backrest return switch

151
 The wearing of seat belts
Correct wearing of seat belts
If not properly worn，safety performance of seat belt halves, or even dangerous.
The drivers and the passengers must wear seat belts in accordance with the following
instructions before driving.

Shoulder belt should bond the

shoulder(away from the neck
and close to shoulder)
Adjust backrest, sit straight and lean on
the backrest

Don’t twist

Waist belt fasten lower

part of hipbone

Warning Warning: please wear the safety belt and follow the following
instruction
●Everyone in the car should wear safety belt. Otherwise, the body can not be
restrained in the seat when emergency brake or the crash of the car occurs,
then the body would fly to the exploded and expanded SRS air bag or be tossed out of the car thus injury or casualty
may be caused.
●The following instructions must be complied with in the process of wearing seat belts. Otherwise, seat belts can not
play a normal protective effect if unexpected accidents such as collision occurs, serious injury or even death may be
caused.
·Wear seat belt when sit straight and lean on the backrest of seat. For The correct driving posture, please refer to P122
·Shoulder belt should not be hung on the neck nor bypass under arm. It should tightly bond the shoulder.
·Waist belt should tightly bond lower part of hipbone. If the belt detaches, it will bring strong oppression to abdomen
and other parts in the event of a vehicle collision accident.
·Do not twist seat belts too tightly. Otherwise the impact can not be fully decentralized
in the event of sudden crashes.

·Seat belt is for one person only. Don’t use one seat belt for many people at the same time.
·When wearing seat belt, do not make it loose due to pegs or buttons.
Backrest should not tilt too much. In the event of collision on the window, the body will move lower, resulting in

strong impact on the abdomen and other parts of body.

• Do not be too close to the steering wheel and dashboard to driver.

●Do not place the seat belts or bolts on seats or pinched in doors. If the seat belts are damaged, it can not effectively

work and would result in serious injury or even death.

152
 Warning Warning: please wear the safety belt and follow the following instruction
when using it.
●Children must wear seat belts.
If the children are on the knees, in the event of the emergency brake or a collision accident, the
adults may loose hand, thus may cause a serious personal injury or even death.
●Pregnant women must wear seat belts.
(However, must follow doctors’ )
·Pregnant women wearing seat belts, methods and the use of the normal seat belt is essentially
the same, but as far as possible, put your waist belt lower, it is necessary to be placed below
the embossed abdomen.
Shoulder belt should across the shoulder but avoid the abdomen, bond over the chest.
The incorrect use of seat belts, in the event of emergency brake or collision, would make the
belt tighten the embossed abdomen of mother and would cause serious injury or even death to
the mother and fetus.
●People uneasy with movement should wear seat belts.
(However, should follow doctor’s instructions)
● If the normal use of seat belts make the belt contact with the neck or mandible part of the
children, or for those whose hipbones can not be locked tightly, please use children seats or
infant seats. Otherwise serious injury or even death may be caused in the event of collision due
to strong oppression. For infants, special car seats should be used.

153
(standards for options of child seats)

Child seats and baby seats fixed by child seat fixing rod and the upper fixer
corresponding to ISOFIX

weight height reference age

infant seat less than 9kg less than 70cm Newborn-9months
toddler seat 9～18kg 70～100cm 9months～4years

Above content not included

weight eight reference age

Infant Seat less than 10kg less than 75cm newborn～12months
Toddler Seat 9～18kg 75～105cm 9 months～4years
Child Seat 15～32kg 100～135cm 4 year～10years

154
 Warning Warning: passengers please wear the safety belt and follow the following
instruction

●Nor foreign material in the seat belt buckle. If any foreign material, the bolt can not be locked well with buckle, the
belt can not work effectively in the event of vehicle collision, likely to cause serious injury or even death.
●If there is split at the seams, cracks on seat belts or it can not be used normally, please replace the seat belt with
original FAW belt. And if hit by strong impact or damaged in the vehicle collision accident , please replace with a new
one instead of continue to use it. Otherwise, the seat belt can’t work normally and function effectively if the collision
occurs, and likely to cause serious injury or even death.
●Be careful not to transform seat belts on, dismantling, installation or replacement. the seat belt can’t work normally and
function effectively if the collision occurs, and likely to cause serious injury or even death. The installation, dismantling,
the replacement of the seat belt, please contact FAW Hongqi sales maintenance center.
●When cleaning the seat belt, do not use benzene, gasoline and other organic compounds. And don’t proceed with
bleaching or dyeing treatment. It will affect its safety performance thus not work normally or function effectively in the
event of collision, likely to cause serious injury or even death. Please use clean, neutral cleaning fluid or warm water,
and don’t use before they are dried thoroughly.

The use of seat belts

● Usage

1 Pull out seat belt

Seize the bolt and pull out seat belt from the reeler, but make
sure not to twist it .
When the seat belt is pulled and locked, pull it once more to
make the belt looser, and then slowly pull and adjust it.

2 Insert the bolt into the buckle

Insert the bolt into the buckle to lock until cashing sound is
heard.
Front passengers need to make sure the alarm light (refer to
bolt P173)indicating seat belt unworn is off.
buckle

155
 3. Do the waist belt
Waist belt should be under hipbone. Hold the shoulder belt to
adjust until waist is fastened.

button

4. Use shoulder belt

Make sure that the shoulder belt across the middle shoulder. Seat belts
should stay away from neck , but not slide from the shoulder.
5. Adjust the height of seat belt(refer to the next page)
6. Press the unlock button to rollback the seat belt

General knowledge

buckle of rear seat belt

buckle for the seat
behind codriver’s seat

buckle for the seat behind drive seat

buckle for the middle seat

156
 The wearing of seat belts
The seat belt shoulder height adjustment

When the seat belt near to the neck, or slide from shoulder to wrist, the
height of seat belts should be adjusted, as far as possible to close to the middle shoulder.

● The front seat belts adjustment method

(Adjustable seat belts fixed anchor)
button part

up Adjustable seat belts fixture can be used for seat belt height
adjustment. When adjusting, as far as possible, shoulder seat
belts in the central shoulder.

down ●Lift the button to raise up.

Press the lock button to lower down and adjust to the right
position. Make sure the clashing sound is heard and lock
when stable.
lock button

Warning: Follow the following instructions when adjusting the seat belts
Warning fixtures. Otherwise, if the collision occurs, it can not work effectively,
likely to cause serious injury or even death.
●When adjusting seat belt height, it should be near the middle shoulder
and far away from the neck.
●Ensure that fixtures locked in the appropriate position after adjustment.

● The rear seat belts adjustment methods (about side seats)

When seat belt is near neck, should pull out seat belt
from reeler to adjust.

rollback part

157
 Fixation of child seat
use seat belt

The outside rear seats are equipped with child seat fixtures
which can be locked in the directions of pulling out belts, thus it’s
convenient to lock child seats infant seats safely.

seat belt of outside rear seat

● usage of the child seat fixture

1 Use when the rear seat backrest tilts back in the car with
rear seat backrest adjusting device.(Refer to P135)

2 Install seat belts.

Install seat belts in special seats (child seats, infant seats) by
bolt buckle inserting bolt into buckle until a clashing sound is heard
● installation method Please read carefully the corresponding product brochures

Shoulder belt
3 Pull out shoulder belt
pull out the whole shoulder belt slowly.
●only works at the rollback direction (lock mode).
.

Shoulder belt 4 Rollback shoulder belt

Press rear seat for children with body weight and rollback
shoulder belt, and tighten until no relaxation phenomena.
● Make sure seat belt is under locked state in the direction of
pulling out.
5. Make sure the child seat firmly fixed.
Gently shake seats for children and confirm it is firmly fixed.

*The pictures are just some scheme for illustrating, may be different from the actual child and infant seats in shapes.

158
 fixation of child seat
● method of discharging the fixture of children seat

。Undo the buckle and rollback the seat belt , then the fixture of children seat will be discharged

Warning Warning: Before installing a child seat, infant car seat, we must
carefully read product manual and instructions, and then install.

● If not installed correctly, in the event of emergency brake and the vehicle collision
accident, it’s likely to cause serious injury or even death.
● It’s easy to touch passengers or items and cause major accidents when brake, if it is still
placed in the car after the child seat fixture being discharged.
●Do not let children play the seat belts with children seat fixture. In case fault operation
which may result in serious accidents such as suffocation or even death due to the belt
winding around their necks occurs when they are playing. If this happens, and the bolt
can not be pulled out, please cut seat belts with tools such as scissors.

Attention Note: If you do not use child seat for long time, please put it into luggage.
If fixed in the rear seat for a long time, it may discolor or deform.

General knowledge
seat belt with child seat fixture
In the state of wearing seat belts, too fierce movement of the upper
body may make child seat fixture work. If this situation happens. Open
the buckle, rollback the whole seat belt and wear it again

When use special seat for child in line with the requirements of security benchmarks of road
transport vehicles, you need to use child seat fixing rod or upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX
instead of use seat belt to fix child seat.
(For the fixing rod or the upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX, refer to “fix the child seat with
child seat fixing rod and the upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX” in next page )

159
 Fix the child seat with fixing rod or the upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX

Only install child seats that apply to be fixed with fixing rod or the upper
fixer corresponding to ISOFIX

outside rear seats

●installation site of fixing rods of ISOFIX child seat

In the back seat and connecting seams.
● Installation label of fixing rod(positive
"ISOFIX" negative "LATCH" label affixed
to the seat).

label

rod for fixation

●installation site of fixers

cover “install fixer” marks on the surface

of the cover.

upper
fixer

160
 fixation of child seat
● Install special seat for child
1. Adjust the headrest of rear seat near door to the lowest and most backward position. If it is
adjustable seatback, make sure not adjust the angle of rear seat backrest. (Refer to P135)
2. Confirm the position of child seat fixing rod or upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX
(Refer to previous page)
3. Install special seats (child seat, infant and toddler seats).
Connect the supporting parts of the child seat to the corresponding parts of the ISOFIX child seat
fixing rod or upper fixer, and the install the child seat.
●For the installation instructions, please read instruction manual attached with the product.
4 Make sure the child seat firmly fixed.
Gently shake child seats to confirm it is firmly fixed.

Warning Warning: Be sure that the child seat has been firmly fixed

● Make sure there is no other item except seat belt around child seat fixing rod or upper
fixer corresponding to ISOFIX before installing the child seats. If this any foreign item or
seat-belt is entangled , it could not firmly fix child seat, thus when a collision accident, the
child is likely to be tossed out, causing serious injury or even death.
●It’s easy to touch passengers or items and cause major accidents when stamping the
brake pedal, if it is still placed in the car after the child seat fixture being dismounted.

Attention Note: If you leave child seat alone for a long time, please put it into
luggage。

●If you do not use child seat for long time, please put it into luggage. If fixed in the rear
seat for a long time, it may discolor or deform.
● After installation of child seat, don’t adjust the headrest position and the
backward-forward of the rear seat (only for vehicles with electric rear seats), for this might
damage the rear seats and child seats.

General knowledge
The child seats fixing rod or upper fixer corresponding to ISOFIX

The ISOFIX standard child seat fixing rod or upper fixer apply to the child seat
designated by Hongqi 430/300 and in accordance with the requirements of security
benchmarks of road transport vehicles.。

161
Adjustment of steering wheel and rearview mirror

Adjustment of steering wheel

Button ● adjustment method of steering wheel pre-adjusting based

Up on computer memory technology
Back
Front
Adjust the steering wheel in backward-forward and
Down
up-down direction when pressing the button.
●computer stores the adjusted position.

Warning: When driving, don’t adjust steering wheel position. If wrong

Warning
driving operation occurs in the adjustment process, it would be very
dangerous.

General knowledge
Working conditions
When the power switch residing in ACC, IG or key inserted in the
keyhole ※ l, or the key in the motor switch, it’s under effective
work state.

Convenient function
Automatically tilting and stretching function
This function can be discharged. For details, please consult the FAW-Hongqi sales and
maintenance center.
● When the power switch returns to 0 FF position or the key is pulled out from the key hole ※
1, or pull out the key from the motor switch ※ 2, the steering wheel will automatically move
to the moss forward and the highest position so that it’s easy to get in and off.
●※1
Press power
Cars or insert
equipped withkey into key entering
intelligent hole ※ 1, insert
and the key
starting into motor switch ※ 2, the
system
steering
※2 Cars wheel return
without to the stored
intelligent position.
entering and starting system

162
 Adjustment of steering wheel and rearview mirror

General knowledge
Convenient function
Function of preventing loss of battery
Insert a key into the key hole ※1 , or insert a key into the motor switch and when locked
for※ 2 for 30 seconds, in order to prevent battery loss, it will not work even operate
adjusting switch. In such circumstances, pull out the key from the key holes and re-insert
the key, or press the motor switch engine will work.
Micro-storage pre-adjusting of driving position device / storage call out function
Positioning mode that can store and transfer driver's seat position, steering wheel position.
(Refer Pl27 and 129)

when break off the connection with battery

When break off the connection with battery,
the restored steering wheel position will be deleted.
The working sound of power steering device
When operate the steering wheel, the ”hum” sound will be heard. This is the sound of natural
movements of the power steering, it is a normal phenomenon.
※1 Cars equipped with intelligent entering and starting system
※2 Cars without intelligent entering and starting system

adjustment of anti-glare rearview mirror

● adjusting method in up-down direction

Seize the rearview mirror inside the car, adjust in the direction of the up-down (models equipped
with night vision system can not be adjusted in up-down direction ).

● The switching operation of anti-glare

163
 Handle

Under normal circumstances, it will work as long as press forward the handle at the bottom of the
rearview mirror.
When vehicle behind headlights irradiation cause blinding, pull handle inward
Warning: Do not adjust in the lane inside rearview mirror, it could make
Warning the driver team's training went ahead vehicles, resulting in accidents
resulting in casualties.

Door rearview mirror adjustment

● Specular angle adjustment method

1.Adjust main switch of rearview mirrors behind doors.

main switch
R… rearview mirror of right door
L…rearview mirror of left door
2 adjust perspective.
Use position adjustment switch to adjust door rearview mirror
angle.
3 adjust the main switch to the neutral position.
After the end of adjustment, return main switch to the neutral
position adjusting switch
position.
● When fold the door rearview mirror manually

164
 adjustment of steering wheel and rearview mirror

take back switch

switch status rearview mirror status

Warning ON
Warning (take back)
Warning
OFF
(recover)

Press switch at the top, rearview mirror folds, while press switch at the bottom, rear-view mirror
recovers. When power switch set in OFF position, the rearview mirror can be folded or recovered
manually.

Warning Warning: Don’t adjust door

rear view mirrors when the car is walking.
● Do not adjust door
Rear view mirrors when the car is walking.
it could make the driver hard to control the car, thus accidents may occur, resulting in
casualties.
●Do not drive if the door rear view mirrors are folded, otherwise can not be clear about
the situations behind the car since rearview mirrors can not be used, thus result in
accidents and casualties.
●When door rearview mirror heater works (cf. Pl92), the mirrors will become hot, don’t
touch in case of scald.

.
Attention Note: In the rearview mirror adjustment process, don’t touch.
Otherwise fingers may be pinched, or cause damage to the mirrors

165
 General Knowledge

Working Condition
●Switching power is available while it locates on ACC, IG position or the
engine is working.
●In the congruent operation of rear-view mirrors, the congruence will stop if
disconnect the power supply.
●After manual congruence and restore the rear-view mirror, while switching
power supply to ACC, IG position, or starting the engine, the rear-view
mirror stay at the original place without changing.
Convenient Function
Rear-view Mirror Heater
While eliminating the frost mist on the rear door window, heating the rearview
mirror of the door, eliminating the frost, dew and raindrop, etc. Please refer to
P192 “Instruction of rear-window defroster and rear-mirror heater” for
related details.
Wide-angle rear-view mirror
Through changing the curvature of the surface of
two sides of the dividing line on the rearview
mirror, wide-angle rear-view mirror entails the
Dividing Line
interior mirror with function of general rearview
mirror, and the exterior mirror can enlarge the
range of vision.
The sense of distance for the object seeing from the interior and exterior mirror
is different.
●The object that are saw from the exterior mirror is farther than that saw from
the interior mirror (objects therefore appear further away than they really are
compared with normal rearview mirror.)
Type of rear-view mirror which can eliminates rains.
There are hydrophilic film on the surface of rear-view mirror, on the rainy
weather, the raindrops on the mirror surface showed a film diffusion
(hydrophilic effect), which is convenient for identification of the back side
situation. See P301 for operation method.
●Start up the rear-view mirror heater, hydrophilic film getting clear, thus have a
fine visual effect. Please refer to P192 for operation method of rear-view mirror
heater.
●Wash with water in daily maintenance.
●The hydrophilic effect for small amount of raindrops such as drizzle and light
rain is not good.
166
 Using method of Selector Lever
Sequential Shifting Automatic Transmission

●Function of Selector Lever

Disengage Switch of Selector lever lock (Refer to
Parking and starting the engine
The wheel was locked. Set the selector
lever to position. (The key can only
(Parking）
be pulled out from the engine switch
while in position.)
Reverseing
Fix the shift to back-running state. (Reverse）

The buzzer sounds notify the driver that

the selector lever is in position.
No power transfer state (Null）
The engine can also start up on
position, but for the sake of safety, wish
you can start up the engine on (Sequential

position.
Sequential Shift
Driving (forward) (Driving)

Switch to sequential shift mode (refer to

the next page).
Normal driving (forward)
The drive gear can switch from one to 6 according to the speed and drive
condition.
●Transmission Method
■Transmission Operation
When switch the gear from to , you need
to depress the brake pedal, then switch gears after
the vehicle was completely stopped.
You can move the selector lever along the
gear shifting locating plate under the
condition of depressing the brake pedal.

167
The selector lever will just need to move along the gear shifting locating plate.

●Using Method for Sequential Gear Shift Mode

■Switch Method of Sequential Gear Shift Mode

Display of “S” Mode

Display of Selector Lever

While set the selector lever at position, changed to sequential fear shift
mode, conduct gear shift operation through pushing and moving selector
lever “+" key“-” key for gear shifting operation.
●Sequential gear shift indicator lights.
When selector lever is in position,，“S” mode will be released，thus back
to normal shift operation.
■Gear shift method，

upshif Downshift Upshift

s

downshift Upshift
downshift
downshift Upshift
Upshift
downshift
downshift Upshift

When uphill, move the selector lever upward along “+” side. When down hill,
move the selector lever“一” downward.
● The selected position will display on the gear indicator.
、 、 、 will not display.
168
 Using method of Selector Lever
■Functions of each Gear Position

The transmission gear can switch automatically between first gear

to sixth gear according to the speed and driving condition.

The transmission gear can switch automatically between first gear

to fifth gear according to the speed and driving condition.

The transmission gear can switch automatically between first gear

to fourth gear according to the speed and driving condition.
The transmission gear can switch automatically between first gear
to third gear according to the speed and driving condition.
●While down the road, the engine brake will come into effect.
● While up the road, switch times is fewer, the vehicle can slide
smoothly.

The transmission gear can switch automatically between first gear

to third gear according to the speed and driving condition。
●Use this when it needs engine brakes.

The transmission gear is fixed on the first gear.

●Use this when it needs strong engine brakes.

General Knowledge
When the selector lever switch from position to position, the shift
displays
While switch from position to position, the selector lever normally
shows fifth shift.
However, while Al-SHIFT (refer to Pl58) is in working condition, display the
selected shift(fifth shift, or fourth shift or third shift).
Alarm Buzzer

169
For the sake of safety, or to assure driving performance, there are certain limits
for shift gear operation, sometimes it cannot switch to your expected shift.
While operate gear shifting and cannot lower the shift, the alarm buzzer will
sounds.
System Anomaly
When the selector lever is in position, and the sequential gear shift indicator
doesn’t light up, then there are something wrong with the system. Please go
to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre for inspection. The effect of this
condition is as the same as the selector lever is in position.

General Knowledge
Safety Protection Performance
Selector Lever Lock Device
Device of automatic parking selector lever which can prevent error operation.
●If it was not under the state of depressing brake pedal, the selector lever will
not able to move from position.
·If the power switch is in OFF or ACC position, you can not move the selector
lever from P position, even if you depress the brake pedal.
·Depress the brake paddle when the selector lever is close to front-passenger
seat, sometimes you can not move the selector lever from P position still. You
have to depress the brake paddle.
● You can only remove the intelligent key from the ignition lock if the selector
lever is in position P.
·When pull the key out, set selector lever in Button of Release Shift Lock
position.
●When you set the selector lever in position,
the buzzer will sound.
·Buzzer sounds to notify the driver to set selector
lever in position.
·People out of vehicle cannot hear this, you need
to pay attention to it.
(Not warning notification for people out of the
vehicle.)
Using method for Button of releasing shift lock.
Use when the selector lever can not move from
position.
●Under depressing brake paddle state, push down Button of releasing shift lock
and operate selector lever at the same time.
●It’s possible that Button of releasing shift lock went wrong, please go to FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Centre for inspection.
170
 6 Super ECT Using method of Selector Lever

6 Super ECT is electronic control automatic transmission, it uses

flexible lock device and Al※．-SHIFT device, and this can save
fuel consumption and comfortable driving.
※Short for Artificial Intelligence which means “artificial intelligence”.
●Using Method of Select Switch in ECT Mode

According to driving and using condition, you

can select among the following 3 types of
mode.

Select Switch in ECT

Mode

■Normal Driving Mode

The switch stay unmoved in its original condition (neutral condition).
●Indicator lamp is not light up.
■PWR (Electric) Mode
Press PWR position of the switch.
●The ECT PWR indicator in the instrument lights up.
●When restore to normal driving mode, press SNOW side, and make the
switch in neutral position. SNOW (Snowfield) mode.
■Press side of SNOW Switch
● ECT SNOW indicator lamps in the instrument light up.
● When restore to normal driving mode, press again the SNOW side.
If engine alarming lamp lights up (see P169) while driving, may be
Attention the electric control system of the automatic transmission went wrong,
please go to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre for inspection.

171
 General Knowledge
Working Condition
● The power switch can be used when it is in IG position, or the engine is
working state.
●Driving after select SNOW mode, it can switch back to normal driving mode if
set the power switch on OFF position.
Types of Mode
Normal Driving Mode
Suitable for driving of normal working condition, can drive and height speed
drive in downtown, the running area is large.
PWR (Electric) Mode
Suitable for full-power driving or mountain driving.
SNOW (Snowfield) Driving Mode
Suitable for start-up and driving on smooth road such as snow field.
Flexible Locking Device
A device which improve the transmission efficiency of the transmission, and
save fuel consumption.
In order to make full use of the flexible locking device, it will start up
automatically when the selector lever is in position or position and set
at sixth gear, fifth gear, and fourth gear.
A1-SHIFT
The switching method of A1—SHIFT is different from the gear shift method of
select switch with ECT mode, assume the driver’s intention and road condition
from the following operation, automatically switch to the best driving mode,
thus reach to the most comfortable, the most safe driving.
It will work automatically when the selector lever is in position.
■Automatic switch control of gear shift method
It will switch automatically from the driver’s current operation state to the
driving method that is the most suitable method for the driver.
■ Uphill and Downhill Gear shift control

172
●On the uphill road, decrease the gear shift times that can help for a smooth
driving.
●While downhill, make full use of engine brake, which can release the load
of foot brake.
■ Vehicle equipped with navigation system
NAVl·Al—SHIFT can make the automatic transmission gear switching between
sixth gear and third gear automatically according to information such as the
road condition information (corners, crossroad), road bending information,
driver’s acceleration, brake operation, etc. See User Manual of Navigation
System for details.
Driving Method of Automatic Transmission Vehicle
Start-up Method

●Normal Start-up Method

Acceler
1 Start the engine, after confirming the engine
ator
pedal speed is stable, depressing the brake pedal with
your right foot, and set the selector lever to
position simultaneously.
2 Release parking brake (refer to P162).
3. Release the brake pedal slowly, depressing the
accelerator pedal slowly, it will start up.

Brake pedal
●Start-up Method on uphill road
1 Make sure to set selector lever in position under the parking brake
state.
2 Depressing accelerator pedal slowly with your right foot.
3 Confirm the vehicle is moving, and release parking brake, then it will
start upWarning
Depressing the brake pedal and then operate the

●When the vehicle starts up, you have to depressing the brake pedal and then
173
operate the selector lever. Especially the engine just starts and the air
conditioning is working, creeping phenomenon may happen, so you have to
depress the brake pedal in place.
●Before drive the vehicle, you have to confirm the position of brake pedal and
accelerator pedal in case of wrong operation. If you take the accelerator pedal as
brake pedal, the vehicle will start up suddenly, and accident may happen, result
in serious injuries even death.
● Always remember not to operate gear shift under the state of depressing
accelerator pedals. The vehicle will start up suddenly and accident will happen.

Driving Method

●Normal Driving
Set the selector lever in position to drive.
● Conduct acceleration and deceleration operation by way of accelerator pedal
and brake pedal.
●Rapid Acceleration
Depressing the accelerator pedal in place. Switch to low gear and do rapid
acceleration operation.

174
●Driving on Sloping Road
■Uphill
Set the selector lever in position, while driving, depressing deeply the
accelerator pedal from high gear to low gear, the engine speed accelerated
suddenly. Reset the selector lever in position, adjust to fourth gear or third
gear to drive.
■Downhill
If you depress the brake pedal too hard, sometimes it may affect the brake effect.
If the selector lever is in position, and the speed is too high, then you have
to reset the selector lever in position, adjust it to third gear or second gear
and then drive.
● Even in the fourth gear, the engine may form certain brake force.

Warning Don’t set selector lever in position while

●In the driving process, don’t set the selector lever in position. The engine
brake will not work, severe accident may happen.
●While driving forward, don’t set selector lever in · position. It will result in
wheel locking and accident may happen. Furthermore, don’t apply wasteful
outer force to automatic transmission, otherwise it may cause malfunction.
●You need to depress the brake pedal and accelerator pedal with your right foot.
If you depress the brake pedal with your left foot, when you need urgent brake
you act may lagged behind, and accident may happen.
●On uphill road, don’t set the selector lever in or position and slide
back, or set in · position and slide forward. The engine may stop, and affect the
effect of brake, or make the operation of steering wheel heavier, and result in
fault or the reason of accident.

Attention
Set the transmission in position to drive will cause
fault of the automatic transmission.

175
 General Knowledge

Engine brakes when use the cruise control

When you drive with cruise control device, even if you switch the selector lever
from position to position, the cruise control device will still can not be
released, the engine brake will not work. See P198 for operation method of
deceleration.

Stopping and Parking Method

●Method of Stop the Vehicle

1 Stop the vehicle. While the selector lever is in position, depressing
brake pedal with you right foot.
Air conditioning device works intermittently according to the temperature
changes. While it works, the idling speed will increase automatically which will
reinforce the creeping, so don’t move the vehicle.
2 Apply parking brake according to requirement.
When stop the vehicle on uphill road, the force of backward sliding is greater
than that of forward out of creeping phenomenon, so it may slide back.
Depressing the brake pedal with your right foot, and depressing the parking
brake with your left foot.
3 When stop the vehicle for a long time, set the selector lever to position
or position.
●Method of Parking the Vehicle
1 Stop the vehicle to a complete halt.
2 Depressing parking brake.
While depressing the brake pedal with your right foot, depressing parking
brake hardly with your left foot.
3 Set the selector lever to position.
To prevent the vehicle from moving, you must set the selector lever to
position.
4 Stop the engine.
You have to stop the engine and lock the door before you leave the vehicle.

176
 Warning
While driving, don’t switch the selector lever to

●While driving, don’t switch the selector lever to position. Inside of the
automatic transmission will have mechanical lock phenomenon, which may
result in accident.
●Don’t make the engine in idle speed state while stopping. Switch the selector
lever to positions other than , position, the vehicle may start up suddenly
and result in risks.

Attention
You must stop the engine and lock the door before you
leave the vehicle.

● If the engine is in working state, and the selector lever was switched to
positions other than position, the vehicle will move automatically out of
creeping phenomenon, and if you depressing the accelerator carelessly, the
vehicle will start up suddenly.
● Don’t depressing the brake paddle and the accelerator paddle simultaneously,
switch the selector lever at and positions, don’t depress accelerator
paddle as depress the brake, which may result in overheating or fault of the
automatic transmission.

177
Using Method of Parking Brake Pedal
Using Method of Parking Brake Pedal

●While Depressing Parking Brake

Parking Brake Pedal

While depressing the brake pedal with right foot,

depress the parking brake pedal with left foot at
the same time.
Brake
●Brake warning light lights on.
Pedal

●While Releasing Parking Brake

Release Handle While depressing the brake pedal with right

foot, pull the release handle. ● Make sure the
brake indicator lamp lights off.

Don’t drive the vehicle while depressing parking brake.

Attention
It may lead to brake parts wearing, brakes overheated, and
affect the brake efficiency.

178
Identification of Instrument, Indicator and Warning Light
Instrument

Warning lamp of residual fuel

Fuel gauge
speedomer
Tachomete

Water temperature gauge

Mileage/Trip meter
Exterior temperature display
Mileage/Trip meter
shift button 164 gear shift
Trip meter reset button 164

General
Instrument
When the power supply set to IG position or the engine starts, the indicator of
instrument is shifting around Zero, and this is normal.

●Fuel Gauge
When power switch is in IG position, or under the condition of engine operation,
the quantity of remaining oil will appear. Oil tank capacity is 70 L.
General Knowledge
Fuel Gauge

●On the slope road, or turns off, the fuel in the oil tank is moving, and the
indication of the indicator may not stable.
●It takes time for stability of indicator after refuel.
●Refuel when the power supply is in IG condition, the quantity of the remaining
oil may not show accurately.
● means the fuel filler cover is at the back side of vehicles on the driver side.
179
●Speedometer
Indicating running speed

●Engine Tachometer
Indicating speed of engine in every minute
Please do not run the engine in red alert area (beyond the
Attention allowed speed scope of engine). If the engine continues to
run when the pointer is in the red alert area, it would cause
bad impact on the engine or even damage the engine.
●Water temperature gauge
Indicating the cooling liquid temperature of engine when the power switch is in
the IG position or the engine is in working state.

The water temperature may be too high when pointer is in

Attention the H red alert area. Please stop in a safe place and handle it
according to method of “Overheated water temperature” in
P333.

●Odometer／Trip recorder
Indicate the following contents when the power switch is in the IG position or
the engine is in working state.
■Odometer
Indicating total kilometers in km
■Trip recorder
Indicating zone distance (zone A and zone B) in km
● Switch button of Odometer and Trip recorder
Each press on the switch button would cause the following switch
Odometer Interval Interval

●Reset button of trip recorder

180
Choose one zone that is needed to be reset from zone A and zone B, then press
the reset button for 1 second until it shows “0”.
●Outside temperature display
Indicating the outside temperature of vehicle

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Indicating the outside temperature of vehicle when the power switch is in the IG
position or the engine is in working state.
Indicator of outside temperature
●The indicating temperature may be different from that measured by other
instruments at times.
●The indicator may not indicate outside temperature correctly in any of the
following cases:
·When the outside temperature is lower than 40℃or higher than 50℃
·When vehicle is parking or running at a low speed (about lower than
20km/h)
·When the outside temperature changes suddenly (near by tunnel inlet and
outlet etc)
●The indicating temperature may change according to vehicle state (running
speed, wind direction etc.), even though the outside temperature does not
change.

● Rotary button of instrument brightness

The rotary button of instrument

brightness can be used to adjust
dar bright
instrument brightness. Clockwise rotation
of the rotary button would brighten the
rotary button instrument; otherwise the instrument
of instrument would be dimmed.

181
 Geneal Knowledge
Working Conditions
Used in the case that the power switch is in the IG position or the engine is in
working state.
Diminish Light
When lighting a lamp in darker surroundings, instrument illumination would
dim naturally. Instrument illumination would not dim when lighting a lamp in
brighter surroundings (daytime).
The following illumination would stop naturally when rotate the button
counterclockwise to the end:
·Footlights (see P252)
·Surrounding illumination of gear lever (see P239)

182
 Indicator Lamp, Warning Lamp

Main warning lamp 176 Rear foglamp indicator 167

fender lamp indicator 167 high beam indicator lamp 167

Turn indicator lamp 167
front foglamp indicator 167

Turn-indicator lamp 167 Engine warning lamp 169

AFS OFF Indicator lamp 169 ECT SNOW indicator lamp 169

ECT SNOW indicator lamp

SRS air bag/pretensioner warning lam 170 Slip indicator lamp 168

Night view warning lamp 172 Power steering warning

lamp 170

Charge warning lamp 170

Anti-theft indicator 169 Not wear seat belt warning

Auxiliary warning lamp for ABS and brake 171 lamp of the driver’s seat 173

Fuel warning lamp 172 Brake warning lamp 171

Warning lamp of the door without

closed tightly 173 Gear display 167

Cruise control lamp 168
Sequential Gear display 167

Comprehensive information display

Driver seat door is

open

Except for the above information,

there are a lot of others. See P174
“Comprehensive information
Warning lamp of the driver’s seat
display” for details.
without wearing seat belt 173

183
 ●Turn indicator light

Flicker of turn indicator lights and emergency blinkers (See P189, 194)
Geneal Knowledge

In case of acceleration of flicker

Turn indicator light bulbs may damage.
To confirm whether the turn indicator light is flickering.

● Headlight high beam indicator

The Indicator is on when headlights are high beam. (See Pl88)

●Gear indicator
Indicating the current gear.

●Sequential shift indicator

Set gear in position, and the indicator is on when in the sequential shift mode.
(See P l54)

●Gear number indicator

Indicating the current gear number when the gear lever is in position (any of
the first to the sixth gears).
No indicating when gear lever is in 、 、 、 positions.

● Front fog lamp indicator

The indicator is on when turning on front fog lamp.

●Rear fog lamp indicator
Limited to the vehicles equipped with rear fog lamp.
The indicator is on when turning on rear fog lamp.

●Clearance lamp indicator

184
The indicator is on when turning on the clearance lamp and rear lamps.

●Slip indicator
● Flashing in any of the following cases:
·ABS is in working
(ABS with EBD, and brake auxiliary device)→See P277
·In case of transverse slip of vehicle (VSC device)→See P280
·When TRC is in working (TRC device)→See P281
·When hill-start assist control device is in working→See P282
●The indicator is on in any of the following cases:
·When press TRC OFF switch (See P195) to stop TRC
·When VSC warning light is on→See Pl78
· When switching to maintenance model→See Pl4
When the indicator is off in case that power switch is in IG
Attention position or the engine is in starting state, it may be caused
by faults of system. Please accept check in FAW Hongqi
Sales and Service Centre.

Geneal Knowledge

Indicator
The indicator is on when power switch is in IG position and is off when the
engine starts.

■VSC working alarm buzzer

The buzzer would sound constantly in case of side slip of vehicle.

Geneal Knowledge
Working
The slip indicator flickers to warn according to running state at times.

●Cruise control indicator

The indicator is on when pressing the main switch of cruise control to make the
185
device be in ON state.
(Please see P197 about the cruise control).
If the indicator flickers when vehicle is running with
uniform velocity, please press main switch to turn it off, and
press again to turn it on.
Attention If the indicator is still flickering after above operation, or
returns to original state after resetting, it may be caused by
device faults. This could not influence the normal running;
however, it is better to check in FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Centre.

●ECT PWR indicator

The indicator is on when pressing ECT mode selection switch to choose PWR
mode. (See 157).

●ECT SNOW indicator

The indicator is on when pressing ECT mode selection switch to choose SNOW
mode. (See 157).

●Car alarm indicator

The indicator is on when car alarm device is activated. (See Pll7)

●AFS OFF indicator

The AFS OFF indicator is on when pressing AFS OFF indicator to stop
intelligent AFS (See 196). The ASF OFF indicator flickers when intelligent AFS
or automatic adjusting device of headlights with gas-discharge light sources
malfunctions. When ASF OFF indicator flickers, the intelligent AFS or
automatic adjusting device of headlights with gas-discharge light sources does
not work, however, the headlights are on, thus would not influence normal
running.
Attention The flickering of indicator may be caused by device faults, please
accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
186
 Geneal Knowledge

Indicator
The indicator is on when power switch is in IG position or the engine starts, and
is off in several seconds.

●Engine warning light

The warning light is on when Engine Electronic Control system and automatic
transmission device malfunction in running of the engine.

Attention If the warning light is on when engine is running, please

accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.

●If the warning light is on when engine is running, please accept check in FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Centre as soon as possible.
●Even though treading on the accelerator pedal could not accelerate the engine;
this may be caused by faults of electronic control system. Though vehicle
could run normally at times, it would increase vibration of vehicle body. Please
accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre as soon as possible.
In running, even though the faults of electronic control system are treated, the
warning light could not recover to the normal state before the engine stops
and power is set at CFF.

Geneal Knowledge
General knowledge warning light
The indicator is on when power switch is in IG position and is off when the engine starts.

●SRS Air bag／pretensioner warning light

The warning light is on when SRS air bag or seat belt device with pretensioner
is abnormal. (Please see P266 about the contents of SRS air bag, and P275
about seat belt with pretensioner and load limiter)

187
 The device may malfunction if the warning light is in any of
the following state, please accept check in FAW Hongqi
Sales and Service Centre. Otherwise the SRS air bag or seat
Attention belt with pretensioner would not work normally in case of a
collision accident, which would lead injury to passengers.
●The warning light is off or on constantly when power
switch is in IG position or the engine starts.
●The warning light is on in running.
Geneal Knowledge

Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position or the engine starts,
and is off in several seconds.

●Charging warning light

The charging warning light would be on when charging system malfunctions in
running of engine.

If the warning light is on in running of engine, the V-belt

Attention may break. Now please park the vehicle in a safe place
and contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.

Geneal
Knowledge
Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position and is off after
starting of engine.

●Power steering warning light

The warning light is on when power steering control system is abnormal.
Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre if the
Attention warning light is on. Now the operation of steering wheel becomes
heavy, so please grasp the steering wheel to operate.

188
 Geneal
Knowledge
Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position and is off in several
seconds.

●ABS and brake auxiliary device warning light

The warning light is on when ABS and brake auxiliary device are abnormal.
(See P277)
●When the warning light is on, it means that ABS and brake auxiliary device do
not work, however, braking performance could be ensured.
●When the warning light is on, it means that ABS does work and the tires would
lock in case of emergency brake and brake on slippery road surface.

Attention Please stop vehicle immediately when the warning light

and braking system warning light are on at the same
time.

●Please stop vehicle immediately in a safe place when the warning light and
braking system warning light are on at the same time, and please contact with
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
Now, not only the ABS and brake auxiliary device malfunction, but also the
vehicle would be instable when forcing to tread on the brake pedal.
●The following case of the warning light may be caused by system faults,
please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
The warning light is still on when starting the engine or in running of vehicle.

Geneal Knowledge

Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position and is off after starting the
engine.
189
 ●Brake system warning light (red)
The warning light would be on in any of the following cases when power switch
is in IG position or the engine is in working state:
●In case of parking brake
Even though the parking brake is cancelled and the power switch is in IG
position or the engine starts, the warning light is still on for several seconds.
●The brake fluid is insufficient.
●When EBD is abnormal (Please see P277)
●When brake system is abnormal.
■Brake system alarm buzzer
●The warning light is on simultaneously with the buzzing of alarm buzzer in
case of occurring of abnormal situations related to the performance reduction of
the brake system.
●The alarm buzzer would sound when vehicle runs at speed of above 5km/h in state
of parking brake.
Warning Please park the vehicle in a safe place and contact with
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre, when the warning
light is under any of the following cases:
●The warning light is on with buzzing of the alarm buzzer when the engine is in
working, or the warning light is still on after releasing the parking brake. Now
the brake performance is aggravating and the brake distance becomes longer,
which would cause an unexpected accident. Please do not force to tread on
brake pedal in case of aggravation of brake performance.
●The warning light is on simultaneously with the ABS and brake auxiliary
device warning light, which means that not only the ABS and brake auxiliary
system are abnormal, but also vehicle would be instable in case of forcing to
treading on the brake pedal.

190
 Any of the following cases of the warning light may be
caused by abnormality of brake system, please accept check
in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
●The warning light is off in case of parking brake, when the
power switch is in IG position or the engine starts.
●The warning light is off in case of cancellation of parking
Attention brake, when the power switch is in IG position or the engine
starts.
In addition, the warning light is on when vehicle is running,
and then is off, under this circumstance, the case that the
warning light is on again is normal.

Geneal Knowledge
Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position and is off after
starting the engine.

●Residue fuel warning light

In case that power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working, the
warning light is on when residue fuel is less than 12L. Please supplement the
fuel when the warning light is on.
In case of ramp or turning, the warning light would be on beforehand because
the fuel flows in the tank.
●Night view warning light
Limited to vehicles equipped with night view system
The warning light is on when near-infrared emitter or system is abnormal in
case that night view system is in working.
Attention The abnormity of the system may cause that the warning light is on,
please check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.

191
 Geneal Knowledge
Warning light
The warning light is on when power switch is in IG position or the engine starts,
and is off after several seconds.

192
 ●Door-ajar warning light
The warning light is on when any door is not closed tightly.
■Door-ajar alarm buzzer
The alarm buzzer would sound when vehicle runs at speed of above 5km/h in the state
that any door is not closed tightly (the warning light is on).
Please do not drive when the warning light is on. For vehicle
Warning door is not closed tightly, it may open in running and may
cause unexpected accident.
●Warning light of no fastening seat belt
In case that the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working state,
the warning light would be on when the seat belt is not fastened. Please fasten
the seat belt.
■Alarm buzzer of no fastening seat belt
The buzzer would sound at intervals for 120 seconds (sound of the buzzer
changes after 30 seconds from beginning) when vehicle runs at speed of above
25km/h in the state of flickering of the warning light.
●The buzzer would stop buzzing after the seat belt is fastened.

●Warning light of no fastening seat belt of front-passenger

seat
When power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working state, the
passenger test sensor in front of the front-passenger seat could perceive that the
seat belt of front-passenger seat is not fastened and the warning light flickers.
Please fasten the seat belt immediately.
■Alarm buzzer of no fastening seat belt
The buzzer would sound at intervals for 120 seconds (sound of the buzzer
changes after 30 seconds from beginning) when vehicle runs at speed of above
25km/h in the state of flickering of the warning light.
●The buzzer would stop buzzing after the seat belt is fastened.

193
 Geneal Knowledge
Warning lamp
●The sensor, in front of the front-passenger seat, perceives when bearing certain
weight, thus the warning lamp would flicker in case of putting heavy things in
the front-passenger seat.
●The cushion on the front-passenger seat would disperse the weight so that the
sensor could not perceive the passenger in the seat.

Comprehensive information display

Functions of comprehensive information display

Comprehensive Information

Comprehensive information display could display the following information.

Cruise information display……………………………..……………Pl75
Alarm display……………………………………………………..…Pl76

Switch methods of various display functions

Each press on DISP switch could switch to “Cruise

information display” (See P175)

DISP switch 194

 Geneal Knowledge

Information on display
The information on display would be switched automatically under the
following cases:
●Once there is any warning; the information on display would be switched to
alarm display even though it shows “Cruise information display”.
●When the main switch of spacing sonar control device is in ON position, it
would be switched to “spacing sonar range display” even though the current
display is “Cruise information display”.
●It would be switched to VSC alarm display in case of maintenance model (See
P178).

195
 Cruise information display
Each press on DISP would cause the following switch process:
Average fuel
No display Distance for continuing to consumption after Instant fuel consumption
travel refuel

Distance for continuing to

travel
●Distance for continuing to travel (000km)
Displaying the distance for continuing to travel
calculated according to current residue fuel and fuel consumption.
Attention The distance for continuing to travel refers to the mileage
the vehicle could travel under current residue fuel, however,
please supplement fuel oil when pointer is close to E area or
the residue fuel warning light is on.

Geneal Knowledge
Distance for continuing to travel display
●The distance for continuing to travel displayed in new vehicle is not very
correct.
●The distance for continuing to travel is calculated according to past fuel
consumption, so it should be added or reduced moderately according to the
driving method and road conditions.
●When the fuel gauge is abnormal, “km” would display soon.●The display
could record and reset when battery terminal releases.

Average fuel consumption after refuel

●Average fuel after fuel filling (00.0 km/L)
The new average fuel is displayed every 10 seconds after fuel filling and
starting the engine.
●The value would reset after fuel filling.

Geneal Knowledge
Average fuel display after fuel filling
●Stop the vehicle and feed the fuel when the power switch is in OFF or ACC
position.
The value could not recover in any of the following cases:
·Feeding fuel when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is working.
·A little fuel filling
196
●After fuel filling and before driving, it displays the value of the last stop of the
engine.

Instant fuel
●Instant fuel
Instant fuel is displayed by histogram every 5 seconds
whenInstant
engine fuel
is working.

Geneal Knowledge
Instant fuel display
The instant fuel could not be displayed by histogram in any of the following
cases:
●When the engine is not working
●When fuel consumption has not been calculated
Alarm display The buzzer sounds when there is information
Main alarming need to inform in case of system abnormity,
and at the same time, the main warning light is
on or flickers, and the comprehensive
information display indicates the warning
information.
In addition, only the comprehensive
information display indicates information at
Comprehensive Information Display times because of different system.
●In case that there are over 2 warning
information need to display, it would switch automatically and display the
information repeatedly.
●Alarm display is cancelled after removal of the reasons.

Driver’s door ●Door-ajar alarm display

open Alarm display is indicated in form of diagram and text with
door-open in case that any of doors is open.
The alarm buzzer would sound and main warning light would flicker when vehicle
runs at speed of above 5km/h in such state.

197
 Warning Please do not drive in the state of alarm display. For door is
not closed tightly, it may open suddenly in running and
cause unexpected accident.

Attention Please stop to close the door tightly in case of such alarm
display.

Engine cover ●Alarm display for opening engine

open
compartment cover
It displays that the engine compartment cover is open.
The alarm buzzer would sound and main warning light would flicker when vehicle
runs at speed of above 5km/h in such state.
Please do not drive in the state of alarm display. For engine
Warning hood is not closed tightly, it may open suddenly in running
and cause unexpected accident.

Attention When the alarming indicates, please stop to close the engine hood tightly.

●Alarm display for opening trunk lid

Boot cover open Alarm display is indicated in form of text and diagram in
case that the trunk lid is open.
The alarm buzzer would sound and main warning light would flicker when vehicle
runs at speed of above 5km/h in such state.
Please do not drive in the state of alarm display. For
Warning
trunk lid is not closed tightly, it may open in running and
the article may fly out to cause unexpected accident.

Attention When the warning indicates, please stop to close the trunk lid tightly.

Skylight open ●Alarm display for opening skylight

198
Limited to vehicles equipped with skylight
The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information is
displayed when the driving seat door and skylight are open in case that the
power switch is in OFF or ACC position.
Please close the skylight when leaving the vehicle.
●Please ensure that the skylight is closed completely when leaving and washing
vehicle.
Please depress ●Alarm display of starting engine
brake when
you start Press on engine switch without treading on brake pedal, if
power is switched twice, the warning information would display for several
seconds,
Engine however,
fuel the main warning light does not flicker or is not on.
pressure
is not enough ●Alarm display of engine oil pressure

The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information are
displayed when inner lubricant oil pressure is abnormal in case that the engine is
working.
出现警报提示 Please stop vehicle and engine in a safe place to check the
Attention lubricant oil volume (See P311). Please contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Centre when warning light flickers
in case that lubricant oil does not decrease, or alarm display
is still on after feeding lubricant oil.

Parking brake is
not released
●Alarm display for no cancellation of parking
brake

The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information is
displayed when vehicle runs at speed of above 5km/h in the state of parking brake.

Attention Alarm display may be caused by system abnormity, please

stop to cancel parking brake
199
 Rear combination
lamp system ●Alarm display of rear combination lamp
system
Under any of the following cases, the warning light is on when rear combination
lamp is abnormal when power switch is in IG position or the engine is started.
●The lamp switch is in ON (connected)
●Treading on brake pedal
●10 seconds after starting the engine
Attention Alarm display may be caused by system abnormity, please
accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.

vsc system
inspection ●VSC alarm display
The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information is
displayed when VSC system is abnormal or in maintenance model. (Please see
P14 about maintenance model).
●Alarm display means that the VSC, TRC, Hill-start assist control device and
anti-collision braking system do not work but do not hamper normal traveling.
Attention Alarm display may be caused by system abnormity, please
accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
tyre pressure
inspection ●Alarm display for abnormity of tire pressure

system
The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information is
displayed when electrical components of tire pressure warning system are
abnormal (Please see P284 about relevant contents of tire pressure warning
system)。
Attention Though the alarm display does not hamper traveling, please
accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
Tyre air pressure is
not enough
●Alarm display of tire pressure
200
The buzzer sounds, the main warning light flickers and warning information is displayed
when feeling that the tire pressure drops in running. Please adjust to nominal pressure at once.
●Adjust the tire pressure according to the Tire Pressure Gauge stuck inner side of the driving
seat door. In addition, press on the pressure set switch continually for 1 to 2 seconds after
finishing adjusting, and then the alarm display is cancelled. (See P329).

Under any of the following cases, no alarm display in case of tire

pressure drop caused by system abnormity, or there is still alarm
display in case of normal tire pressure.
●The four wheels are not equipped with tires of nominal specification, the
same size, the same manufacturer, the same brand and the same tread, or
tires of obviously different wearing (the requirements of the tires used in
winter are same.)
Attention ●Using emergency tire, studless tire, snow tire and tire equipped with
skid chain
●Using tire with pressure being higher than nominal tire pressure, and
sharp drop of tire pressure caused by tire wearing in marching
●When traveling on extremely bad or slippery road such as frozen
road, or traveling at a speed of lower than 30km/h, and traveling for
short time of less than 5 minutes.

Geneal Knowledge

Initial adjustment
The system would not work abnormally if no initial adjustment is accompanied
with replacement of tire and wheel as well as replacing tire positions. Please
refer to “Replacing tire and wheel” in P329 about initial adjustment method.

●Alarm display of intelligent key system

201
The alarm display of intelligent key system accesses and starts alarm display of
the system intelligently. Please see P40.

●Alarm display of spacing sonar

Vehicle equipped with spacing sonar device

Please see Navigation System User Manual.

202
 Front windshield display
Functions of front windshield display

The front windscreen display is beneath the front windscreen,

which is used to display vehicle speed or night view system.

●Method for adjusting display position

front windscreen display

Vehicle without night Vehicle with night

view system view system

Up and down adjusting

Up and down button
brightness
adjusting button adjusting button

Geneal Knowledge
Display
The displayed contents on the front windscreen display only could be seen from
driving seat.
■Brightness adjustment
The brightness of front windscreen display is adjusted automatically according
to surrounding lightness.
Vehicle equipped with night view system
Press brightness key to adjust brightness.
●press upper to brighten and lower to dim.
Vehicle equipped without night view system
Use instrument brightness button to adjust brightness (See P165).
Geneal Knowledge
Brightness adjustment
Adjust the brightness gradually to avoid sharp changes of brightness.
■Position adjustment
Display position on front windshield display could be adjusted.
●Press ∧ upwards and ∨ downwards.
203
 Speed display

Warning Though brightness and display position of images could hamper

safe traveling, please adjust it to proper state. If the adjusted
brightness and display position hamper driving, it may lead to
●Display
unexpected accident.
Press HUD※1
main switch when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.
●HUD light is on and speed is displayed on the lower part of the front
windshield.
When it is working, press main switch of HUD to stop displaying and the HUD
light is off.

spee
Not equipped with night equipped with night
view system view system

Working indicator lamp Working indicator lamp

HUD main switch HUD main switch

204
Night view system
Night view system, with regard to the indiscernible pedestrian, obstruction
and road conditions, uses near-infrared emitter to emit near-infrared light,
and utilize near-infrared camera to obtain reflected light of near-infrared
lights, and then to display the image on front windshield display, which
forms the assist system for driving at night.
●Irradiation scope of night view system

Night view picture

Irradiation range of Irradiation range

low beam lamps of high beam lamps

As assist to driving, the image scope is from front-end of low beam to high
beam of headlights.
●Working of various devices
■Near-infrared emitter ■Near-infrared camera
Near-infrared camera

Near-infrared emitter Obtaining reflected light of near-infrared

emitter and headlights as well as
surrounding lights, and display proper
Emitting near-infrared lights invisible to black-white image according to light
human eye. intensity.
●Near-infrared emitter and headlights share
the same high beam bulb reflect sheet.

205
 Near-infrared emitter emits strong light-wave invisible to
Warning human eye, and generally does not emit when parking. To
be on the safe side, please do not watch.

206
 Night view system
Attention If the bulb thread breaks and near-infrared emitter could not be used,
please replace bulb in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.

Geneal Knowledge

Near-infrared emitter
Near-infrared emitter could not perform well with fouls on lens. Please clean it
when the fouls are obvious.
Near-infrared camera
●Near-infrared camera is arranged in the inner side of front windshield, and
image would be affected when windshield is dirty or faint, or the wiper blade
deteriorates. Furthermore, it is difficult to see clearly the images if the display
part of the front windshield display is dirty. Please clean it when the fouls are
obvious.
·Please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre if the camera
is not clear.
●Please do not press the near-infrared camera when wiping the inner side of
front windshield. If the pose of near-infrared camera changes, it could not work
well in videography. Please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Centre in case of inclination of lane position and image angle.
●Warm air model used in winter may cause condensation on the front
windshield and haze on the near-infrared camera, which would affect
videography. Now please switch on defroster to remove the haze on the
glass. (Please see another Navigation System User Manual).

Image display
Night view picture Main switch of night view system
Working indicator

< The power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working state ><the
engine is ON> press main switch of night view system and its working light is
on.
If meeting with all the following conditions, the front windshield display would
207
display images. In case of speed of lower than 30km/h, the near-infrared light
could not irradiate, so the image is in the state of lowest brightness.
●The surrounding is dim.
●The headlights are on.
When the night view system is in working, pressing its main switch could stop
working and the working light is off.
In case that the night view system is working, the night view system warning
light would be on when the near-infrared emitter or device is abnormal. (See
P172)
Geneal Knowledge

Sensor
sensor
The surrounding brightness is perceived by the
lamp control sensor, in case of putting articles or
wind screen cleanser on the sensor, it may not
perceive normally.
Display image
●The image may be dazzling in brighter
circumstances with street lamps at night.
●Person would feel that the image is vague in case of being dazzled
●Fluorescent lamp illuminating the image may flicker at times.
●Squint may occur according to the surrounding.
●The case of changing method for watching image may occur according to road
conditions and weather.

Warning Please pay attention to the following items when using the
night view system, or accident or injury may be caused.
●Please do not overly depend on the night view system.
Image scope at night is from front-end of low beam to high beam of headlights,
which is as same as general vehicles. Please drive carefully at night and confirm
the surrounding directly.
●The night view is the equipment that is assists to the driver’s vision on road
without too many turning at night
●It is difficult to watch the surrounding when image display of the night view
system is too bright, please do not make it exceed necessary brightness.
●Please do not completely depend on the night view system and abandon
common visual, for the image display could not judge the distance from
obstructions.
●Please do not stare at the night view display, or you would neglect the front.
208
Please regard it as an assist device of driving.
●The night view is the equipment that is assist to the driver to watch the
indiscernible obstruction. Not all the articles could be displayed, do please do
not watch the display continually when driving. At times the image may be dim
or part of images is indiscernible.
●It may be difficult for the night view system to discriminate images in any of
the following cases, please drive carefully.
·In bad weather like rain, fog, snow, snow storm
·The engine is start just now in cold circumstances
·Blur, fouls and condensation of front windshield before the camera and front
windshield display
·There is ice, snow and mud on the near-infrared emitter
·low voltage of battery
●Please watch the front directly, for the night view system has dead zone that
could not be displayed according to road conditions (sharp turn, up and down
ramp etc.)
●The night view system has objects (e.g.: leather jacket, characters on the
billboard, prompting information on the direction post) that are difficult to be
displayed. Please drive carefully.

209
 Night view system
Attention When there is something falling into the opening of front
windshield display, please take it out.
● When there is something falling into the
opening of front windshield display, please take
it out。In addition, please do not spill drink, or
the equipment may malfunction.
●When illuminance and irradiation state of
headlights high beam are abnormal, which may mean that the near-infrared
emitter does not work normally, please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Centre.

210
Method for using switches
Method for using lamp switches
●Method for using lamp control switch

rotating
button

Turn rotary button to AUTO, and the system would choose to use headlights and
clearance lamp automatically according to the surrounding brightness.
●The clearance lamp indicator in the instrument would be on when clearance
lamp, rear lamps and license plate light are on. (See Pl67).
●After the engine stops, open the driving seat door, and the lamp would be off
automatically. When the power switch is in IG position or the engine is started,
the lamp would be on.

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.
Lamp control sensor
●The following adjustment is allowed. Please consult FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Centre about the relevant details. · Perception degree adjustment of
being on and off of the lamp
· Time adjustment of the clearance lamp, rear lamps and license plate light
●In order to drive in the tunnel and underpass continuously, the headlights are
on and off repeatedly. When perceiving that the headlights are off, they would
be on at once and the time would be prolonged.
●Putting on articles or spraying wind screen cleanser on the sensor would cause
that the sensor could not work abnormally.

sensor

211
 Method for using switches

●Switch on and off of lamps

Auto (automatically)

Light on
Light on
Light off

rotation button

Position of rotary Lamps being on

button
clearance lamp, rear lamps, license plate light and all switch
On ①
lamps
On ② ① lamps+headlights
The lamps are on when rotary button is in On ① and On ② positions.
●The lamps are on and off automatically when rotary button is in AUTO (See P
l86).
Attention When the engine stops, capacity loss of battery would be
caused if the lamp is on for a long time, even the battery has
been completely charged.

Geneal
Working conditions
●Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in
working state. (Be used in AUTO position).
●Use of the device has nothing to do with the power supply (in ① and ②
positions).
Convenience functions
Auto-off system of lamp
●In case that the lamp switch is on AUTO or ① and ② positions, when
stopping the engine and opening the driving seat door, the lamp would be off
automatically.
●Any of the following operations would turn on the lamp again.
·When the power switch is in IG position or the engine is started
212
 ·When lamp switch is in OFF, and switch to ① and ② positions (in such case,
the lamp would not be off when opening vehicle door)
Intelligent AFS
When headlights (low beam) are on, adjusting the steering direction of the lamp
according to speed and steering quantity of steering wheel to improve the
visibility in intersection and turns.
●Use AFS OFF to stop AFS (See Pl96).

●When need to irradiate front in the distance

●Push forward the handle when the headlights

are on.
handle ●When the headlights are off, pulling back the
handle, the headlights become high beam.
●The headlights high beam indicator in the instrument would be on when the
headlights are high beam.
Method for using fog lamp

In case of bad vision in rain and fog weather, the front fog lamp
would assist to the headlights and rear fog lamp would indicate
the existence of vehicle.
●In case of good vision, use of rear fog lamp would dazzle the
vehicles at back. Please do not use if unnecessary.

●Method for using front fog lamp switch

Be on when turning to D position and be off when turning to

OFF position.
●The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument would be on
when the front fog lamp is on (See P167).
Rotating button

213
 General Knowledge

Working conditions
Be available when the clearance lamp and headlights are on.

214
 Method for using switches
●Method for using rear fog lamp switch★

When the front fog lamp is on, the rear fog lamp
would be on when turning rotary button to
position.
Rotation button ●The rear fog lamp indicator in the instrument
would be on when the rear fog lamp is on (See P167).
When the rear fog lamp is on, the rear fog lamp would be off when turning
rotary button to position.
●The rear fog lamp indicator in the instrument would be off when the rear fog
lamp is off.
General Knowledge
Working conditions
●Used when the headlights or front fog lamp is on.
●When the rear fog lamp is on，if the clearance lamp is on, the rear fog lamp
would not be off, even the headlights are off.
●When the rear fog lamp is on, the lamp switch is on OFF，if the clearance lamp
is off, the rear fog lamp would be off.
●In case that the lamp switch is on AUTO position and the rear fog lamp is on,
when stopping the engine and opening the driving seat door, the rear fog lamp
would be off.

Method for using turning indicator handle

left ●Pulling up or pressing the handle could make
the turn indicator light on right and left flicker.
Turn indicator light in the instrument would
also flicker.
right If the steering wheel returns the handle would
return automatically. If not, please turn back it by
handle
hand.
●When changing lane, during the process of pulling up or pressing the handle,

215
 the turn indicator lights would flicker and be off after hand leaves.
Geneal Knowledge

Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.
In case that the flickering is quick abnormally
It may be caused that the thread of bulb breaks. Please ensure that whether the
turn indicator light flickers or not.

Method for using wiper and door and windscreen washer

Operating handle is as shown in the left figure
Shor time work
●When in interval working (INT), the interval
Interval time (long)
Off
would be
Interval time (short) Interval working adjusted in the range of 4~13 seconds
Rotating button
Low speed working when turning
High speed working
the rotary button.
●When in short-time working (MIST), in case that the handle is in OFF,
pull up it to let the wiper work at a low speed, and the handle would return to
OFF after hand leaves.

Attention
Please ensure that whether the wiper blade clings to the
windshield.

●In case that the windshield is icing or the wiper is not used for a long time,
please ensure that whether the wiper blade clings to the windshield, or it may be
damage.
●If the wiper stops midway for snow cover, please stop the vehicle in a safe
place, set the wiper switch in OFF and power switch in ACC or OFF, and
remove snow or other obstructions to ensure its normal work.

216
 Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.
Convenience functions
Speed-sensitive interval control
Control the wiping interval according to vehicle speed when the handle is in
interval working (INT).
●High speed with short interval
Working model changes when stopping.
When the handle is working at a low speed (LO), the wiper works at low
speed in running and continues for a while after stopping the vehicle, and
then works at interval of 2.5 seconds.
●When rotary button of the handle is in shortest interval, the wiper would
continue to work at low speed after stopping the vehicle.
●When the vehicle stops, switch the handle to LO, then the wiper would work at
low speed for a while, and then works at interval of 2.5 seconds.
●The switching model could be canceled when the vehicle stops. Please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre for details.
Protection functions
The wiper is equipped with a built-in breaker with protection function. The
breaker works when the motor is overloaded constantly. The motor pauses and
the wiper could work as usual after 10 minutes when the breaker recovers.
Stop position in winter
As for vehicle used in cold circumstances, the stop position of the wiper could
be switched to stop position available in winter.
(Please see P293 about Method for switching the stop position)
●Method for spraying cleaning solution
Handle

Pull up the handle to spray the cleaning solution, and

the wiper works at a low speed.
●hand leaves the handle z. The wiper scraps for several
times and scraps again after several seconds (depending
on vehicle speed) in order to prevent leakage.

217
 Attention
Please do not use the cleaning solution in cold
circumstance, for it may affect the vision.
●Please do not use the cleaning solution in cold circumstance before the front
windshield is heating, for frozen of solution may affect the vision.
●If necessary, let the wiper work before spraying cleaning solution. For the glass
may be damaged when it is dry.
●Operating the washer switch when the solution does not spray would have a
bad impact on pump. Please check the solution volume and whether nozzle is
blocked. Please consult FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre when spraying
state aggravates for the blocked nozzle.
Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.
Oil film
When there is oil film on the glass, diffuse reflection of the light of opposite
vehicles at rain night may occur. Please clean the glass with cleaner.
Supplementing cleaning solution
Please see P312 about Supplementing cleaning solution.
Prevent leakage
Leakage resistant model of cleaning solution could be changed as follows.
Please consult FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre about the relevant details.
●Set working time as 3 seconds that has noting with the vehicle speed.
●No prevention of leakage.
Nozzle of cleaning solution
For the nozzle is arranged with the engine compartment, if there is snow cover
and leaves in the air inlet beneath the front windshield, the cleaning solution
would not spray. Please spray cleaning solution after ensuring that there is snow
cover and leaves in the nozzle.

218
 Headlight

If necessary, spray the cleaning solution on the

headlights, turn on the headlights and press
such switch.
●Ignition switch must be set in ON.
●Check the level reading on cleaning solution
storage tank of headlights.
●Fill the cleaning solution. The headlights
cleaning solution and windshield cleaning solution share one storage tank.
Please see Cleaning solution volume of windshield in P312 about details.
Attention Please do not turn on the headlights washer when cleaning
storage tank, for it may cause overheating of washer motor.

Method for using rear window defroster and rear-view mirror heater

Rear window defroster is a device that removes the fog and frost
by heating rear window with heating wire. Rear-view mirror
heater removes frost, dew and raindrop by heating rear-view
mirror.

switch

working indicator lamp

Press the switch, and it would stop working by pressing again after about 15
minutes.
●The working light is on in working.
Warning Please do not touch the rear-view mirror to avoid being burnt,
for it is hot when heating.
219
 Attention
Using for a long time in case that the engine stops would
cause capacity loss of the battery.

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.

Method for using switch of heating wire in laminated glass of

front windscreen

Heating wire in laminated glass of front windscreen is used to

heat lower part of front windshield and transverse part of driving
seat front column to prevent that the glass and wiper blade frozen
together.

Switch

Working Indicator Lamp

Press the switch, and it would stop working by pressing again after about 15
minutes.
●The working light is on in working.
220
 Warning Please do not touch the lower part of front windscreen and transverse part of
driving seat front column to avoid being burnt, for they are hot when heating

Attention Use it for long time in succession may cause capacity loss
of the battery.

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Be available when the power switch is in IG position or the engine is in working
state.

221
Method for using switch of emergency flash lamp

Used for warning other vehicles in case that the vehicle has to stop midway for
faults.

Press the switch and all the turn indicator lights

flicker and they would be off after pressing again.
●The turn indicator lights in the instrument also
flicker.
switch

Attention Please do not use for a long time when the engine stops to
avoid capacity loss of the battery.

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Its application has nothing to do with position of the power switch.

Method for using horn

Press surrounding part with sign of on the

steering wheel, the horn would sound.

Geneal Knowledge
Working conditions
Its application has nothing to do with position of the power switch.

222
 Method for using TRC※1 0FF switch

The TRC works when vehicle runs off the muddy and snow covered road, it is
difficult to improve the engine power, even treading on the accelerator pedal.
In such case, use of TRC OFF switch could improve pass rate of the vehicle.

FR car

Press the switch to change to TRC OFF model. In

TRC OFF model, press the switch again to make it
return to working state.
●In OTRC OFF model, the slip indicator in the
instrument is on. (See Pl68).

switch

Geneal Knowledge
TRC
TRC is a device used to suppress idling of driving wheel when vehicle starts
and accelerates on slippery road to keep stability and driving force of vehicle.
(Please see the relevant contents of TRC in Pl95).
Working conditions
In general, the TRC would be in working state after starting the engine.
Auto-recovery of TRC
●Change TRC OFF switch to TRC OFF model, the power disconnects (OFF)
and the TRC recover to working state automatically.
●TRC recover to working state automatically when vehicle speed is over
50km/h.

223
 ※1
Method for using AFS 0FF switch (adapting to the headlights system
automatically)

Intelligent AFS is a device that ensures the optimal distribution of

light according to various traveling state. When headlights (low
beam) are on, adjusting the steering direction of the lamp
according to speed and steering quantity of steering wheel to improve the
visibility in intersection and turns.

Press AFS OFF, and the intelligent AFS stops working,

and it would recover to working state by pressing
again.
●When stopping, the AFS OFF indicator in the
instrument is on.

Switch

Please do not use intelligent AFS in the snow covered ramp,

Attention
for the snow covered ramp may reflect the light of
headlights to affect driving.

Geneal Knowledge

Working conditions
●Intelligent AFS could be used when the power switch is in IG position or the
engine is in working state and the headlight low beam is on.
●Intelligent AFS begins to work in case of speed of over about 10km/h, and
stop working in case of speed of lower than about 10km/h.
●When turning left, the optical axis would turn left for max 5 degrees (only left
headlight)
●When turning right, the optical axis would turn right for max 15 degrees (only
right headlight)
●In case that the AFS OFF indicator flickers (See P169), intelligent AFS does

224
not work.
Working inspection
When starting the engine, the headlights are on. Check the working state of the
system. It is abnormal phenomenon.

When the gear lever is in or (any one of the sixth gear,

fifth gear and fourth gear), the vehicle could also travel at a fixed
speed (about 40km/h~100km/h) without treading on the
accelerator pedal.
●Using cruise control device
Cruise control switch

control switch

main switch

Operation
Switch display Functions
direction
- ON．OFF ·Cruise control system ON、OFF
① CANCEL ▼ ·Temporary cancellation of control model
② + RES▲ ·Return to the control state of original speed
·Increase the speed
③ - SET▼ ·Beginning to control
·Decrease the speed

●Set method
control

225
Control switch

1 Press main switch ON.

The cruise control indicator in the instrument is
on.
Main switch
Cruise control indicator (light on)

226
 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the expected speed.
3 Press the switch and then release.
The control starts according to above operation steps.

●Short acceleration and deceleration

■Wish to accelerate
Tread on the accelerator pedal.
Release the pedal to recover to the original speed.
■Wish to decelerate
Tread on the brake pedal.
Tread on the brake pedal to cancel control.

When wanting to recover to original speed, in case of

40km/h, pull up the control switch and then release.

●Method for changing the set speed

Follow the order of the 2 and 3 steps in “Set method” in P197.
Accelerate setting speed
1 Operation of control switch
●Pull up it constantly to increase set speed.
●Press it constantly to decrease set speed.
●Lightly pull up or down the switch and then release, in this
way can adjust the speed slightly. (about 1.5km/h)
lower setting speed 2 Release the control switch after reaching expected
speed.

227
●Method for canceling the control
Tread on the brake pedal to cancel control.
■ Short pause of the control

Pull the control switch handle closer.

When wanting to recover to uniform traveling state, in case
of 40km/h, pull up the control switch handle and then
release.
■When cruise control stops

Press main switch OFF.

●The cruise control indicator in the instrument is off.

●Automatic cancellation of control

The uniform traveling model would be canceled in the following cases.
●16km/h lower than the set speed
●the speed is lower than 40km/h.
●press the control switch handle in case of speed of lower than 40km/h
●the slip indicator flickers and at the same time the VSC alarm buzzer sounds
(Please see P280 about work of VSC)

●When recovering to the original control state

Recover to the original set speed by canceling control with the following
methods:
●Pull the control switch handle closer to cancel the control.
●Tread on the brake pedal to cancel control.
●Cancel control by VSC work.
In case of over 40km/h, pull up the control switch handle and
then release.
●the comprehensive information display indicates the set
image again.

228
 WarningLet the main switch in OFF when the cruise control system is
not used.
●Let the main switch in OFF when the cruise control system is not used.
Prevent the wrong work of the cruise control, or it may cause accidents.
●Please do not use the cruise control in the following cases, or it may cause
accidents.
In the heavy traffic and on roads with sharp turns:
The vehicle could not travel at the speed that suitable for the road conditions.
Traveling on icing or snow covered roads
The tire may idle, which causes steering failure.
Running down the steep hill
When running down the steep hill, for the brake performance of the engine
could not work well, it may be over the set speed.

Attention In uniform running, when the cruise control indicator

flickers, please turn off the main switch once and set again.
If it could not be set or recovers to cancellation state after
setting in above operation, this may be caused by system
faults. Though this does not affect abnormal traveling, but
it’s better to accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Centre

Geneal Knowledge
Set conditions
●The speed could be set in the range of 40~100km/h.
●The speed could not be set when the gear lever is beyond D or S (the sixth gear,
fifth gear and fourth gear.
When the engine stops
The cruise system would be off automatically.
In case of side slip
In case of side slip of the vehicle, the control would be cancelled before the
alarm of slip indicator and VSC alarm buzzer.
Engine brake
When using the cruise device, the control could be cancelled even the gear lever
is switched from to . So the engine brake fails.

If it is necessary to decelerate, please press the control switch to decelerate or

tread on the brake pedal.
Parking auxiliary monitor

229
Parking auxiliary monitor
Parking auxiliary monitor assists the driver with reversing by displaying
the image of being behind the vehicle. The image displayed on the screen is
the horizontal reverse mirror of the rear-view mirror inside the vehicle.
Parking auxiliary monitor is designed specially for reversing. When
reversing, please check the surroundings by eye. When reversing in case of
parallel parking assist model, please be careful for avoiding crashing into
obstructions, such as the parking vehicles.
Warning

●Please do not depend completely on the parking auxiliary monitor in case of

reversing. Please be sure that there is no obstruction behind the vehicle.
●Please do not watch the screen only in case of reversing, for the screen image
differs from the actual situations. The displayed distance between objects and
plane differs from it actually is. If you only watch the screen, you may crash
into some vehicle, person or article. Before reversing, please check the
surroundings by eye and rear-view mirror.
●Please do not use the system if the back door does not close completely.
●If the back part of vehicle is crashed, the position and installing angle would
be changed. Please have a check in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
●Because the camera is equipped with waterproof device, please do not take
down, decompose or modify, for this would lead to error operation.
● The system may not run abnormally in case of sharp changes of temperature,
for example, pouring hot water on the vehicle in cold weather.
●If the camera is dirty, it would not transmit clear image. Wash and wipe it with
soft cloth if there is water drop, snow or mud on the camera. In case that the
camera is awfully dirty, please use neutral cleaning agent.
● The camera must not be adhered with organic solvent, auto wax, cleaning
agent and glass coating. If there is, please remove them at once.
●When the outside temperature is too low, the displayed image may be dim and
the dynamic image may deform or could be seen completely. Now please watch
the surroundings personally. Before reversing, please check the surroundings by
eye and rear-view mirror.

Attention
The system couldn’t be used in the following cases:

●On the frozen, slippery or snow covered road.

230
●When using skid chain or spare tire.

Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre when replacing
the tire, the guide line position on the screen may change in case of tire
replacing.

●Screen display
The image displays on the screen horizontally.

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

Bumper corner
●The scope that the camera could detect is limited, and it could not detect the
articles around any corner of bumper and beneath the bumper.

The screen display may change

according to the state of vehicle and
road conditions.

231
 Park assist system camera

●As shown in the figure, park assist system camera is arranged on the trunk lid
●Park assist system camera uses the special camera. The distance shown on the
screen is different from the actual distance.
●It may be difficult to watch clearly the images on the screen in the following
cases, but these are not of faults.
·In the dark (e.g. at night)
·When the temperature around the camera is too high or low.
·When there is water on the camera or the camera is highly wet (e.g. in
raining)
·When there is something adhering to the camera (e.g. mud)
·When the camera is scratched or dirty
·When the sun or the headlights irradiate on the camera

If the camera is affected by glare (e.g.

sunlight reflected by vehicle body),
especially the CCD camera, the stain
effect may occur.
Please check surrounding
conditions for your safety.
*:Stain effect——the phenomenon happens in case that the camera is affected
by glare (e.g. sunlight reflected by vehicle body); there seems a longitudinal
streak in the image transmitted by the camera.

232
 Operation in parking

The guidance is provided only as an example. When parking, the time and
way of rotating steering wheel would change according to the traffic
conditions, road conditions and vehicle state.
User should have a good knowledge of the above contents. When parking,
please check whether the space is enough.
The guide line displayed on the screen would change
Attention according to the vehicle state (the number of passengers and
luggage etc.). Be sure to observe the conditions behind and
around vehicle by eye before operation.

Display Park assist system

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
Turn on the ignition switch and set the transmission at R gear to activate the
Park assist system.
●If the transmission is moved from R gear, the Park assist system would be
cancelled.
●If the transmission is at R gear, even though press any model button (e.g.
“MAP/VOICE” or “INF0”) around display, the screen would always switch to
this model.
● Park assist system model
Park assist system has the following three models which could be chosen
according to need.

Planned route guide line model

The screen displays guide lines of
planned route.
1 Guide line of vehicle width scope
Please check surrounding These lines indicate the estimated
conditions for your safety.
vehicle width scope.

233
2 Guide lines of planned route distance
This line indicates the position that is 50cm behind the rear bumper, and moves
according to operation of steering wheel.
3 Guide lines of planned route
These lines indicate the designed route when vehicle reverses, and move
according to operation of steering wheel.
4 Guide lines of planned route distance
This line indicates the position that is 100cm behind the rear bumper, and moves
according to operation of steering wheel.
5 Parallel parking assist model switch
Touch the switch to begin the Parallel parking assist model.
6 Guide lines of distance
This line indicates the position that is 50cm behind the rear bumper.
7 Selection switch of guide line
Touch the switch to choose or close the guide line
Please see “Planned route guide line model” about relevant details.

Parking assist guide line model

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
The screen displays parking assist guide lines。
1 Guide line of vehicle width scope
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle width scope.
2 Parking assist guide line
These lines indicate position of rotating the steering wheel.
3 Guide lines of distance
This line indicates the position that is 50cm behind the rear bumper.
4 Parallel parking assist model switch
Touch the switch to begin the Parallel parking assist model.
5 Selection switch of guide line

234
Touch the switch to choose or close the guide line
Please see “Parking assist guide line model” about relevant details.

Parallel parking assist model

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
Guide line mode switch
This model is displayed by the screen to assist the driver with parallel parking.
Guide line model switch:
Touch this switch to begin the guide line model (Planned route guide line model
or Parking assist guide line model). Please see “Parallel parking assist model”
about relevant details.

235
 Driving tips

There would be differences between guide line displayed on the screen and
actual distance/traveling route under any of the following cases:

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

●When the steep behind the vehicle increases sharply, the article seems to be
father than it actually is.

236
On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

●When the steep behind the vehicle decreases sharply, the article seems to be
nearer than it actually is.

●When any part of the vehicle sinks because of passenger or load distribution,
there would be differences between guide line displayed on the screen and
actual distance/traveling route

237
 About 50

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

The distance between the dimensional article (e.g. vehicle) and plane (e.g.
road) displayed on the screen is different from it actually is, which is as
noted as follows:
●In fact, A=B<C (A is as far as B; C is farther than A and B). However, in such
case, the screen would display as B<C<A.
●The screen displays a truck is parking in a place 50cm far. However, in fact, if
the vehicle reverses to point B, it would knock the truck.

238
 Planned route guide line model

Example for using the system when parking (Parking in a row)

Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

The following example describes the steps for driving in the left parking place.
If driving in the right parking place, replace left with right, and other steps
are same.
1 Set the transmission at R gear. If the system is not in this model, touch the
selection switch of guide line or guide line model switch on the screen.
2 Watch the screen and rear-view mirror to reverse the vehicle into the
parking place.

239
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
3 Reverse slowly and rotate the steering wheel to control the planned route
guide line within the parking place.

240
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

Same distance
4 When the rear part of the vehicle gets into the parking place, rotate the
steering wheel to let the edge line of parking place displayed on the lower
part of screen be nearly equal to the guide line of vehicle width scope of
left and right sides.
Though from the screen it seems that the guide line of distance nearly
parallels with the rear edge of the parking place, however, they may not
parallel actually.

241
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
5 When the guide line of vehicle width scope parallels with the edge line of
the parking place, grasp straightly the steering wheel and reverse slowly.

242
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

When parking places are divided by only a line, even though the guide line
of vehicle width scope parallels with right (left) edge of the parking place
which is displayed on the screen, however, they may not parallel actually.

243
Parking assist guide line model

● Example for using the system when parking (parking in a row)

Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

The following example describes the steps for driving in the left parking place.
If driving in the right parking place, replace left with right, and other steps
are same.
1 Set the transmission at R gear. If the system is not in this model, touch the
selection switch of guide line or guide lien model switch on the screen.
2 Watch the screen and rear-view mirror to reverse the vehicle into the
parking place.

244
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

3 Reverse until the parking assist guide line reaches the edges of the
parking place. When stops the vehicle, rotate the steering wheel right to
reverse.
Position of rotating the steering wheel depends on the width of parking
place.

245
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

4 When the vehicle is in the parking place, rotate the steering wheel to let
the guide line of vehicle width scope be equal to the clearance of parking
place, and reverse slowly.

246
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

5 Rotate the steering wheel, when the guide line of vehicle width scope
parallels with the edge line of the parking place, grasp straightly the
steering wheel and reverse slowly.
Though from the screen it seems that the guide line of distance nearly
parallels with the rear edge of the parking place, however, they may not
parallel actually.

247
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
When parking places are divided by only a line, even though the guide line
of vehicle width scope parallels with right (left) edge of the parking place
which is displayed on the screen, however, they may not parallel actually.

248
●Example for using the system when parking (Parallel parking)
Example for using the system when parking (Parallel parking)
Actual position

required parking location

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

The following example describes the steps for driving in the right parking place.
If driving in the left parking place, replace right with left, and other steps are
same.
1 Set the transmission at R gear.
2 Reverse until the parking assist guide line reaches the edges of the
parking place. When stops the vehicle, rotate the steering wheel left to
reverse slowly.

249
3 When the vehicle parallels with the road shoulder, grasp straightly the
steering wheel and reverse slowly

Attention Reverse slowly and watch carefully the front to prevent the
front part of the vehicle crashing into the front vehicles.

250
 Parallel parking assist model
Parallel parking assist model is
displayed by the screen to assist the driver with parallel parking.

Attention ●The steering wheel only could be rotated when vehicle

stops.
●Please do not use the system in the following cases: on the
frozen, slippery and snow covered road. When using skid
chain or spare tire.
On the rugged or winding roads, such as crooked or
banked roads.

The following example describes the steps for driving in the right parking place.
If driving in the left parking place, replace right with left, and other steps are
same.

Actual position

required parking location

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.
251
1 Stop the vehicle in a place where the vehicle parallels with the road or
road shoulder and 1m far from the parking place, as well half of vehicle
length before the parking place. Set the transmission at R gear. If the
system is not in this model, touch the selection switch of guide line or guide
lien model switch on the screen.

Actual position

green vertical line

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

252
 Actual location

green profile

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

3 The screen would display a green outline.

253
 actual location

Extended green vertical

line

on the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

4 When the vehicle stops, rotate the steering wheel. Now the green
outline would move to the place where the vehicle is, and there would be
an outspread green line. Let the outspread green line locate at the right
side of the vehicle rear tire.
The steering wheel only could be rotated when vehicle stops.

254
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

When positioning the green outline in the parking place, be

Attention sure that the outspread green line does not cross the tire of
front parking vehicle. If the outspread green line crosses the
tire of front parking vehicle, it must be adjusted.

255
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

Attention Be sure to check whether there is obstruction within the

green outline. If there is, the parallel parking assist model
could not be used.

256
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

Attention The parallel parking assist model could not be used, when
the parking vehicle in front of the parking place is in the
road shoulder or does not parallel with the road.

If the outline turns red and the display

information is shown as in the figure, it
means that the assist system does not
Steering wheel is over
steered, please steer back. work, please rotate the steering wheel
to the original position.
Please check surrounding
conditions for your safety.
257
 The information shown in the figure
may also be displayed, even though
Steering wheel is over steered, please the outline is positioned in the normal
steer back.
parking place. In such case, the
Please check surrounding vehicle may be far away from the road
conditions for your safety.
shoulder. Check whether the distance
between the vehicle and the parking vehicle in front is about 1m.

Attention
Make sure that the front angle of the vehicle does not crash
into obstructions and reverse slowly.

258
 Actual Location

green vertical line

on the screen

Please check surrounding conditions

for your safety.

5 After positioning the outspread green line, keep it in the same direction
with the vehicle, check the surrounding and then reverse. The screen
would display green curves.
The steering wheel must be kept as it originally is when reversing.

259
●Under above cases, there is no vehicle parking in front of the parking place. If
parking the vehicle from the road shoulder, the screen would keep the same
even though the vehicle moves. In such case, the positioning of the vehicle
should be away from the road shoulder and then park the vehicle.

260
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

6 Keep the steering wheel at the same position until the green curve reaches
the left edge of the parking place. Check the surroundings of the vehicle
in case of reversing.
Keep the steering wheel as it originally is when reversing.
7 Reverse until the green curve reaches the edge of the required parking
place.
8 When parking, rotate the steering wheel in inverse direction, the screen
would change.
The steering wheel only could be rotated when vehicle stops.

261
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

9 Keep the steering wheel at the same position and check the surroundings
of the vehicle in case of reversing.
Keep the steering wheel as it originally is when reversing.

262
Attention Make sure that the front angle of the vehicle does not crash
into obstructions and reverse slowly.

263
Actual position

On the screen

Please check surrounding

conditions for your safety.

10 Please refer to the guide lines when the vehicle parallels with the road or
road shoulder. Reverse slowly and make sure to watch the surroundings
of the vehicle by rear-view mirror and eye.
Please refer to the “Driving tips” in this chapter about details of guide
line of distance.
11 Please stop the vehicle when in the required parking place.
If the power of steering system interrupts,
the display would be as the left figure.
Please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service center.

Invalid Navigation

264
 System initialization

System is initializing help

Guide mode switch

When the battery breaks and connects again or the performance of the battery
decreases, information and guiding model of “System initialization” would be
displayed on the screen. In such case, the Planned route guide line model or
Parallel parking assist model are not available. Any of the following methods
could be used to regulate the system:
● When the vehicle stops, rotate the steering wheel to left and then to right. (It is
available whichever direction is the first)
● Drive for at least five minutes on the road with few turns and light traffic.
● The regulation is finished when the screen recovers to initial state.
● If the above screen has no change, please accept check in FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service Centre.

Help The method for regulating the system is

Run any of the following operation, the
y e l l o w g u i d e l i n e w i l l a p p e a r displayed on the screen. Press the guide
Driving for 5 minutes Turn the steering wheel to the left
and right limit model switch to display them. Press the
“Agree” to return to the last model.
Method for using the vehicle equipment
agree

265
Using Method of Vehicle Equipment 3
Using Method of Vehicle Equipment……………………………..……….267
Sun Visor……………………………………………….…………...….267
Headlamp……………………………………………………………….268
Reading Lamp (NNJ type)…………………………………..…………270
Sundries box in Rear Seat…………………………………………..….270
Sundries box…………………………………………………….….…..270
Sundries box at Auxiliary Instrument Panel………………………..…..272
Coin Box …………………………………………………………..…..273
Open Close Front Door Bag ……………………………………….…..273
Clock………………………………………………….…………...……273
Power Plugs………………………………………………………..…...274
Door Light………………………………………………………………276
Ash Tray…………………………………………………………..…….276
Cigarette lighter…………………………………………………………277
Clothes Hooks…………………………………………………..………277
Refrigerator……………………………………………………….…….279
Cup Holder……………………………………………………….……..280
Sundries box at the Trunk ……………………………………….……..281
Rear Sunshade……………………………………………………..........282
Inlet Lighting System …………………………………………..………284
Luggage Net……………………………………………………..………286
Audio System ……………………………………………………………….288
Reference……………………………………………………………….288
Use Audio System………………………………………………………288
RSE (Rear Seat Entertainment System)………………………………...298

266
 Using Method of Vehicle Equipment
Sun Visor

Use when the sunshine brightly and sting your eyes.

■Driver’s Seat· Front-passenger Seat

Turn the sun visor above the driver’s seat and

Front-passen
front-passenger seat over, and use it.
ger Seat

General Knowledge

Convenient Function
Vanity Mirrors

Inside of the sun visor of the driver’s

seat and front-passenger seat, there are
vanity mirrors. Open it to use.
Vanity mirror

Mirror Cover

Ticket clip.
Ticket clip is on the sun visor of the driver’s seat,
it can be used to store objects such as tickets, etc.

Tickets, etc.

267
 Headlamp
Lighting around the
Spot light switch
Selector Lever

Interior Lamp Switch

●Headlamp
●When the headlamp switch is in ON, light up.
●When the headlamp switch is in OFF, light off.
●When the headlamp switch is in DOOR, open any vehicle door, the light is on.
See P252 “Inlet Lighting System” for relevant details.
●Spot Light
Press spot light switch, the lamp on the pressed side will light up, press again
and light off.
●Lighting around the Selector Lever
Illuminate surrounding areas of the selector lever.
● Rotate the adjusting button of the instrument brightness (refer to P165) in
counter clock direction to the end, the lamp will light off.

Attention To prevent capacity loss of battery, don’t light for longtime

when the engine stops.

General Knowledge

Working Condition
●The use of headlamp and spot light is unrelated with the power switch.
●When the power switch is in ACC, IG position, or the engine is working, the
illuminating lamp of the selector lever lights up.
Headlamp

268
When the headlamp switch is in DOOR the lamp lights up, but it will light off
immediately in the following circumstances.
●Close all the doors, and set the power switch in IG position or start the engine.
●Set the power switch in ACC, IG position or the engine is working, close all
the doors.
●Close all the doors and lock them.

269
Reading lamp (NNJ type)

Switch
●When open the rear door, the lamp beside the rear
Warning
door lights up, and lights off when close it.
●While in close door state, press the switch the lamp
lights up and press again it lights off.
●Press the lamp socket to adjust the direction of the
light.
●The function of linkage lighting of rear doors can be released, please contact
with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre for details.
To prevent capacity loss of battery, don’t light for longtime when the engine
stops.
General Knowledge

Working Condition
The using of reading lamp is unrelated with the power switch.
Sundries box in Rear Seat
Handle

When use it, push down the armrest and lift up the handle, and then open it.
●When you close the cover, you have to confirm there is a ticking sound, and
close tightly.
●When you restore the armrest, please make sure the cover was closed tightly.

Don’t drive while the sundries box of the rear seat is open.
Warning When the vehicle comes to an emergency brake, the objects
in the box may fly out and cause accident.

270
 Sundries box

unlock

lock handle

Sundries box
●Method of Open and Close
Lift up the handle and open the cover.
●close the cover, you have to confirm there is a ticking sound, so as to close
tightly.
●Method of Lock and Unlock
Insert the key, rotate and pull it out.
●Operate with mechanical key to lock and unlock.

Warning
Please don’t drive while the sundries box is open. When the
vehicle comes to an emergency brake, the objects in the sundries
box may fly out and cause accident.

General Knowledge

Convenient Function
Sundries Box Lamp
When the lamp control switch is ON, the small lamp in the sundries box will
light up.

271
 Sundries box at Auxiliary Instrument Panel

●Open Method of the Cover

Cover The cover of sundries box at auxiliary
instrument panel have two kinds of state:
Lower Pallet semi-open and complete open.
●Use when it is in semi-open state, lift up
handle and slide the cover to the lock
Handle
position.

Handle

●When you need to have it in complete open state,

lift up the handle and open the semi-open cover
completely.

●Using Method of the Pallet

Two pallets: the upper pallet and the lower pallet.

●The lower pallet can take out.

Upper Pallet

Lower Pallet

272
 Coin Box

Press the button and open it.

Button

Don’t drive while the box is open. When the vehicle comes to
Warning and emergency brake, the objects in the box will fly out easily
and cause accident.

General Knowledg
Coin Box card
You can put card over the coin box.
●After you put the card over it, and when you
open the coin box, the card will pop out which is
quite convenient.

Open Close Front Door Bag

The cover can open and close.

●It located at the door of driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat.

Cover

Time

Please see “User Manual of Navigation System” for

the setting method for clock.

273
 Power Plugs

The power plugs used for vehicle electric parts.

■Front
It locates on the sundries box (lower part of the box)
Power plug of the auxiliary instrument panel, open it when use.

Cover

■Back
It locates on the sundries box of the rear seat,
open it when use.
Power plug

Cover

Attention
When you don’t use the power plug, please close the cover
of it.

●hen you don’t use the power plug, please close the cover of it. If foreign object
or beverage was in it carelessly, it may go wrong or cause short circuit.
●While the engine stops, and use it for long period of time, the battery may lose
capacity. Moreover, if use it while the engine is working, the battery will also
lose capacity.

General Knowledge
Power Plugs
●The voltage used for electric parts in the vehicle shall be DC l2V, total voltage

274
shall no more than 10A (Maximum power is l20W).
●If you use electric parts that are more than rated capacity, it may blow your
vehicle fuse.
Working Condition
It can be used when the power switch is in ACC, IG position, or when the
engine is working.

275
 Door Light

The door light lights up when open the door and

off when close the door of the vehicle.

To prevent the capacity loss of the battery, while the engine is not working
please don’t leave the vehicle door open in a long period of time to protect it
from electricity consumption.

Common Sense

Wworking Condition
It has nothing to do with the power switch when use it.

Ashtray
●Front Seat Use

Press the cover and open the ashtray.

●Take it out directly.
Rear seat use

Ashtray

●Front Seat Use

Grasp the handle to open it.

●Take it out directly.
Handle
For fire protection, please obey the following things:
Please put the match, and cigarette butt to the ashtray until they are
Warning
completely went out, and make sure put them in place.
Don’t put any inflammable objects such as paper scrap into the ashtray.

276
 Cigarette lighter

Press the cover and open it.

Cover ●Press the cigarette lighter and let go of your hand.
Restore to its original place, it can be used.

Cigarette Lighter

Attention
Please don’t touch the metal area of the cigarette lighter.

●Please don’t touch the metal area of the cigarette lighter. Otherwise you may
burn yourself.
●To prevent the cigarette lighter from failure or burn things around, please
follow the following things:
·Please don’t press the cigarette lighter all along.
·Please don’t insert cigarette lighters of other vehicles to it. The cigarette lighter
plugs shall not be used as power supply for the electric products other than
original product of FAW. After using and if you plug it into the cigarette lighter,
it may pop out, and you even cannot take it out.
general knowledge

Working Condition
It can be used when the power switch is in ACC, IG position, or the engine is
working.

Clothes Hooks
No skylight Have skylight

clothes hooks
clothes hooks

There are clothes hooks on the auxiliary handles of the rear seats.

277
 Please don’t hang clothes hangers, heavy object or swinging
object on the clothes hooks. When you hang your clothes,
Warning Please don’t use any hangers, hang the clothes directly on the
clothes hooks.
When the SRS air bag expand, the above object may split out

278
 Refrigerator ★

when the back side air conditioning is working, it can be used as

refrigerator.。
Turn off the cold air filter and it can be used as sundries box (it may
have some cold air coming in).

1 Turn down the backrest of the rear middle seat.

2 Push the handle and open the cover.

handle

Don’t drive while the cover of refrigerator is open. When the vehicle comes to an
emergency brake, the objects in the vehicle may fly out and cause accident.
General Knowledge
Things related with refrigerator
●In order to make the refrigerator have the cold storage function, please set the
air conditioning switch at LO A/C or HI A/C position when use it. When use it at
AUTO position, for the refrigerator have the function of self-adjustment, it may
cause stopping of the back air conditioning, and affect the refrigeration function.
●refrigerator is mainly used to store canned cold air
filter cover
beverage, please don’t put any fresh food or
flavored food.
Use as sundries box Off On
Turn off the cover of cold air filter. side of trunk

279
 Cup Holder

●Use in front seat

Push down the cover to use.
●Take off the barrier you can use it as storage
box. Lift it up and you can take it off.

barrier

cover
●Use in back seat

It locates in the armrest of the rear seat.

●Push down the cover to use.

Cover
Warning
When use it, you need to notice the following things:

●When you use it as cup holder, please don’t put any containers other than cup
and beverage can. Furthermore, please overlap cup holders when you finished
using them.
●When you use the front cup holder as sundries box, please don’t drive while the
cover is open. When the vehicle comes to an emergency brake, or collide with
others the objects in the box may easy to fly out and hurt passengers.

Attention
When use it, you need to notice the following things:

●To prevent the cup holders from damage, please don’t put your cell phone in it or put your
foot on it.
●After you take off the barrier of the cup holder in the front seat, it cannot be used as cup
holder any more.

280
 Sundries Box in the Trunk

There are sundries box in the trunk which can be used to store
objects such as small objects and warning triangle, etc.

Storage box in the

trunk

can store warning triangle

There is a storage box under the cushion of the trunk.

General Knowledge
Things related with storing warning triangle
Sometimes the warning triangle can not put into the storage box according to the
size and shape of it.

281
 Rear Sunshade★

Use it when the sunlight is dazzling.

●Using method of rear sunshade (manual)

hook
First, grab the handle and hang
the sunshade on the hook.
●Restore the sunshade like left
Rear sunshade (manual)
picture, take the sunshade from
the hook and it will take back
handle automatically.

●Using method of electric rear sunshade

electric rear sunshade

Front switch Back switch

Switch

Switch

Each time you press the switch the electric sunshade will rise or descend.
●In the process of using it, when the selector lever is in position, the
sunshade will descend automatically.

282
 Warning Please don’t touch the rear sunshade with your hand, when you
restore it back, it is easy to involving into weaving product, and
may cause accident.

Attention
Nothing can enter into the opening space of the rear
sunshade.
●Nothing can enter into the opening space (storage slot for sunshade) of the rear
sunshade. Otherwise it can be hanged by the sunshade, even cause damage.
●Don’t hang any thing on the rear sunshade, and you cannot draw the objects on
the hook by force, otherwise the sunshade may be damaged.
●Please don’t put any heavy objects on the board under the window, or the
electric rear sunshade may go wrong.
●When you operate the electric rear sunshade, please abide by the following rules,
or it may cause failure.
·Please don’t operate the front switch and the back switch simultaneously.
·Please don’t draw the rear sunshade or the hooks by force. You may deform the
rear sunshade, or cause malfunction of it.
·In the process of the operation, if the rear sunshade stops in the middle, please
make sure whether your hand have leave the switch, or the objects on it affect the
normal function.
·Frequent operation of the sunshade may cause temporary stopping of it, and not
out of failure.
Once you hand left the switch, push the switch after a period of time.

General Knowledge
Working Condition
It can be used when the power switch is in ACC, IG position, or when the engine
is working.

283
 Inlet Lighting System

The lighting lamp of all parts will conduct adapting lighting up

and lighting off according to the unlocked and lock of the door,
switch of the door, power condition and the difference of the
selector lever.

●Inlet Lighting System

Headlamp (when the switch of
interior lamp is in DOOR
position)

Keyhole lamp footlight

General Knowledge
Alteration and adjustment of the inlet lighting system
You can do the following adjustment, please contact with FAW sale shop for
relevant details.
●Change time of consecutive lighting.
●Alter the “light on – light diminish” to “light on – light off” or release lighting
of footlight.
●Release functions of footlight and lighting around selector lever.
●When the release power is in OFF position, the function of interior lamp of inlet
lighting system.
●Release the lighting mode when unlock.
284
●Working Method
The following condition is the condition which satisfies one condition only.
Actually, there may have numerous conditions hold, so it may not coincide with
the following conditions.

①·② ③

Door When open some Light off→ Light off→

lock →vehicle door Light on about 15 Light on about 15
seconds seconds
When all locked Light on→Light off Light on→Light off
Door When open some Light off→Light on Light off→Light on
→vehicle door
When close all doors Light on→ Light on→
Light off about 15 Light off about 15
seconds later seconds later
Power OFF—ACC Light on→Light off Light on→Light off
conditi ACC—IG Original state Light off→Light on
on Engine is working or Light off→ Original state
in IG—OFF state Light on about 15
seconds

Locatio
Shift from gear Original state Light on→
n of
to gears other Light on under dark
selector
than gear light
lever

Rotate button of light adjusting of instrument (refer to P165) in counter clockwise

direction to the end and the lamp is off.

285
 Luggage Net

You can use the luggage fastening button, fastening clips in the
trunk to fix different kinds of object.

Fastening Fastening button

button Fastening
clip

●Method for fix object on the floor of the trunk

Luggage button At the four corners of the trunk, there are
Fix tool luggage fastening buttons.
●Draw the fastening clip backward, you can
fix object.

Luggage net fixing

button

● Method for fix object after trunk is full

Fastening
Fastening clip
clip 1 There are 2 fastening clips in the luggage net of
the trunk.
2 Hang luggage net fastening clip on the hook of
the net.

Fix tool

Luggage net fixing button

Attention When you don’t use the luggage net, please take them
carefully.

286
●When you don’t use the luggage net please take them carefully. Pay attention
not to entwine your fingers, which may cause accident.
●Don’t put any sharp or heavy objects in the luggage net to prevent breage of the
net.

287
 Audio System★
Reference

AM/FM radio/cassette tape recorder/CD player

with converter

Use of Audio System

●Foundation Part
This chapter would illustrate some fundamental performances of the audio
system of FAW cars, and some of the illustration may has nothing to do with the
audio system of this vehicle.
Set the ignition switch on ACC or ON position, the audio system can start work.
On and off of the system
●Press “VOL·POWER” button to turn on and turn off the audio system.
●Press “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” buttons to turn on these functions without
pressing “VOL· POWER” button.
●Turn on the corresponding player by inserting cassette or CD.
●Turn off the corresponding player by pop up of cassette or CD. If the audio
system is turned off in advance, the whole audio system would be turned off in
case of pop up of cassette or CD. In case of operation of other function in prior,
the system would return to operation of this function.
Swithover of functions
●If the system is in ON, press any of “AM", “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” buttons
to switch from one function to another.
Tone and Balance
●Please refer to the relevant illustration of the system about the details of tone
and balance controller of the audio system.
Tone
●The effect of the audio programs depends greatly on the mixture of treble,
middle and bass. In fact, the good audio effect of the musical and vocal programs
obtained by different mixture of treble, middle and bass.
Balance

288
●It is also important to keep the good balance between LEFT & RIGHT Stereo
Channels and Front & Rear.
●Please note that changing of the balance between left and right audios, in case
of stereophonic cassette or broadcast, would increase volume of some two groups
and decrease volume of another group.
Radio Antenna
●The antenna is arranged in the inner side of the rear door glass.

289
 Attention Sticking films (especially the conductor or metal) on the rear
door glass would decrease the radio sensitivity obviously.
Cassette Player
●When inserting the cassette, the outer side of the cassette should be rightward.
Attention Except the cassette, any part of the player should not be filled
with fuel. Nothing should be inserted into the cassette slot, or
the player may be damaged.
CD Player equipped with converter
●When inserting the CD, push it slightly and the side with labels should be
upward.
●The player plays CDs from the No.1 CDm, and the current CD No., play No.
and beginning time are shown on the display screen.
●When the first CD is finished, the player would play the first play of the next
CD. When the last CD is finished, the player would play the first CD again.
●The player would jump over any nonexistent CD No.
●The player could only play the CD of 12m.

Don’t insert two pieces of CD that are folded together, or it

Attention will destroy the CD converter. Insert one CD once only.
Never disassemble or lubricate any part of the CD player.
Don’t insert anything other than CD.

290
●Controller and Functions

■Details of specific buttons, controller and their functions are illustrated

alphabetically as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6(Default button)
●The buttons are used to preset and tune the radio.
●Preset a transmitter on a button: tune in the required transmitter (Please see
“TUNE" or “SEEK. TRACK"). Press the button until beeps——in this way could
set the transmitter on the button. The display would show the button number.
●Tune in a preset transmitter: Press the button of the required transmitter The
display would show the button number and frequency of the station.
●These systems could realize that each button could store one AM and two FM
stations (In case of pressing “AM” or “FM’’, the display would show “AM”,
“FM1” or “FM2"). If the power is cut (the battery thread breaks or the fuse
blows out).
▲(Pop-up button)
Cassette player
●Press this button and the cassette would pop up.

291
CD Player
●Press this button and a CD or all CDs would pop up.
●Press and release the pop-up button, the current CD would pop up.
●Press either side of the “CH/DISC” button until the No. of required CD is
displayed, then the CD would pop up. Press and release the pop-up button.
●Press the pop-up button until beeps, the CD would pop up. The first to pop up is
the last CD before pressing this button. The pop-up function would be canceled if
the pop-up CD is not taken for a long time.
／ (FF/REW button)
Cassette player
●Press (Preset button 6) to fast forward the cassette. The display shows “FF”.
Press “ ” (Preset button 5) to rewind the cassette. The display shows “REW”.
●Press “ ”(Preset button 6) to stop FF; press “ ”(Preset button 5) to stop
REW.
●If the REW is finished, the cassette player would stop to play the current side. If
the FF is finished, the cassette player would play the other side by auto-reverse
function.
CD Player
●Press “ ”(Preset button 6) or “ ”(Preset button 5) to FF or REW a CD.
The CD player would continue to play after releasing the button.
ACS(Tone and Balance)
●This button is designed to set tone and balance, which is used to switch between
the following five models:
·VOCAL
·ROCK
·JAZZ
·CLASSIC
·ACS off
●The display shows the current set.
●When the “ASS” is off, the “AUDl0/CONT” button could be used to set the
bass, middle and treble. (Please see “AUDl0/CONT”)
AM
●Press “AM” button to turn on the radio and select AM bands. The display shows
“AM”.
●If the audio system is off, press “AM” to turn on the radio. It is all right that
swith operation of cassette player or CD player to “AM”.
ASL (Automatic sound leveler)
292
●When the audio is hard to hear clearly because of the noise on the road and wind, the
system would set the optimum volume and tone according to the noise level in driving.
Press “ ASL” and the display would show “ASL”, and press again to cancel this function.
AUDIO CONT(Tone and Audio balance function)
●Each press on “AUDl0/CONT” button would change the model. Press either
side of “AUDl0/CONT” button to regulate the tone and balance.
● BAS: setting the bass tone. The scope on the display is -5 to 5.
● MID: setting the middle tone. The scope on the display is -5 to 5.
● TRE: setting the treble tone. The scope on the display is -5 to 5.
● FAD: setting the audio balance between the front and rear loudspeakers. The
scope on the display is F7 to R7.
● BAL: setting the audio balance between the left and right loudspeakers. The
scope on the display is L7 to R7.
CH/DISC (Changing procedure/CD)
Cassette player
●Press either side of this button to choose the other side of the cassette. The
display shows the current side(“▲” A Side, “▼” B Side).
●Auto-reverse function: the cassette player would reverse automatically to play
the other side when playing to the end, whether the cassette is in playing or
FF.
CD Player
●This button is used to choose the required CD.
●Press either side of this button until the required CD No. is shown on the
display.
DISC(CD)
●Press “DISC” to switch from radio or cassette model to CD model, if the audio
system is off, press “DISC” button to turn on the CD player. However, the
precondition for the both operations is to put CDs in the player beforehand.
●If the audio is set at the CD player model, the display shows the current playing
and CD No.
●The audio system would display any of the following three error information in
case of player faults:
·If it displays “Error”, meaning that the CD is dirty, damaged or upside down.
Clean the CD or insert correctly.
·If it displays “ERROR3” or “ERROR4”, meaning that inner of the system
malfunctions.
·If the faults are not canceled, please send the vehicle to FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service Centre.
Doll by B N R*
293
●If use the tape recorded by Dolby B noise reduction system, press
“ "(preset button 3) bytton, the display shows “ ”, and press again to turn
off the Dolby BNR.
●Dolby noise reduction system could reduce the noise of the tape about l0dB. In
order to get the optimum audio effect, use or turn off this button according
to recording way of the tape.
*: Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured by authority of Dolby Company,
“DOLBY” and sign of double D “ ” is the registered mark of Dolby Company.
FM
●Press “FM” button to turn on the radio and select FM bands. The display shows
“FM”.
●If the audio system is off, press “FM” to turn on the radio. It is all right that
swith operation of cassette player or CD player to “FM”。
LOAD
●This button is used to insert CDs in the player with at most 6 CDs.
●If there is only one CD need to insert, press this button and release quickly.
Insert the CD when indicators on both sides of the CD slot turn green, and the
door would close after inserting.
●The door would close in 15 seconds in case of no inserting.
●If there are several CDs need to insert, press this button constantly (from the
starting of the audio system until beeps). Insert the first CD when indicators
on both sides of the CD slot turn green, and the door would close after
inserting. The door would open automatically in several seconds, and insert
the next CD when indicators on both sides of the CD slot turn green. Insert
other CDs in the same way.
●The door would close in 15 seconds in case of no inserting.
MUTE
●Press “MUTE” for temporary silence. Press this button again to recover to the
original volume.
POS (Position selector)
●This button is used to select the listening position and switch among the
following four positions:
·All seats
·Driving seat
·Front seats
·Rear seats
The display shows the current model in head shaped mark.
RAND(Random)
●Press “RAND” (Preset button 1) to listen to the play at random, and the display
294
shows “RAND·”. Press the button again to turn off the function.
●Two random functions——not only listen to the plays of all the CDs but also
the specific CDs at random.
●Random playing of the CD plays:
Press and release the “RAND” (Preset button 1) quickly and the display shows
“RAND”. The current CD begins to play at random. If there are beeps, meaning
that pressing the button for too long time, and the player would play all the
playing on the CD. Press the “RAND” (Preset button 1) again to turn off the
function.
● Random playing of the plays on all the CDs in the slots:
Press the button “RAND” (Preset button 1) until beeps. The display shows
“ RAND”, and the player would play the plays on all the CDs in the slots. Press
the “RAND” (Preset button 1) again to turn off the function.
RPT(Repeat)
Cassette player
●Press “RPT"(Preset button 2) in playing and the display shows “RPT”. When
finishing, the player would rewind automatically and play again. This process
would continue until pressing the button again to turn off the function.
●There should be blank of three seconds between plays if the repeat function is
normal. CD player
●Two repeat function——not only plays one play on the CD repeatedly but also all
the plays.
·Playing one play repeatedly:
Press and release the “RPT” (Preset button 2) quickly in playing process and
the display shows “RPT”.
·Playing one play repeatedly:
Press the button “RPT” (Preset button 2) until beeps and the display shows
“RPT”. The player would play all the plays on the current CD repeatedly,
and recover to play the first play on the current CD repeatedly again.
Pressing this button again to turn off the function.
SCAN
Radio
●not only scans all the frequencies on one band, but also scans the preset
transmitter on this band.
●Scanning the preset transmitter
Press “SCAN” button until beeps. The radio would tune in the next preset
transmitter on the band and move to the next preset one in 5 seconds. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
295
●Scanning all the frequencies:
Press and release the “SCAN” button quickly. The radio would tune in the next
preset transmitter on the band and move to the next preset one in 5 seconds. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
CD Player
●Two scanning functions——not only scans the plays on the specific CD, but
also the first play of each CD in the slots.
·Scanning plays on the CD:
Press and release the “SCAN” button quickly and the display shows
“SCAN”, and now the player is scanning all the plays on the CD. If there
are beeps, meaning that pressing the button for too long time, and the
player would scan the first play of each CD in the slots. Press again the
“SCAN” button to select plays. The player would stop after finishing
scanning all plays.
·Scanning the first play of each CD in the slots:
Press “SCAN” button until beeps and the display shows “ SCAN”, and
now the player would begin to scan the first play on the next CD. Press this
button again to stop scanning. The player would stop after finishing
scanning all CDs.
SEEK/TRACK(Seek/Play Up/Down)
Radio
●In SEEK model, the radio would seek and play the last or next transmitter on
the band.
●Press and release the “∧” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button to seek
the next transmitter. Repeat this operation to eek the next transmitter.
Cassette player
●This button is used to jump to different plays.
●It can jump over at most 9 plays each time.
●Press the “∧” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button and the display
would show “FF1” or “REWl”.
●Then press any side of the SEEK/TRACK button until the display shows the
required play No. Press the button for ten times to turn off this function.
●The current play should be included when calculating the play No. to which
wanting to jump. For example, if you want to rewind to the second play before
the current one, press the button until the display shows “REW3”.
●If the times you press the button are more than expected number, press the other
side to reduce the play No.
●The selection would be invalid if the selected number is over the number of
plays left on the current side.
·When the cassette plays to the beginning, the player would play this side
automatically.
·When the cassette plays to the end, the player would reverse automatically to
play the other side.
296
●There should be blank of three seconds between plays if the SEEK/TRACK
button is in normal working. Furthermore, this function may not work well as for
some dialogue, living or classic tapes.
CD Player
●This button is used to jump to different plays up and down.
●Press the “∧” or “∨” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the display
shows the required play No. If you want to let the cassette recover to the
beginning of the current play, just press the lower part of the button quickly.
ST (Stereo Reception) Display
●When receiving stereophonic broadcast, the radio would transform to stereo
reception and the display shows “ST”. If the signal becomes weak, the radio
would reduce the channel separation to prevent the weakening signal from
causing noises. If the signal is awfully weak, the radio would transform from
stereo reception to monophonic reception.

297
TAPE
●Press “TAPE” to switch from radio or CD model to cassette model, if the audio
system is off, press “TAPE” button to turn on the cassette player. However, the
precondition for the both operations is to put cassette in the player beforehand.
TEXT
CD Player
●This button is used to convert and display CDs containing text datum.
●Press the “TEXT” button quickly in playing to realize conversion display. The
display switches in order of being from play time to CD to play name and return
to play time.
●If the current CD does not contain text datum in case of pressing the button, the
display would show “NO TITLE”.
●If the display does not show the full name of the CD or play, press this button
until beeps. And the rest part would display (at most 24 alphabets).
TUNE (Tune)
●Press and release the “∧” or “∨” side of “TUNE” button to tune in the
transmitter up and down.
VOL·POWER (Power/Volume)
●Press the “VOL·POWER” to turn on and off the audio system. Rotate the
“VOL·POWER” to regulate the volume.
RS E (Rear Seat Entertainment system)
●Brief Introduction
Flip down RSE (VGA mainly used to front seats EMV／EMVN)
Be equipped with high-level display of 9 inches, and you could enjoy elaborate
and vivid images. You could use portable wired and wireless earphone, and also
enjoy different music from the front seats. Furthermore, you could select
louderspeaker model, and now you should listen to the same contents with the
front seats.
DVD player uses the DVD—CH in front seats.
The display is controlled by electric switch, of which the on, off and inclination
are controlled by remote control. In addition, the display adopts the thin display
used in the sedan limousine.
RSE has the following features:
●Large display of 9 inches
you could enjoy elaborate and vivid images from the large display of 9 inches.
●Absolutely marvelous VGA display
It adopts VGA display that is as same as EMVN, thus you enjoy most marvelous
images. As well as enjoying elaborate and vivid images by combining with the
298
 large display of 9 inches.
●Electric on-off display function
Use the remote control and penal switch to turn on and off the display and
regulation its inclination (angle) electrically. You could turn on the display as
sitting in the seat, which ensures security in traveling. In addition, you could
select auto on-off function to let the display be on and off in state of ACC
ON/OFF.
●Super control function (Child-lock function)
Press the “Rear System Lock” button of EMVN in front seats x, and the remote
control of RSE would fail. Images and sound of DVD would be played as usual,
which prevent naughtiness and useless operation of children.

299
●With MP3 function
●Improve the image quality, adjust the angle of liquid crystal display (lower line
of sight to upper line of sight), and expand the practical visual field. By digital
processing of DVD/VTR images, switch the images and improve image quality
(VIDE l, VIDE2 and NORMAL).
●Reasonable design of buttons
Humanization design of remote control buttons that are frequently used such as
DVD and MP3
●ON/OFF function of RES controlled by the front seats
The child in the rear seats could not turn on the RES system, while it could be
turned on in the front seats.
Furthermore, because the display would turn off when RSE is OFF, so it would
affect the visual field of passengers in the front seats.
●On-off angle of the display
The biggest angle of the display for turning it on is 120 degrees. So the visual
field of the lower part increases greatly, even the short child could enjoy it
freely.
●ACC last model start
In consideration of short parking, when the ACC switched from OFF to ON,
the RSE would start and continue the last model, which avoids the repeat
operation after short parking and is convenient for children.
●Set of the built-in DVD player
The DVD—CH in front seats are main, so it could not be built-in. If necessary,
the special DVD player is arranged outside the rear seats.
●Mechanisms and Functions
●Electric switch function
Flip down RSE display adopts electric switch. You could turn on and off the
display as sitting in the seat by pressing the On/Off button. And press the
inclination button to set the four angles. It would keep the originally set angle
after turning on again, even though turn it off or switch ACC from OFF to ON.
·Auto off function
When starting the auto off function, the display would be off automatically in
case that the ACC is in OFF, and would be on in case that the ACC is in ON.
Thus there is no need to turn off the display when getting off.
This function would be set by regulating display with image quality.
·Turn it on and off by the front seats
Turn the RES on and off by the front seats to finish the on and off the

300
 display.
● Electric switch display—the “painless design” when hand is caught
·Pinch protection function
Detecting the turning angle of the display. If the angle of the display does
not change in a certain time in case of inclination, it would reverse.
·Gear part adopts clutch.
The clutch would slide when the display is under the load of 30N, which
relieves the load and prevent damage of gears.
●Super control function (Child-lock function)
The children in the rear seats play with the remote control, which may turn off
the DVD. The Child-lock function is added for this reason. The operation of
the remote and penal would be invalid.

301
 ·Use the Screen seeting of EMVN in front seats to start the Rear System Lock.
·Even the Rear System Lock is started in the playing course, image and audio
playing would not be affected.
·The Lock state could be kept even the ACC is OFF/ON.
●ON/OFF function of RES controlled by the front seats
The child in the rear seats could not turn on the RES system, while it could be
turned on in the front seats.
·Rear seats display could be on/off under the controlling of EMVN image in
front seats.
·In Flip down RSE, touch the OFF Image and the display would be off
automatically, and touch the Rear Seats Image, the display would be on
automatically. You could turn on and off the display as sitting in the seat, so
the rear visual field could be ensured.
●Output function of louderspeaker in rear seats
Flip down RSE expresses the utility of sedan limousine. The operation of rear
seats could also turn on the louderspeaker.
·Touch the audio of rear seats to select buttons on the lower right of the image
to regulate the output model of louder speakers (the linkage model of front and
rear seats)
●PL Image Display Function
In consideration of vehicle bump or movement of passengers within the
vehicle, their heads may knock the RSE body and cause PL danger. So the
alarm image display function is added. If start the ACC, the following image
would be displayed to warn passengers.

Warning

Please buckle up while driving.

If it hinders your driving, please stop using it.

302
Descriptions and Attention Points
of Safe and Comfortable Device
4
SRS Safety Airbag……………………………………………………………304
Definition of SRS Safety Airbag………………………………………..304
Working Principal of SRS Safety Airbag…………………………….….305
Working Condition of SRS Safety Airbag………………………………305
Relevant Items of Seat Belt……………………………………………....…317
Functions of Seat Belt… …………………………………………….….317
ABS with EBD and the Brake Assist Device………………………….……319
Definition of ABS with EBD and the Brake Assist Device ………..…...319
Working State of ABS with EBD and the Brake Assist Device ……..….320
Functions of EBD………………………………………………………..321
VSC ……………………………………………………………………..……324
Definition of VSC…………………………………………………………..324
TRC …………………………………………………………………………..325
Definition of TRC……………………………………………………….….325
Slope-starting Assist Control Equipment…………………………………..327
Definition of Slope-starting Assist Control Equipment…………………….327
Preventing Collision Security System………………………………………328
Preventing Collision Security System……………………………….……..328
Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre ……………….330
Definition of Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre…..330
Head Lamp with Gas Discharge Type……………………………………...332
Definition of Head Lamp with Gas Discharge Type………………….……332

303
 SRS Safety Airbag
Definition of SRS Safety Airbag

SRS safety airbag which should be used with the safety belt together is the assist
device for protecting passenger's security. For playing a role and result of SRS
safety airbag, the passenger must wear the safety belt and keep the sitting
position correctly.
In addition, SRS safety airbag used correctly can fully play its safety efficiency.
If being used improperly, it can't play a safe role, and may bring the injury to
passenger instead.
●Dual-stage SRS Safety Airbag(driver seat and front-passenger
seat dual-stage mode)and SRS
Knee Airbag (driver seat and front-passenger seat)
Front-passenger seat SRS airbag When the driver or front-passenger is subject to the
strong impact in a front-end collision, SRS safety
Driver’s seat SRS airbag
airbag swells while straining safety belt in order to
disperse and slow down the impact to passenger's
head and chest.
SRS knee airbag cooperates with the movement of
driver and front-passenger to reduce injury for the
Driver’s seat SRS purpose, and can disperse and slow down the impact
knee airbag Front-passenger seat
SRS knee airbag
that act on the knees at the same time, which can
improve the result of protecting the passenger.

●SRS Side Airbag(driver seat and front-passenger seat)and

SRS Curtain Airbag (front seats and back seats)
Front seat and rear seat SRS curtain While front-passenger and back-passenger are
airbag
subject to strong impact in a side collision, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can swell
rapidly to disperse and slow down the impact to
front-passenger’s upper part of the body like chest,
etc. and passengers’ heads in front seat and back
Front seat SRS side airbag
seats.

304
 Working Principal of SRS Safety Airbag

●Working Principal of Dual-stage SRS Safety Airbag(driver seat

and front-passenger seat dual-stage mode)and SRS
Knee Airbag (driver seat and front-passenger seat)

When passenger is subject to strong collision from

the range of 30 degrees in front, the central sensor
installed on the front floor of the vehicle can inspect
collision signals, and send it to ECU that controls
SRS safety airbag, then the airbag begins to work. If protecting apron is installed
in front of the vehicle, the sensor shall not inspect the collision signal accurately,
and influence SRS safety airbag to work normally.

●Working Principal of SRS Side Airbag(driver seat and

front-passenger seat)and
SRS Curtain Airbag (front seats and back seats)
When passenger is subject to strong collision from the side direction, the sensor
installed in mid-column and posterior column of the vehicle can inspect collision
signals, and send it to ECU that controls SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag,
and then the airbag begins to work.

●Working State of SRS Safety Airbag

Passenger wears the safety belt correctly. After the vehicles collide with each
other, SRS safety airbag will begin to work under serious colliding condition
while it won’t begin to work under light colliding condition.
●Working

When passenger is subject to strong collision from the

range of 30 degrees in front, the SRS safety airbag and
SRS knee airbag begin to work.
When passenger is subject to strong collision in the side of the vehicle, SRS side

305
airbag and SRS curtain airbag are begin to work.
●Non-working
■SRS safety airbag and SRS knee airbag
When the vehicle is subject to slight collision, safety airbag does not swell
sometimes.

●When it directly impact with concrete counterguard with

no deformation and no movement, and the collision speed is
no more than 25km/h.

●When it directly impact with small area objects with no

deformation like fixed telegraph poles and trees, and the collision
speed is no more than 30km/h.
When the vehicle is subject to the cushioning as follows, safety airbag does not
swell sometimes.

●When it collides with the truck rear

●When it is subject to collision from deflective direction

Deformation and movement of the collided objects can slow down the impact,
and safety airbag does not swell sometimes even if the vehicle is with high speed.

●For example, while directly colliding with the front

vehicle of equal weight and parking state, the safety
airbag does not swell sometimes even if the speed
reaches 50km/h.

●Sometimes because of collision angle and direction

306
 (deflective collision) and other reasons, the safety airbag does not swell
sometimes even if the vehicle is very fast.

■SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag

When the vehicle is subject to slight collision as follows, the gasbag does not
swell sometimes.

●When it is subject to collision from deflective direction

●Except the driver’s cab, when other positions of the body

are collided

307
●The Situation That Cannot Play a Role of Original Efficiency
In the following cases, the airbag can swell sometimes, but it can't play its
original efficiency.

●While it is subject to side collision and rear collision(SRS

safety airbag, SRS knee airbag)

●When the vehicle overturns with 90 degree and 180

degree

●Under Part of the Vehicle Body Being Collided

●When the under part body is collided strongly, the safety

airbag swells sometimes.

●When it collides with road shoulder

●When it falls into or spans the deep ditch and pit.

●When it jumps and falls to the ground.

308
 Warning Please strictly observe the following items, and give full play to
protection function of SRS safety airbag.

SRS safety airbag is assist device of safety belt, and it can't replace safety belt.
While going by vehicle, passenger must strictly observe the following items.
Otherwise, while collision occurs, SRS safety airbag cannot give full play to the
security efficiency, but also the strong impact that is produced while SRS safety
airbag swelling may bring serious injury or even death to passenger.
·Please wear the safety belt correctly. Otherwise it is very dangerous that SRS
safe gasbag will swell and the passenger will be easy to be impacted strongly,
when the vehicle applies the brake promptly leading to the vehicle body to lean
forward. Please read P139 relevant clauses about correct using method of the
safety belt.
·Wear the safety belt correctly, and keep correct driving posture. When going
by vehicle, if being too close to SRS safety airbag, passenger will be easy to be
impacted strongly while SRS safe gasbag is swelling.
<Driver>
Please be not too closed to steering-wheel
in operation range.
<Front-passenger>
Be far away from SRS safety airbag of
front-passenger seat, and try to sit toward the
back. Please do not sit on the front end of the
seat, or lie on the instrument panel. Please read
P139 relevant clauses about seat adjustment and
correct driving posture.
·Please don't lean against the door or roof rail of
front pillar and rear pillar. It may have strong
impact on the head leading to life-threatening when front-seat SRS side airbag
and back-seat SRS curtain airbag are swelling. Especially children going by
vehicle, please pay more attention.

309
·When goods are put on the knee, i.e. goods are put between the passenger and
SRS safety airbag, please do not drive. While SRS safety airbag is swelling, it
can make articles fly easily or influence SRS safety airbag to work normally.
●While children going by vehicle, please do strictly observe the following items.
Otherwise, SRS safety airbag produces strong impact while swelling, which may
cause serious injury even death.
When going by vehicle, children should wear the safety belt. Do arrange them on
the back seats, and the back seats are the safest position for children.
When children are unable to wear the safety belt correctly, please install baby's
special-seat, infant's special-seat and children’s special-seat on the back seats.

310
 Warning Please strictly observe the following items, and give full play to
protection function of SRS safety airbag.

·Forbid installing children’s special-seat towards

back on front-passenger seat.
While SRS safety airbag of the front-passenger
seat are swelling, it may have strong impact on
the back of children’s special-seat.
In addition, when children’s special-seat is
installed towards front on front-passenger seat in
special situation, please fix the back of
front-passenger seat, and the back of children’s
special-seat closely leans against the backrest of
front-passenger seat and is firmly fixed.
·Do not let children stand or lean on SRS safety airbag of the front-passenger seat
or be embraced on the knees of adults.
·When maintaining the vehicle, please do strictly observe the following items.
Otherwise, SRS safety airbag may not work normally or swells because of a
mistake, which may bring serious injury or even death. Please do contact with
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center while doing the following operations.
Please do not dismantle, install, disassemble and repair SRS safety airbag,
panel or glove compartment.
·When changing the cover of front seats, or dismantling, installing, disassembling,
repairing front seats, please do contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center. In addition,
please do not change front seats.
·Please do not dismantle or install front pillar, rear
pillar and their surrounding components, i.e. do
not dismantle or repair components surrounding SRS curtain airbag installed
positions on front and back seats.
·Please do not change suspension. Changing vehicle height or suspension rigidity

311
will cause unexpected expanding of SRS safety airbag.
·Please do not repair front part of the body or inner cab. If being repaired
improperly, it will influence the sensor of SRS safety airbag, which causes SRS
safety airbag to work abnormally.

Warning Please strictly observe the following items, and give full play
to protection function of SRS safety airbag.

● Workers, who install the vehicle components, should strictly observe the
following items. Otherwise, SRS safety Trade Mark

airbag may not work normally or swells

because of a mistake, which may bring
serious injury or even death.
·Please do not mantle the swelling position and
Trade Mark
stick any decoration.

·Do not lay spice box on the instrument panel and

its console, and do not put umbrella in front of
instrument. Otherwise, SRS safety airbag of
front-passenger seat cannot work normally, and
even swells, making the articles fly.

·Do not suspend heavy things, sharp instruments

and hard things on the key chain. They may have
danger of flying while SRS safety airbag is
swelling.
·Do not install attachments around SRS knee Fittings
airbag swelling position under instrument panel.
They may have danger of flying while SRS knee
airbag is swelling.
·Please don't install other devices except original
Air bag spreading
312
part of front seat
packaging special-purpose articles of FAW on the front seats. If the swelling
positions of SRS side airbags of the front seats are mantled, the normal work of
SRS side airbags will be influenced. In addition, while installing the
special-purpose seat covers, please read the security manual that the goods
attached in detail, and install them correctly.

·Please don't install articles like cup frame etc. on

front door or nearby. They may have danger of
flying while SRS knee airbag is swelling.

313
 Warning Please strictly observe the following items, and give full play
to protection function of SRS safety airbag.

The expansion part of front

·Please don't install accessories, hand-free and rear seat SRS curtain
airbag
microphone and other articles around SRS safety
airbag swelling positions of front-and-back seats
such as the previous windscreen, side
windowpane, front pillar, rear pillar, roof side
position and assisted handle. These Articles may Fittings
Hand free
have danger of flying while SRS safety airbags of microphone

front-and-back seats are swelling.

·Don't hang articles such as hangers, heavy objects, sharp devices etc. on the
hook of handrail of the back seats. When hanging clothes, don't use the hangers,
and hang on the hook directly. These clothes have danger of flying while SRS
curtain airbags of front-and-back seats are swelling.
·The electric waves of radio equipments have serious influence on ECU of SRS
safety airbag. Therefore, if radio equipments are needed to be installed, please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre.
·When the protection plate and diversion plates are installed on the front part of
vehicle, please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre. If the front
part of vehicle is transformed, the sensor of SRS safety airbag may be influenced,
and SRS safety airbag will probably swell by mistake.
●Please don't exert the excessive external force on SRS safety airbag swelling
positions such as buffer cover of steering-wheel, instrument panel, rear pillar,
side position of roof and side positions of front-and-back seats. Otherwise, SRS
safe gasbag is probably unable to work normally, and causes the serious
personnel's injury or even death.
●After SRS safety airbag swells, please don't touch the components of SRS
safety airbag. Because its components become very hot, and may cause great
injury like scald etc.

314
 Attention SRS safety airbag working normal, the following
phenomena may
appear sometimes.

●SRS safety airbag swelling too fast may cause impacting injury sometimes.

●When SRS safe gasbag is swelling, it is following the detonation sound of

safety airbag with appearing smog, but this unlikely occurs fire. If people
suffering from respiration tracheae disease like asthma etc. breathe in such gas,
they may feel difficulty in breathing sometimes.
At this moment, it is safer to escape and get off the vehicle immediately. In
addition, if driver can't get off the vehicle, please open the window or door,
breathing in fresh air.
When the residues (gas etc.) produced while SRS safety airbag swelling enter
into eyes or adhere on the skin, please clean them with fresh water as soon as
possible. People with sensitive skin may have allergic reaction once in a while.
●SRS safety airbag swelling of driver seat may cause front windowpane to be
damaged.
●After SRS safety airbag works one time, it no longer works in the second and
future collisions, then please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
Therefore, while colliding continuously, if SRS safety airbag has swelled once, it
won’t work any more in the second collision.
●When the vehicle and SRS safety airbag scrap, please contact touch with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center. SRS safety airbag may detonate unexpectedly,
causing the injury.
●When scratches and cracks are appeared on steering-wheel with SRS safety airbag,

315
front pillar, rear pillar, side position of roof, please keep intact and contact with
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center. Otherwise, SRS safety airbag cannot
work normally in a collision, causing personnel injury.
Pad Side of the top
Front Column

Rear Column

Pad
●When engine stops and SRS safety airbag works, the fuel pump will stops
supporting fuel that can control the consumption in the minimum range.
Beginning to support the fuel, the power shall resume to the OFF position again
after someone confirms that the fuel has not leaked.

316
 Relevant Items of Seat Belt
Functions of Seat Belt

●Seat Belt with Pretensioner + Load Limiter

Except of central seat of back row
●The collision of the front of vehicle is the greatest injury to the front-seats
passengers. In a collision, pretensioner can make the safety belt tighten up
instantly, which has a best function of restraining passengers.
●Load limiter can make load of safety belt maintain in specified value, which can
lighten the pressure to the chest.
Pre-tension Load limiter
mechanism

Reducing the pressure to

the chest

Maintain the prescribed load in collision and pull

The safety belt rolls up at the instant of collision
out the safety belt at the same time.

● Functions of Seat Belt with ELR

The seat belt is flexible with activity of human body. But if collision appears
violently and the body leans forward, the safety belt will be locked automatically,
fettering the body.
●Functions of Seat Belt with Decompressor (device for reducing
safety belt pressure)
Except of central seat of back row
While seat belt being worn, it can lighten the pressure of the safety belt to the
shoulder.
●The Preventing Collision Seat Belt
On relevant items of the collision seat belt, please consult P283 relevant clauses.

317
 Warning
使用带预张紧器的座椅安全带时，请务必遵守以
事项
●While using the safety belt with pretensioner, please observe the following
items. Otherwise, its functions can't give full play, which may cause severe injury
or even death.
·Please wear the safety belt correctly (seeP139).
·Please adjust the seat to the best driving position (seeP122).
●If wanting to install, dismantle, disassemble the seat belt with pretensioner,
please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center. If the seat belt with
pretensioner is improperly used, it can't work normally, and makes a mistake
sometimes, which may cause severe injury or even death.

Attention
The seat belt with pretensioner cannot be reused.

●The seat belt with pretensioner can't be reused any more after working once.
After safety belt work once, it can't pull out or roll again, and be sure to change it
to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre. Likewise, while colliding continuously,
if pretensioner works once in the first collision, it will no longer work in the
second collision.
●While the seat belt with pretensioner is working, it is following the detonation
sound with appearing smog, but this unlikely occurs fire and is harmless to
human body.
●When the seat belt with pretensioner scraps, please be sure to contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center. When the safety belt with pretensioner appears
unexpected movement, it is apt to cause the bodily injury.

General Knowledge
Working Conditions of Seat Belt with Pretensioner
The seat belt with pretensioner works when the vehicle is subject to a violent
collision ahead. It does not work sometimes when colliding slightly.
318
●Directly collide the cement concrete wall with the speed under 25km/h.
In addition, in following cases, it work sometimes, but can't play its original
effect.
●The collision from of side and rear
●The vehicle turns 90 degree and 180 degree

ABS with EBD and Brake Assist Device

Definitions of ABS and Brake Assist Device

● ABS Functions
ABS means that when the vehicle applies the brake promptly and applies the
brake on the wet and slippery road surface, ABS is a way to prevent wheel lock
(wheel does not rotate), which mainly used for inhibiting the side slide of vehicle.
With ABS

Without ABS

Starting to brake
● Functions of Brake Assist Device
The brake assist device increases the brake power in the following cases:
●When the unskillful driver applies the brake promptly.
●When the driver is panic under the emergency.
●Because driver is quicker about stepping on brake pedal than general situation,
vehicle sensor judges this for needing to apply the brake promptly.
When driver is unable to step on brake pedal and the brake function can't give
full play, the brake assist device will increase footboard strength, so as to
ensure the sufficient brake power.

319
 The braking force of driver
Efficiency of
pedal + the braking force of High efficiency
braking auxiliary devices braking function
ABS

● ABS 、
Brake Assist Device
There is certain limitation on vehicle stability with ABS installed and effective
control scope of steering-wheel, so the driver can't rely on its function excessively,
and please drive safely at pains.
In addition, ABS and brake assist device check out the wheel lock situation by the
sensor installed on the wheel. If the tire size of four wheels is different, it may not
judge correctly sometimes. Please read P43 “relevant notes about the tire” in
detail, and install correctly.
※1 EBD is short for Electronic Brake force Distribution, which means assignment and control of the

electronic brake power.

※2 ABS is short for Antilock Brake System, which means anti-lock brake device.

320
 Working State of ABS and Brake Assist Device

● Relevant Items of Driving

●While applying the brake promptly, the driver
must react rapidly and step on the brake pedal
forcibly and continuously in order to exert
functions of ABS and the brake assist device.
●While applying the brake promptly, that please don't apply the brake method
with the pump type※, otherwise the braking distance will be extended.
※Brake method of stepping on the brake pedal in small efforts at a time.

peng
Gu gu dudu

Stamp
continuously Stamp lightly
Stamp hard
● Working
While ABS is working, the skidding indicator (P168) glimmers.
While the brake assist device is working, the following phenomena appear
sometimes, but not unusual.
●While stepping on the brake pedal suddenly, the brake force is relatively big,
and ABS works sometimes.

Functions of EBD
Adopting ABS control technology, according to driving state, the best brake
power is distributed to front and back wheels. According to load amount and load
change, the brake power is best distributed to front and back wheels In addition,
in the course of turning the brake, control of left and right wheels guarantees
stability of the running vehicle.

321
 Warning Please don’t rely on the functions of EBD, ABS and
Brake assist device excessively.
●Please don’t rely on the functions of EBD, ABS and Brake assist device
excessively.
·ABS with EBD is at the working state, there is certain limitation about
stability of the vehicle and validity of the steering-wheel control. Accident
is easy to occur while driving abnormally.
·Please don’t rely on the functions of EBD, ABS and Brake assist device
excessively. The driver should control the speed, guarantee the effective
car distance, and drive safely at pains.
·When ABS with EBD exceeds tire lock critical or water membrane
effect※ appears, it can't play a role.
※While running at a high speed on rainy day, tire and road surface form
water membrane, and lose grasp the land.
●In the following situations, ABS with EBD can not shorten the braking
distance, and the braking distance is extended sometimes, compared with the
vehicle not installed ABS.
Therefore, please control the speed, and keep the car valid distance.
●While going on the road surface of grit and snow
●While installing the tyre chain
●Cross over the road surface with seam that is different in height
●While going on bad road surface such as the washboard road full of bumps
and holes

322
 General Knowledge

Working Condition
●ABS with EBD and the brake assist device begin to work when the speed
exceeds 1Okm/h, and stop working when the speed drops to 5km/h.
●In the rainy day, it is apt to skid to step on the brake on the road entrances
and exits, seam, construction iron plate, etc. So ABS with EBD benefits the
Working Sound
After the engine has been started or just starts, it will send out the sound of the
electrical machinery or " Kati " from the engine room sometimes. That sound
is ABS with EBD for checking up working condition, and not unusual.

323
 VSC※
Definition of VSC
VSC can control ABS, brake assist device, TRC, EFl, etc. in coordination, and
can control the vehicle sideslip on changing direction promptly and driving on
the wet and slippery road surface. The outputs of brake and engine are
automatically controlled, which guarantees the running stability of the vehicle.
●The tire state exerts a tremendous influence to this system, so please look out
the tire state. Please read " the attentive matters of the tire " on relevant details

Warning Please don't rely on TRC function excessively, even if TRC is

in working state, the ability to control direction stability of
vehicle has limitation, it is apt to cause the accident, please
drive safely at pains. While skidding indicator (See P168)
General Knowledge
Working Condition
●VSC will immediately work while the speed exceeds 15km/h.
●Under the following situations, VSC does not work.
·Appearing VSC warn (P178)cue
·Adjusting to maintaining mode (see P14)
VSC Working Warning Buzzer

When the vehicle slips, it will send out the intermissive cue sound.
●Because vehicle state terms are different, only skid indicator (see Pl68)
glimmers and gives an alarm sometimes.

324

※VSC is short for Vehicle Stability Control, which means Vehicle Stability Control.
 TRC※
Definition of TRC

● Functions of TRC
When the vehicle starts and accelerates on the apt slippery road surface, this
device controls surplus driving force to avoid causing the drive wheel with idle
motion, which guarantees stable transferring direction and appropriate driving
force of the vehicle.
●Once the wheel skids, ECU will measure the skidding situation according to the
information that a wheel speed sensor transmit, instantly reduce the output of the
engine, and apply the brake as requested. TRC controls surplus driving force to
prevent skidding through procedure described above.
·While TRC is working, skid indicator (see P168) glimmers. At this moment, the
driver can feel the vibration of vehicle once in a while, but this is caused by the
brake control, not unusual.
·While going on road surface of mud and snow, it needs to strengthen the engine
power, and put TRC on 0FF position at this moment to improve the traction
force (see P195).

● Structure of TRC
When the tire skids, the sensors installed on four
Prevent skidding
wheels send out the signal, then compare. When the
signal of the drive wheel is stronger than that of
other wheels, ECU judges this wheel skids. At this
moment, the skidding tyre is exerted on driving
force, or the engine output power is temporarily controlled, which inhibits
skidding.

● The Relation between TRC and Tyre

TRC works according to the signals that wheel speed sensor sends out, so only a
certain tire being different from others in four wheels can put out signal, making
ECU give wrong skidding judgment.

325
 Tire state exerts Please
a tremendous
don't useinfluence to this device,
VSC excessively. VSC so is
bein
sure to be careful
working order,
and pay attentiontheto ability
tire state. Please read P43 “the attentive matters
to guarantee direction stability of vehicle has of the
tire” on relevant limitation,
details substandard driving is easy to happen contingency.
Warning Please drive safely at pains. VSC job warning buzzer
(intermittent sound) sends out the alarm and rings, or while the
slippery indicator (P168) glimmers, please drive specially and
cautiously.

General Knowledge
Working Condition
●Generally speaking, so long as the engine is started, TRC is able on
working state.
●In the following situations, TRC does not work
·Appearing VSC warn indication ( see P178)

※TRC is short for Traction Control, which means traction control system.

326
Slope-starting Assist Control Device
Definition of Slope-starting Assist Control Device
●
Functions of Slope-starting Assist Control Device
While starting on abrupt slope or apt slippery road surface, in order to control
sliding and falling phenomena of the vehicle that produce when being changed
from the brake pedal to the gas pedal, slope-starting assist control device can
relieve slippery phenomenon and make it be easy to start through automatic
control brake.
The slope-starting assist control device can be in working state automatically
while meeting the following conditions:
●When gearshift is on , , position
●When not stepping on the brake pedal
●When the vehicle slips
When the slope-starting assist control device works, skidding indicator (see P168)
glimmers, the brake light is on. The driver may feel the vibration and different
sounds of vehicle once in a while at this moment, this sound is sending out
following the brake control, not unusual.

Warning
Please don't overly rely on the slope-starting assist control

●Please don't overly rely on the slope-starting assist control device. It is very
difficult to start under abrupt slope, frozen, mud and so on road conditions.
Please start cautiously.
●In order to park (keep still) on the upslope road surface, please don't use the
slope-starting assist control device. Otherwise, it is apt to have the contingency.

General Knowledge

Working Condition
Appearing VSC warn indication ( see P178), the slope-starting assist control
device does not to work.。

327
 Preventing Collision Security System
Preventing Pushing Security System
Collision security system can follow the driver's operation of applying the brake,
guarantee passenger's protection in advance by reinstating the safety device while
judging to emergency braking.
● Preventing Collision Seat Belt
According to strength of the driver stepping on the brake pedal, and judging that
the driver brake operation is emergency brake, the seat belt before rolling fetters
the passenger rapidly, which can improve the protection result of protecting
devices such as the seat belt with pretensioner + load limiter and safety airbag.

General Knowledge
Working Condition
Preventing collision safety belt works under following conditions:
●The switch is on IG position or engines is at the operation state
●When the speed is more than 30km/h
●While using the seat belt

●Indication of the Integrated Information Indicator

■PCS cannot use now
PCS Cannot
Use Now

It can indicate under the following conditions:

●Preventing collision safety belt device work repeatedly within short time
In order to prevent being overheated, this device stops working, and can
resume working in a short time.
■Inspection PCS System
Inspection
PCS System

When the collision safety device is unusual and indicates. While sending out “Du
" sound, main warning light is lighting. When warning indication appears, the
preventing collision safety device does not work sometimes.

328
 Warning Please don't excessively rely on the functions of preventing
collision security system.
●Please don't rely on the functions of preventing collision security system
excessively. Pay attention to the state all around and confirm whether there are
barriers in front while driving, and drive prudently.
●When not wearing the seat belt, the preventing collision security system will
be inoperative.

329
Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre
Definition of Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre

In the four wheels of a car, the atmospheric pressure of any tire being low will
influence the vehicle going normally. And this device can reveal warning on the
integrated information indicator, and remind driver to drop the atmospheric
pressure of a tire.
In addition, this device is an assist to check, maintain tyre atmospheric pressure
in daily maintaining project, and be sure to use at the time of regular
maintenance.
●Functions of Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of Tyre
When the tire is lower in pressure, it will cause
the tire to soften, the diameter to diminish, and
Signal different from
the memory value turn to the torsion and change of coefficient of
elasticity.
This device regards atmospheric pressure of the
standard tire (appoint the pressure on sign) tire
diameter and torque, coefficient of elasticity as
the foundation, will store
calculating value in ECU, and initialize and
adjust in advance (See P329).
In the course of driving a vehicle, according
to vehicle each sensor signal, ECU will
contrast with the initial adjusting value.
When it does not adjust for a long time, or
because of tyre burst, etc. atmospheric
pressure of tire are insufficient, or when the
disparity with the initial adjusting value is
greater, Judge the atmospheric pressure of
the tire being insufficient, and point out the
alarm on the integrated information indicator
(see P178).

330
 Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre Cannot
This device can make the judgment according to the delicate change of the tire. It
cannot work normally sometimes under the following conditions.
●When four tires are not the same size, the same producer, the same brand and
at the same tire of pattern, or installing the tyres with intensity obvious
difference about wears and tears(tire uses in winter is the same) .
●Using emergency tire, non-slip-resistance nail tire, snowfield tire and installing
the tyre chain.
●When going on the easy slippery road surface like the abominable road surface
and frozen road surface and the speed being under 30km/h, and going within 5
minutes of short time.
●The atmospheric pressure of installation is obviously higher than the tire of
atmospheric pressure of appointing, or when the tyre burst (break) causes the
atmospheric dropping quickly.
●When going on the easy slippery road surface like the abominable road surface
and frozen road surface and the speed being under 30km/h, and going within 5
minutes of short time.

While changing tyre and wheels

While changing tyre and wheel or changing tyre position, be sure to adjust this
device in advance. Otherwise, this device cannot work normally sometimes.
Please read P329 relevant content of “changing tyre and wheel” for details.

331
Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre
Definition of Warning System of the Atmospheric Pressure of the Tyre

It gives out light through stimulating vacuum tube gas and metal oxide, and
shines farer than ordinary white light of bulb, and also shines the wider.
Warning Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center
while varying the gas discharging type head-light
(including changing the light)
If light a lamp under touching the lamp stand state, it will
produce the high pressure of 20,000 in the twinkling of an
eye, the danger is great that get an electric shock.

General Knowledge
Automatic Device of the Head-light (Automatic Regulation the Shining
Direction)
●Accelerate or decelerate and Load or unload goods, according to vehicle
change of posture, automatically moderate the light axle.
●After engine starts, when head-light first time on, the optical axis of the
head-light moves sometimes. But it is a phenomenon that measures this device
being normal or not, not unusual.
●Light present glimmer, which may be by bulb life-span reason, please go to
the FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center to check.。

When This Device Appears

When this device appears unusually, the following phenomena may appear.
●In a situation that the light is bright, if the light is put out when the voltage
is beyond the scope of working voltage, after the voltage returns to normal,
light again at once.
●While operating the bright light, if the voltage is beyond the scope of job,
even handle the car light button, the light is not on.

332
 The Best Operation
Method of the Vehicle
Relevant Items about Driving on Rainy Day……………………………..334
Driving on Rainy Day……………………………………………………….334
Using Attentive Matters in Cold Season…………………………………..336
Preparation and Examination before Winter…………………………………336
Vehicle Before Driving on the Road…………………………………………337
Driving……………………………………………………………………….339
Parking………………………………………………………………….……342
Economy Driving……………………………………………………………345
For Protecting Environment, Economy Driving……………………………..345
For Protecting Environment……………………………………………….347
Parts, Waste Oil Should Deal with Carefully…………………………………347

333
Relevant Items about Driving on Rainy Day
Driving on Rainy Day

●Drive Prudently on Apt Slippery Road

When it is going in rainy day, it will often appear situations like the bad visual
fields, front windscreen being fogged, and road surface skidding. Please drive
prudently.
●The road surface that it rained just now is very apt to skid, please drive
prudently.
● It is apt to produce water membrane phenomenon※ while driving a vehicle in
rainy day, and steering-wheel and brake cannot give play to its functions
sometimes. Please slow down while driving.
※When it goes at a high speed in the rainy day, the aqueous layer is formed
between tire and road surface, and the tire is apt to lose catching the land.

Warning
Please drive prudently on apt slippery road。

●When emergency braking, accelerating, and turning the steering-wheel

promptly on apt slippery road surface, the tire is easy to skid and difficult to
control the vehicle, contingency may be easy to happen.
●While changing the top gear and bottom gear, the rotational speed of the
engine changes obviously, the vehicle is easy to side slipping, and the
contingency happens.
●Driving from the ponding road, please step on the brake pedal lightly, and
confirm whether the function of the brake is normal. When the brake liner
piece is drenched, the brake efficiency can drop obviously, the brake liner with
single side being drenched can function only. So while handling the
steering-wheel, contingency is apt to happen.
● Don’t running on the road covered by a layer of water.
After the heavy rain, the ponding road surface may bring great damage to vehicle,
and avoid going on this kind of road surface here as much as possible.

334
 If exercise on the ponding road surface, the engine may stop
rotating, and electric equipment is easy to short out and enter
water, causing engine with the great vehicle accident of damaging
etc.
Exercise at ponding road surface, reach water by inches, be sure
to reach FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center to check the
Warning
following events:
●Efficiency of applying the brake of the brake
●The oil amount of engine, gear box, the differential mechanism,
etc. and quality change.(When the oil turns white turbidly,
prove that enters water in the device, must change the oil. )
●Drive shaft, various bearing, various finish places etc. of
lubrication is bad or not.

335
 Using Attentive Matters in Cold Season
Preparation and Examination before Winter

●Replace the lubricating oil of the engine

Please change the lubricating oil of engine according to the temperature changing
outside. (See P319: Lubricating oil of designated engine)
● Adjusting the concentration of washing
In order to prevent the cleaning solution from being frozen, please consult the
frozen temperature of the identification on the anti-icing fluid container, and
dilute to supplement.
● Adjusting the concentration of cooling liquid
In order to prevent cooling liquid from frozening, please regulate the density of
cooling the liquid.
Using Area Dilution Ratio Icing Temperature
Warm Area 30％ -12℃
Cold Area 50％ -35℃

Attention Don’t use ethanol antifreeze and purified water.

● Check Liquid Amount and Proportion of the Battery

If the temperature drops, battery performance will drop, and can influence the
engine to start sometimes.
Please check liquid amount and proportion of the battery, and supplement the
liquid of battery or charge if necessary.
●Be Prepared for Winter Used Tyre and the Tyre Chain
●While going on snow and frozen road, Please install the tire used in winter,
and get the tyre chain ready. That specification of winter used tyre must be the
same as standard tire and the same size as well as the same type. Please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center about relevant details.
●While changing the tire, please read P43 " Attentive matters of the tire ".
●The tyre chain must use the special-purpose articles. Please contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center about relevant details.

336
●Be Prepared for Windshield Wiper Blade Used in Cold Area
The special-purpose windshield wiper blade used in cold area of snowing day can
prevent the snow from adhering on the glass, and the metal part is covered with
the rubber. Please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center about
relevant details.
●Going at a high speed, while being very difficult to polish glass using this wiper
blade, please reduce speed.
●When the season does not need to use the special-purpose wiper blade of cold
area, please use the ordinary wiper blade.

Vehicle Before Driving on the Road

●Remove the snow on the car eaves

While driving, the snow on the car eaves will influence driving vision. Before
driving, please remove the snow on the car eaves first.
●Remove the snow on the trunk lid
Remove the snow on the trunk lid, and then open the case lid of the electronic
trunk, otherwise it is apt to damage the trunk lid.
●Remove the snow and frost on the glass
When there is snow or frost inside and outside the glass, which will influence
driving vision. Using the defroster, not only needn't scratch the glass, but also can
remove snow and frost.
●Remove the ice cubes adhered at the bottom of the vehicle
While removing the ice-cubes of part described above, please don't scratch the
automobile body.
●Remove the snow on the previous windscreen bottom flange air
inlet
Remove the snow on the previous windscreen bottom flange air inlet, then make
the fan of the air conditioner work. If working with the snow directly, it may lead
to the fact that the fan breaks down, or blows the snow to the glass.
In addition, the washer spray nozzle lies in the inboard of the engine room. If
337
there has snow near the spray nozzle, it is probably unable to spray normally.
Please after removing the snow near the washer spray nozzle, and then gush out
the cleaning solution.
●Wisper etc. be frozen
After the wiper, rear-view mirror, door windowpane are frozen, it can't work, and
please don't touch and move device described above at will. If pressing the switch
continuously, it may damage device described above, and make the battery lose
charge.
●Door and trunk are frozen

Please melt the ice with the hot water. Then, please wipe water clean completely
at once.
If open it by force, it may damage the door, trunk and rubber ones around. In
addition, if open the trunk lid by force, it may damage the lid of the electronic
trunk.
●Attention to Remove snow on the sole

While stepping on the pedal, if the sole has snow, it is

apt to skid, and make the indoor moisture increase,
and the car windowpane form the frost even frozen.

338
 Driving
●On the apt slippery road, please don’t operate in emergency
While going at a high speed, such behaviors like applying the brake promptly,
changing direction urgently etc. may cause the vehicle to slip unexpectedly, and
cause the accident. Be slow while going, control the pace, and keep enough car
distance.
While driving on the apt frozen road surface like bridge and shady road, please
slow down in advance, and drive prudently.

Warning While changing the top gear and bottom gear, the obvious
change of rotational speed of the engine, the easy side of
vehicle slips, the contingency happens.

●Remove the ice adhered on the mudguard

There is influence on the operation of steering-wheel, please often observe and
remove it before the ice-cubes become large.
●Remove the ice adhered on the brake device
While being frozen, it may cause abominable influence to efficiency of the brake
sometimes. Please often step on the brake pedal lightly, make sure that efficiency
of the brake is OK.
●Antiskid in advance
While going on snow, frozen road surface, install the tyre chain in advance or use
and use the tire in winter. While changing the tire, be sure to read 43 " attentive
matters of the tire ".

While using the winter used tire, please drive under the
Warning situation of normal atmospheric pressure of tire. In addition,
using the winter tire, for being safe, please avoid driving at a
high speed.

●The Tyre Chain

●Please install the tyre chain on the rear wheel.
●About the operation method of the tyre chain, please read the operation

339
instructions that attached.
●The tyre chain must use the special-purpose articles. Please contact with FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center about relevant details.
■Before installing the tyre chain
In the place that does not influence traffic and can operate safely, step on the
brake, and be prepared to work according to the following order.
<Order>
1 Stop the engine
Put the gearshift to lever blocking, stop the engine working.
2 Inform the existence of vehicle
Light the emergency glimmer light if necessary, all passengers get off the car
and unload the articles on the car, and show the triangular warning sign (or
open the parking indicator).

340
3. Be ready for good tools.
Be ready for jack and jack handle(According to " the preserving the place of the
jack, tool, spare tyre " of P322)
4. Be ready for the tyre chain.
5. Be ready for tyre stopper.
While installing the tyre chain, the tire stopper is the necessity.
●About the situation of the tyre stopper, please contact with FAW Hongqi
Sales and Service Center.
●If there is no tyre stopper, the big stone that used to fix the tire can replace.

While installing the tyre chain，be sure to drive cautiously.

Warning

●While installing the tyre chain, please going according to 30km/h or speed that
the tyre chain producer recommend. In addition because the tyre chain has
influence on the stability of driving a vehicle, be sure to drive prudently.
●Install tyre chain to drive a vehicle, don't run over protruding position and ditch
cave, or change the steering-wheel quickly, lock-up the wheel promptly, etc. It is
apt to make the vehicle meet sudden movement, lead to the fact the accident
happens. In addition, while ABS working, braking distance will extend
sometimes, be sure to drive prudently.

While installing the tyre chain, it may damage the wheel

Attention
sometimes.

●Installing the tyre chain may damage the wheel sometimes.

● Use the non- special-purpose tyre chain, it is easy to cause abominable
influence on the automobile body, please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Center for details.
●While installing the tyre chain, the alarm device of the atmospheric pressure of
the tire can't work normally.

341
Parking
●While parking, please shut off the engine
While parking in the place with snow or on snowy day, please shut off the engine.

The engine is at the working state, if there is snow around,

Warning
exhaust gas will enter car, which may cause to be poisoned
by the carbon monoxide or the great bodily injury takes place
even death.

●Don’t step the brake

Stepping the brake on cold days may make the brake device be frozen, and it is
difficult to remove the parking brake.
■Parking on the smooth place

Under the state that does not step on the parking

brake, switch the gearshift lever to position.

■Parking on the slope road

When parking on the downslope road, retain the tyre stopper in front of the front
wheel, when parking on the upslope road, retain the tyre stopper at back of the
rear wheel. And put the gearshift lever to position under the condition that
does not step on the parking brake.
●About relevant items of the tyre stopper, please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales
and Service Center.
●If there is no tyre stopper, the big stone that used to fix the tire can replace.
●Make engine room be in the leeward direction
The position that faces the wind is relatively low temperature. For prevent battery
performance from drop, please try hard to park the front part in the leeward
342
direction while parking.
●Lift the arm of wiper in advance
It is cold when snowing, the wiper is apt to freeze on the glass, please lift the arm
of wiper in advance.
■Switching method of wiper
When the front windscreen has a large number of snow, the wiper can not be
lifted, which may damage the wiper electrical machinery sometimes. Please
switch from concealing type completely into half concealing type according to
the following order.

Hold the nodal position of wiper arm, lift up along the glass.
●When switching into half concealing type, can lift the arm of the wiper
●Resuming to the concealing type state, press the nodal position with hands
along the glass.

Please don't only hold the wiper to draw up, otherwise the wiper is
probably out of shape. Please hold the node to lift up.

343
 General Knowledge

Relevant items about half concealing wiper

If there is some snow in stop shaving position, Concealing wiper in the working
course switch from concealing type completely into half concealing type
automatically. But it can't be switched sometimes because of the snow, and have
the sound of " Kengchi, Kengchi ".When there is this sound, please switch to half
concealing type, then shave and brush.

344
 Economy Driving
For Protecting Environment, Economy Driving

For a long time parking, shut down the engine.

Stopping the idle speed of 5 minutes can save 65cc petrol.
◆Reduce C02 420g(10 time/month)
Unload luggage, article that are not needed while driving
Load l0kg luggage, articles, going 50km each time can save l5cc petrol.
◆Reduce C02 130/g (650 time /month)
Forbid the engine to idle at a high speed.
Reduce the idle at a high speed once can save 6cc petrol
◆Reduce C02 1150g (300 time /month)
Use conditioner as fewer times as possible
The air conditioner is stopped using for 6 minutes, which can save 70cc petrol ◆
Reduce C02 1340g (3 hour /moon) regularly inspection tire atmospheric pressure.
Going 50km using lowest pressure, compared with the atmospheric pressure of
50kpa (0.5kg/cm2), can save the petrol 150cc.
◆Reduce C02 1250g (650 time /month)
Start and accelerate steadily
Stop starting rapidly once, can save the petrol l7cc, and stop accelerating urgently
once, can save the petrol ll cc.
◆Reduce C02 360g(each 20 time/month)
Use the economic pace, and have no loss while driving
It is the best choice with the speed of 80km/h on the expressway, of 40-50km/h
on the general road. While reducing the speed of 100km/h to 80km/h, fuel
economy can improve l0-30%.
●Please observe the appointed speed, drive safely at pains. For example when
accelerating
When finishing accelerating, strengthen the range of unlocking pedal. Guarantee
to change the top gear and lock stopping control, which can raise the efficiency.
For example when decelerating on the downslope
Unclamp the gas pedal ahead of time, use the mechanism to start.
The gasoline engine stops the fuel spraying, which can improve the use efficiency
of the fuel.
Please leave the foot off the gas pedal resolutely on the smooth road surface.
It is not worse than the ones that the situation of the speed reducing. Please use
the fuel to spray the way flexibly. If going with definite speed, the smaller of the
number of trample and returning location on the pedal is, the lower the
consuming value of fuel is.

345
 General Knowledge
Definition of “10·15 operating mode”
“10·15 operating mode” of the fuel consumption introduced on the vehicle
manual is the fuel consumption measured according to certain condition.
This kind of operating mode can imitate the running state in the city. Simulation
reproduces the running state on the urban road as drawn on chassis dynamometer.
After the engine is preheated, then go according to the mode illustrated in picture
2.
●Picture l Chassis Dynamometer

●Picture 2“l0• 15 operating mode”

The average speed is 22.7km/h, running distance is 4.16km, running time is 660
seconds
"l0• 15 operating mode" can imitate the running state reproduced in the city, it
is a kind of fixed representative curve. Therefore, a lot of situations and states are
different from actual states.
For example:
●The average travel speed is lower than "l0·l5 operating mode "
●The number of times (the number of times of parking while driving) of
parking is much.
●Accelerating promptly etc.
Because conditions are different, the fuel utilization ratio is low.

※Number value is based on the fuel consumption 8.5L/lOOkm (10·15 operating

mode)of 2.0L grade vehicles(block automatically), then calculates out ( please
read the vehicle catalogue about Oil consumption of every vehicle style)
※C02 emission was calculated out by coefficient 0.64 that C02 listed quantity
according to 1L petrol.

346
 To Protect Environment,
Parts, Waste Oil Should Deal with Carefully
●Lead and sulfuric acid that the battery used and as the special industry offal,
which users are obligated to deal carefully with .While changing the battery,
please give it to the agency.
●Individual burning the tyre will produce poisonous gas such as inferior sulfuric
acid. Please give it to the agency.
●The lubricating oil of engine is laid and does not be used. If it flows out and
permeates into the underground, or float on the water, it will cause the
environmental to be polluted. Please give it to the agency.
●Mix ethylene glycol in the anti-icing fluid can reduce the temperature of
freezing of the cooling liquid. If discharging it at will, it will cause water
pollution. Therefore, while changing the anti-icing fluid, please get in touch with
FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.
●Air conditioner Fluorine Lyons (CFCl2) that used for refrigeration discharges
into air, and make the ozone layer further worsen. Even so, substitute Fluorine
Lyons (HFCl34a) can still enable the global warming.
When the refrigeration result of the air conditioner is not good, besides dosing
refrigerant, check the gas whether leaks or not. If presenting this situation,
please dose refrigerant.

Speed

Urban Operating mode High Speed Operating mode

10 operating mode X 3 circulation

347
Maintenance 6
Vehicle Maintenance…………………………………………………………………….…349

Daily Maintenance…………………………………………………………………..………349

The Decorations Maintenance………………………………………………………………349

Maintenance of Equipments in the Car………………………………………………..……335

Check and Maintenance of the Tyre……………………………………………………...…357

Change of Key Battery…………………………………………………………………..….357

Check and Change of the Fuse…………………………………………………………..….361

Routine Check and Maintenance………………………………………………….….…..364

Relevant Items of Routine Check and Maintenance………………………………..…...…..364

Check and Maintenance of Engine Room…………………………………………….….....367

Check of Body Appearance………………………………………………………….……...330

Sitting on Driver Seat for Routine Check…………………………………………..….……371

Driving Check………………………………………………………………………...……..371

Maintenance Date……………………………………………………………………..…..317

Maintenance Date………………………………………………………………..……..…..317

348
 Vehicle Maintenance
Daily Maintenance

In order to make the vehicle keep esthetic and clean, the vehicle must be
maintained at ordinary times.
●Relevant items about washing car, using wax
Read the explanation that various articles attach in detail, and be sure to observe
its use and attentive matters.
●Please be waxed once per month
The automobile body is waxed once per month or the automobile body is waxed
once while dipping in water seriously.
● Relevant items about parking
Park in good ventilating garage and place with ceiling.
●Spray-print relevant items
●Collided and scratched problems by the flying stone are one of the reasons that
the automobile body is damaged. If finding, please go to FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Center to repair.
●While adhering to organic solvents such as the light oil and petrol, etc., it will
damage the automobile body and spray paint. Please polish it clean at once, and
wash the vehicle.
●, Please wash car immediately under the following situations

The following situations will spray paint and wear out

with higher speed, which forms the reasons why the
automobile body and spare parts are corroded .
●While going on the seashore.
●While going on road surface spreading snow-dissolving
pharmaceutical.
●While adhering coal tar, branches, birds droppings,
death insect.
●while going under the soot, fume, dust, iron powder, chemical material dropping
place.
●Dust, mud etc. serious pollution.

349
 The decorations maintenance
●Washing the car
Fully wash with water to remove the dust, then wipe water.
●Automobile body, running part, automobile body bottom, wash them from top
to bottom.
●The automobile body is washed and polished with the sponge and similar soft
thing.
●When being serious dirty, wash completely by washing agent of car and fresh
water.
●Water should be totally cleaned, and can't keep the moisture content at all.
●Using automatic machine to wash
●Park the car well and regain the rear-view mirror, and begin to wash in front of
the car.
●Once scratching, painting will tarnish, and probably wear out ahead of time.

350
Using high-pressure machine to wash
●Please don't put spray nozzle to be excessively closed to door glass. If being too
closed, water may enter car because of overhigh water pressure.
●Please don't let the spray nozzle be too closed to suspension. Because water
pressure is too high, if being too closed, it is apt to damage suspension parts.
●Please relieve the working state of preventing invasion sensor in theft-proof
device (see Pll9). Otherwise after measuring vibration or swinging, it can
automatically alarm sometimes.

●The Tyre Maintenance

●Use the sponge with the neutral detergent, polish the filth as soon as possible.
Because the wheel is easy to scratch, please don't wash with washing liquid
containing grinding agent and with hard brush.
●Please don't wash with the steam, and prevent the hot water from contacting the
wheel directly in case that the wheel would tarnish.
●While waxing
After washing the vehicle, the temperature of automobile body reduces (lower
than the body temperature), and then waxes.
●Glass with waterproof function
Waterproof membrane being coated on the previous door windowpane can
remove the rainwater on the door windowpane, which can keep the good visual in
the rainy day. In addition, it is easy to observe the rear by using the door
rear-view mirror that can get rid of the rainwater, and the back visual field is
good.

Attention There are certain limits in the duration of water droplet

proofing. In order to proof the water droplet for a long time,
be sure to observe the following items.
●When the previous door windowpane is filthy, please polish clean with the soft
wet cloth as soon as possible.
●The mud and other filth on the glass are obvious, after removing, and then hoist
351
or lower the front windowpane.
●While polishing the front windowpane, please don't use the glass cleanser
containing other impurity (the abrasive powder) and paraffin wax. In addition,
use the glass cleanser, while squirting the white fog, please polish with the wet
cloth.
●Using automatic washing machine to wash the car. Removing the filth of the
front door glass, and then wash the car.
●Please don't defrost with metal articles.
●Glass with removing water function is easily-consumed product. When the
result of removing the water is not good, it can repair for supplement. Please
contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center for details.

●Rear-view mirror with removing rainwater function

The hydrophilic membrane being on the surface of the door rear-view mirror with
removing rainwater function , which can make the water droplet affixed to
surface of the mirror form cloud, and is easy to observe the rear.
●While maintaining general maintenance, wash with water.
●As to a few water droplets such as the fine drizzle and light rain, the hydrophilic
result is bad.
●In the following occasions, lose the hydrophilic result temporarily, but can
resume gradually. If wanting to resume the hydrophilic result fast, use washing
agent of car and glass cleanser to wash, and then wash with a large amount of
fresh water.(Washing car agent and glass cleanser, some contain stone silicon
complex, please read its composition form carefully. )
·While polishing the dirt of the mirror.
·When it is foggy on the surface of the mirror
·While using the automatic car machine to wash
·Parking in the underground place with no sunshine for a long time.

352
Attention In order to keep the hydrophilic result for a long time, prevent the door
rear-view mirror from damaging, be sure to observe the following
attentive matters.

●Please don't use water-excluding pharmaceutical (which contains silicon) and

oil-film wiping lotion (which contains compound spraying pharmaceutical).
In addition, when the door glass and automobile body use water-removing
pharmaceutical, oil-film wiping lotion, and paraffin wax, Please wrap up the
rear-view mirror with the towel, in case that materials described above are
glued on the rear-view mirror.
If the automobile affixes materials described above, it should first be cleaned
by washing pharmaceutical of car and glass cleaner, and then rinsed well with
a large amount of fresh water (In order to know whether car-washing
pharmaceutical and glass cleaner contain silicon complex, please read their
composition form carefully)
●When the door rear-view mirror is frozen, don't wipe it with plastic boards, but
should start the rear-view mirror heater of the door, or melt the ice with warm
water.
●Please polish the door rear-view mirror with the clean towel.

Warning Engine room does not enter water.

● The electric part in the engine room mustn’t be stained with water. If it is
touched with water, it will influence the engine to start, and cause short
circuit of electric pieces, and it is apt to lead to the vehicle fires.
●While washing the car in cold season, please notice not to let water contact the
brake directly.
After water enters the braking device, it is apt to be frozen, thus influencing
the efficiency of the braking seriously. Sometimes it even blocks the brake,
making it unable to function properly.
●After washing the car, step on the brake pedal lightly to confirm whether the
brake works normally.
The filler block of the brake making moist, will also influence the efficiency
of the braking seriously. When damp filler block of the brake of one side can
not work, operating steering-wheel may cause accidents.

353
 Attention
While washing the vehicle, please don’t damage the
vehicle.

●While washing car skirt and the following parts, please be careful not to injure
your hands.
●While washing car, please don't brush with hard brush and broom, otherwise it
will damage paint.
●Don't polish the surface of car light lens with organic solvents such as paraffin
wax, light oil, petrol, and so on. Never polish them with hard brush. Otherwise it
may cause damage, and wear out with higher speed.

354
 Maintenance That is Equipped in the car
●Cleanness of Cab
The available vehicle cleans the utensil and electronic dust catcher and removes
the dust, can also polish gently with the cloth that contains water or warm water.
Warning Payattention
attentiontotowaterproof
waterproof
Pay in in cab.
cab.

●While sweeping and driving the indoor hygiene, don't sprinkle water. Front-seat
seat floor cloth have front-seat side safe gasbag, SRS of seat, buy line, if sprinkle
water, may cause the safe gasbag of front-seat seat SRS side and can't work
normally, Even cause danger. In addition, if stereo electric one of cushion enter
water, may cause the vehicle trouble, even lead to the vehicle fire.
●While cleaning the safety belt of seat, please don't use organic solvents such as
the light diesel oil, petrol, etc. In addition, don't bleach or dye in bringing into the
conduct safely either. Otherwise, may reduce the performance of the safety belt
of seat, can't give full play to the function of restraining while colliding, the great
injury of jeopardizing the life even. Before not doing, don't wear the safety belt.

Please pay more attention to the composition of detergent

●Maintain it while equipping in the car, don't use organic solvents such as the
light diesel oil, petrol, etc. and acid or alkaline solvent. Otherwise may cause and
change color and pollute. In addition, some contain the following compositions,
please use after confirming in detail in various detergent.
●Notice that let liquid aromatic overflow, because the compositions included are
different, cause all chromasis and pollute easily, even cause and paint mottledly.
●While cleaning one in the windowpane of back door, don't use the glass
detergent, otherwise may cause the heating wire to break, the doors and windows
are eliminated after causing. While cleaning, please polish gently with the cloth
which contains water or warm water along the direction of the heating wire.
●While cleaning the glass inboard of the door, don't use the granulous cleanser.
Can polish gently with the cloth which contain water or warm water.
●While cleaning the glass (the inboard of the compartment) with aerial, please
355
polish gently with the cloth that contains water or warm water. Don't use articles
such as the glass detergent, etc., otherwise may damage the aerial.

●The use and maintenance method of the genuine leather seat

■General maintenance method
1 Will wash the neutral or slightly alkaline detergent used for wool products,
will dilute into 5% of the aqueous solution, and dip in clear aqueous solution
with soft cloth such as the gauze.
2 Tighten the cloth with purified water, wipe the residues detergent on the
surface of seat.
3 Wipe seat moisture of surface with dry soft cloth, in ventilate good back dry.

If the surface of seat remains too much moisture, will cause

Attention the leather to harden, shrink. of seat remains too much
moisture, will cause the leather to harden, shrink.

General Knowledge

The use and maintenance method of the genuine leather seat

The maintenance of the genuine leather seat maintains, had better use the
special-purpose detergent. Genuine leather seat detergent, can purchase in FAW
Hongqi Sales and Service Center, or get in touch with FAW Hongqi Sales and
Service Center.
Relevant items of genuine leather seat
This car adopts the genuine leather seat, uses the natural material selected strictly.
●It is natural material because of using, so the spot that the surface of leather
does not level the surface sometimes and cow hide have.
●In order to keep appearance quality for a long time, had better safeguard to
maintain regularly.
·When the surface of seat glues objects such as sand one, dust, etc., will
probably damage the protection membrane of the surface of leather, cause and
excessively wear and tear. Please suck it with the dust catcher.
356
 ·If leather is exposed in hot weather for a long time, may fade and harden.
Park, at hot weather, please cover automobile body car, protect with the sun
shade for a long time, in case that the leather is shone by the sunshine.

Checking and Maintenance of the tyre

●Tyre changing positions
For enable each wearing and tearing of tire evenly, lengthen life-span its, must
replace the tire at going 10,000km.
●While using jacks to change the position of tire, should change a tire among
them with the spare tyre.

Front wheel

Rear wheel

Spere tire

Attention Must check the tire every day as maintaining at ordinary times.

●Daily examination should be checked the tyre.(See P43 about tyre attentive
items)
●Change the installation nuts of tyre, wheel, please contact with FAW Hongqi
Sales and Service Center.(see P49 “other attentive items”)
●Must carry on the initializing and adjusting of atmospheric pressure of the tire
while changing the position of tire。

The replacement of key battery

● Method of replacing the key battery

357
 Mechanical Key
1 First，take out the machinery key.
The direction stirs the lock catch, pull out the key
Key Catch according to the show of arrow point in the picture.

Key Box Cover 2 Open the key cover.

The direction stirs the lock catch, open the key box
Key Catch

cover according to the show of arrow point in the

picture.

Battery Cover

3 Take down the battery cover.

Back out the screw (2), take down the battery to cover.

Screw

4 Change the battery.

Battery Take out the old battery, install the new battery up in
anodal direction.
5 Install battery cover.
Confirm that covers the battery to fix with the screw (2)
Ring
according to the former state after packing the battery
into the O ring.

6 Install the box cover.

Move lock catch along the arrow point direction,
Key Cover

install the box cover.

Key Catch

358
 Key Catch 7 Install mechanical key.
Move lock catch along the arrow point direction, put the
mechanical key well.
8 Confirm the working state.
Key

Press any switch, confirm LED bright light situation on

the car body.

●★Battery changing with the core type key

1 Use and open the battery to cover with the

truncate screwdriver with parcel of plastics。

2 Take out the micromodule from the key frame.

3 Open and take down the battery case lid

with the coin.

4Take out battery that needs to change, then pack

new battery up into positive pole (+).

359
5 Install the battery case lid, then pack the package into the key frame, close and
cover.

Change the battery, check whether the key is operated normally. If key can
normal running, it can contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center.

360
 Attention
Pay attention to the battery and its parts

●While changing the battery, pay attention to not losing spare parts such as the
screw, etc..
●While installing the battery, should pay attention to positive pole of the battery
and negative pole.
●Don't curve the battery electrode, don't glue dusts and greasy dirt.
●Don't take out internal parts such as the base plate, etc.

Warning It is a must to pay special attention to preventing children

swallowing the battery or package
General Knowledge

Battery
The battery that the intellectual key uses is a lithium battery CR2032
Area lock core type battery that key uses a lithium battery CR2016
Please purchase in FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Center, watchmaker's shop,
camera shop.

checking and changing of the fuse

When the light is not bright and when the electric device does not work, it may be
that the filament is getting broken to come from the fuse. Please check in
following order, change the fuse.
●Relevant items of the fuse, please contact with FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Center.
●Opening Methods of fuse box
■Fuse box in the engine room
Take down the box cover while pinning the lock catch.

361
 Fuse Box

Lock catch

Fuse Box

Lock catch

Fuse Box

■Fuse box by the foot of driver

Stop the lock catch, draw outside directly, take

down the box cover.

Lock Catch

■ Fuse box near front-passenger seat

Stop the lock catch, draw outside directly, take

down the box cover.
Lock catch

Cover ■ Fuse box in the trunk

Take down the left apron in the suitcase.

●According to the lock catch, take down
Lock catch aprons.

362
●Checking and Changing Method of Fuse
1 putting the power switch on OFF position.
2 Opening the fuse box
The fuse label is pasted on the fuse box.
3 Checking the fuse.
According to the trouble reason, confirm the fuse that should be checked
according to the explanation on the fuse label, check whether the fuse comes off
and fuses.
●Some fuses do not accord with the style specification.
●The fuse fuses in the fuse box B in the nacelle.
4 changing the fuse.
When the fuse fuses, can change into a fuse of the fixed capacity according to
the explanation of the fuse label.
●When the light is not bright, it may be that the bulb fuse.
●Under the following situations, please get to FAW Hongqi Sales and Service
Center to check.
·After changing the fuse, while fusing again
·After changing the fuse, when the electric system does not work yet
Burnt out Have not burnt out

Different fuse for different car type, so the figure is also different.

Warning Please don't use the fuse beyond the specification of regulation, otherwise the fuse is

probably overheated and burning out, even causes fire disaster.

363
 Daily Checking and Maintenance
Relevant Items about Daily Checking and Maintenance
Users have responsibility and obligation to check and maintain the vehicle at
ordinary times. Check, maintain, for some easy maintenance project, may go on
simple checking and is maintained before the long distance goes, wash the car,
refuel while being daily.
Introduce the content about checking and maintaining briefly below. Inspection
method and attentive matter while implementing, please read: " service manual ".

The checking and maintenance of the engine room

Engine lubricant filling hole Engine vernier scale

Batter Engine vernier scale
Engine lubricant filling hole
Brake fluid storage tank
Battery Brake fluid storage tank

Radiator Cover hole Washing liquid filling Washing liquid filling

Coolant liquid tank Radiator Cover hole hole
Coolant liquid tank(radiator assist water tank) Coolant liquid tank
Coolant liquid tank(radiator assist water tank)

Hongqi 430 Hongqi 300

Warning No tools and leftover of cloth left in the engine hood after
inspection, because that will cause the accident, moreover, the
high temperature in the engine hood will cause fire to the
vehicle.
Up limits
●Amount of the brake fluid

Upper
Check limits
whether the amount of the brake fluid is between the MAX and MIN in the

brake fluid header or not.

Lower limits

364
 Warning The shortage of brake fluid will reduce the braking effect,
so it is easy to lead to the accidents.

●Amount of the battery liquid level

The maintenance-free battery is introduced to the vehicle. The green

light shows in good condition，the red shows it needs charging, the

white shows battery changing is needed.

Upper limits In-time charging or change of battery is needed for battery low.
Lower limits

●Coolant amount

Check whether the coolant amount is between the upper and lower

Upper limits limit of the water tank

Lower limits

Attention Please do the routine check because the coolant shortage may erode the radiator or

damage the engine due to overheat. Besides, the water may freeze in the cold

season which will damage the radiator, so it is a must to use the best pH indicator coolant

●Amount of lube oil in the engine

Check whether the amount of lube oil in the engine is between the upper and

Upper limits
Lower limits lower limit of the oil scale.

365
 Warning The following items must be observed in order to avoid the
serious injury or burnt during the lube oil change.

●Engine stop。

Don’t touch or get close to the rotating parts such as the belt and fan during the engine is working, for that hands,

clothes or tools will be scrolled in, which will cause accident.

●Don’t check or change until the lube oil temperature of the engine gets low.

●The high temperature of the lube oil in the engine will cause burnt when the coolant temperature is high during

the engine stop.

Attention Check and change the lube oil of the engine periodically.

●The lube oil shortage or aging will cause the rotating parts deficient due to no periodical check and the sinter will
damage the engine. So the periodical check is needed.

●The engine lube oil has the effect of lubricating and cooling the inner parts of the engine, some lube oil in the
lubricating piston and inlet and exhaust valve will burn in the combustion chamber even in the normal driving,
moreover, the reducing of the oil differs with the driving conditions.

●No excessive lube oil should be added。

●Use the cloth pad during the check of the lube oil of the engine, no oil should come onto the engine. When the
oil is added to the clothes, please clean it completely.

●Washing liquid for windscreen

Open the filling lid of the storage liquid tank to check whether the liquid

level is between the upper and lower limit

●Please add the washing liquid if the liquid level is close to the lower
Upper limits
limit.

Lower limits

366
 ●This storage liquid tank shares with the scrubber for the headlamp.

■Fill washing liquid

1 Open the lid

Open the filling cover of the washing liquid。

Cover
2 Fill washing liquid

Close the filling lid after filling。

Warning No washing liquid should be filled when the engine is too

hot
or working, for the ethanol in the liquid will cause fire to

Attention No soapsuds should be used to replace the washing liquid,

otherwise there will be the traces on the coating

Appearance check
●Tire pressure

Check the tire status of landing and before driving to see if the pressure is proper.

●Measure the tire pressure with barometer once per month。

●Adjust to the specified pressure when it is not in proper condition.

Not only the stability of the vehicle will be affected but also the tire will
be torn when the tire pressure is lower than the specified pressure. SW*
will cause crack to the tire even accidents during the high speed driving,
Warning Well adjust the inner tire pressure of the spare ones for daily *check.
* Going at a high speed, the tire presents the phenomenon out of shape of
wave shape.

367
 General Knowledge

Specified pressur Check if the pressure on the label

on the driver’s door is the specified pressure(see P320)

●Check the spare tire.

●Status of the tread landing in the specified pressure can be a reference

Tyre Pressure Mark

for the visual inspection.

●Crack and damage of the tire

Check no obvious damage and crack on the side Of the tire, no nails, sand or other things

in the tire.
Warning No damaged or cracked tires should be used.

●The steering wheel will shake or vibrate while driving with the abnormal tires ,besides, it will cause the
un-repairable damage to tires, or even sideslip.

Please check in FAW HONGQI Repair Centre if there is Abnormal shaking in driving

●The function can’t work well (fuel consumption、stability、braking distance) with the deficient tires, which is bad
for the components will cause accidents

●Depth of the tread pattern and abrasion

The wear position mark

Wear mark

368
 ※1 ※1
<eggabrasion mark> <egg：no abrasion mark>

Check if the tire ground contact has the abrasion mark(abrasion limit),in addition, check if there is one-side

abrasion.

※1The illustration is different from the actual situation.

Tires beyond the abration limit can’t be used. The tires with shallow tread
pattern and the abration mark(abration limit) will extend the braking
distance. The flashing water effect ※2 in rainy days will cause the
steering wheel unoperated or the tires cracked or even the accident.
Warning Change the tire as soon as possible when it is beyond the abration limit.
※2 When the vehicle exercises on the ponding road surface at a high
speed, there is separate aqueous layer between tire and road surface,
the tire fails to land, the steering-wheel and brake cannot function
well.

● Filth and damage on the lamp and steering indicator

No filth, damage and crack should be on the lens of different kinds of lamps。

General knowledge

Mist on lamp lens

The fog on the lens of the lamps during driving in the rain or car-washing is due to the difference in temperature

of the inner and outside of the lamp. It is same with the fog on the door glass in the raining days, and this is not

the function fault. But please check in the FAW HONGQI Repair Center when there is large drip or the water

logging in the lampshade.

369
 Routine check on the driver seat
●Distance of the parking brake pedal

Slowly and completely step on the brake pedal to see if the “cacha”

noise can stop within the standard range.

●Engine working

Check if there is abnormal noise during the engine start, idle speed and the rotating speed increase.

●Distance of the brake pedal

Step the brake pedal completely during the engine start, and then

check the gap between the pedal and the ground(see P137),and check

if there is abnormality for the contact sense of the pedal. In addition,

check if the brake alarming light (red)is lighting after stepping on and

off the brake pedal.

●Spraying condition of the scrubber for the

door glass

Start the engine and the scrubber for the door glass is working .Check

whether the spaying direction and the height is within the working area

of the wiper.

370
●Brushing status of the wiper

Start the engine, door glass is got wet by the scrubber, then check

whether the working status such as :intermittent working, low-speed

working, high speed working, temporary working are working well, the

brushing is good.

●Working status of the lamps and the steering indicator

Start the engine to make the lamp devices and steering indicator work, then check if it is lighting, flickering and

the intensity is good.

Driving check

●Braking efficiency of the brake

Check whether it is in good braking and if there is one-side braking during normal driving.

The continuous gasping noise from the brake during driving

shows that the filler block of the brake is beyond service,
Warning please check in the FAW HONGQI Repair Centre. Continue
driving after the alarm of the brake may damage the Filler
block and the parts of the brake, and the dramatically reduced
efficiency of the brake will lead to accident.

●Low speed and speed-up of the engine

Park the vehicle to check if there is racing and non-working during driving, then check if the speed-up is smooth
when step on the oil.

●Check the abnormal parts

Check if the abnormal parts deficient yesterday will affect the normal working .

371
Maintenance data
●Criterion

Item Maintenance data

Clearance(mm) 1～2

Brake pedal
(No vacuum)

Clearance with bottom (mm) (Tread force 200N{20kgf}) Above 86

(engine is ON)

Parking brake Pedal distance(notch)(mm) 5～7

(Tread force 300N{30kgf})

V-shape belt flexibility(mm) Don’t need adjustment

●Power of lamp

Item Maintenance data

Headlamp

●High beam(halogen)

Except for the night-vision ones………………………60W(Lamp HB3)

Vehicle with night-vision…………………………….55W(Lamp Hll)

●Low beam(discharging)……………………………..35W(Lamp D2S)

Lamp Power Fender lamp…………………………………………..5W

Front fog light……………………………………… 51W(Lamp HB4)

372
 Front steering pilot lamp with emergency flicker……………21 W (Orange)

Side steering pilot lamp with emergency flicker…………… 5W (Orange)

Rear steering pilot lamp with emergency flicker……………21 W (Orange)

Back lamp…………………………………………………..16W

License lamp…………………………………………….…..5W

Back fog light……………………………………..…………21W

Front in-car light★…………………………………….……8W

Spotlight……………………………………………….……5W

Reader lamp……………………………………………..…. 8W

Trunk lamp………………………………………………….3.8W

Dressing lamp……………………………………………….8W

Gating lamp…………………………………………………5W

●Capacity and category of the oil

Item Capacity（L） Model Brand recommendation

1 0.7(HQ430) original FAW HONGQI 430/300

coolant

373
 9.1(HQ300) Concentration 30％-l2℃

- Concentration 50％-35℃

Differential 1.35(HQ430) Synthetic，API GL-5， original FAW HONGQI differential gear

gear oil 1.15(HQ300) oil

SAE 75W-90

430/300

Brake fluid - SAE Jl 703 r original FAW HONGQI brake fluid

FMVSS N0.116 DOT3 430/300

Change amount
Item Lube model Brand recommendation
Before filter change When filter change

4.5(HQ430) 5.1(HQ430) API SL，EC/ILSAC GF-3，

Original FAW
Engine
SAE5W-30 or 5W-20 or HONGQI lube
lube 5.9(HQ300) 6.3(HQ300)
430/300
10W-30

Item Brand Remark

Automatic Original FAW HONGQI 430/300 ATF WS Change Automatic transmission liquid only

transmission liquid in necessary conditions

※For more detailed information please contact FAW HONGQI Repair Centre.

374
■Specified engine lube

You’d better use the SL/EC、SJ/EC or ILSAC engine lube confirms to API standard.

In addition, I LSAC standard oil barrel has the ILSAC CERTIFICATION mark.

ILSAC CERTIFICATION

Logo

·Apply the proper oil base on the following table.

● Fuel quantity and category

Item Capacity [L](reference) Specified model

Fuel(tank)
70 Size 95 or above high-quality lead-free oil

375
●Capacity of the liquid storage tank for window glass and headlamp clean

Item Capacity [L](reference)

Liquid storage tank for window glass and headlamp clean 4.7

●Specification of the tires and the wheels

Tire size

Wheel rim size P.C．D. Offset

Item

(aluminium wheel)

215/55R 1793 W 17×7JJ 11 4.3×5 holes

Standard
45
tire

●Tire pressureunit：kPa (kgf/cm2)

160km/h or above Under l60km/h

Tire size
Front wheel Rear wheel Front wheel Rear wheel

215/55R17 93W 270(2.7) 330(3.3) 220(2.2) 220(2.2)

Torque of the wheel nut：Approximately l05 N·m

●Vehicle model

Item Country China

Body four-door saloon car

Level Z(HQ430) Q(HQ300) S(HQ300)

UZS
Model GRS l82L—EETQKC GRSl82L—EETSKC
l80L—EFTZKC

Driving FR(Rear-wheel FR(Rear-wheel FR(Rear-wheel

376
 driving) driving) driving)

Size length mm(in．) 4965(195.5) 4965(195.5) 4965(195.5)

and Total size width mm(in．) 1795(70.7) 1795(70.7) 1795(70.7)

weight Height mm(in.) 1485(58.5) 1485(58.5) 1485(58.5)

wheelbase mm(in．) 2850(112.2) 2850(112.2) 2850(112.2)

Front ((nmm ．) ) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4)

Tread
Rear mm(in．) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4)

length mm(in．) 2070(81.5) 2070(81.5) 2070(81.5)

width mm(in．) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4) 1535(60.4)

Space 1200(47.2)， 1200(47.2)， 1200(47.2)
Height mm(in．)
1145(45.1)* 1145(45.1)*

Suspension Front mm（in．) 865(34.1) 865(34.1) 865(34.1)

Rear mm(in．) 1250(49.2) 1250(49.2) 1250(49.2)

Min. ground clearance mm(in．) 150(5.9) 150(5.9) 150(5.9)

Front kg(1b) 1020(2249) 985(2172) 970(2138)

Total
Rear kg(1b) 1140(2513) 1130(2491) 1080(2381)
weight
Total kg(1b) 2160(4762) 2115(4663) 2050(4519)

Volume of fuel tank L(Imp．gal．) 71(15.4) 70(15.4) 70(15.4)

Volume of trunk m3(cu．ft．) 0.43(15.2) 0.43(15.2) 0.512(18.1)

3UZ—FE(gasoline 3GR—FE(gasoline 3GRFE(gasoline

Engine model
engine) engine) engine)

Valve 32 valves，DOHC 24 valves，DOHC 24 valves，DOHC

377
Engine 91.0×82.5 87.5 × 83.0 87.5×83.0
Diameter×distance

mm(in．)
(3.58 ×3.25) (3.44 × 3.27) (3.44×3.27)

Displacement cm3(cu．in．) 4292(261.9) 2995(182.8) 2995(182.8)

compression ratio 10.5 10.5 10.5

Fuel system EFI EFI EFl

octane number or cetane number

95 or higher 95 or higher 95 or higher
(diesel)

Max. output power(EEC) kW/

206/5600 170/6200 170/6200
rotational speed

Max. torque(EEC)
430/3400 300/4400 300/4400
N·m/ rotational speed

Battery power(5HR) voltage ＆

12—65 12—65 12—65
current
Engine
Output power of alternator W. 1 560 1800 1800

Output power of starter kW 2．O 1.7 1.7

*：with skylight

378
Deal with emergency7

Tools, spare tire………………………………………………………………380

Location of jack, tools and spare tires……………………………………..…380

Methods for taking jack, tools and spare tires out……………………………382

When vehicle breakdown……………………………………………………382

When it can’t work…………………………………………………….……..383

Blowout Change the Tyre…………………………………………………384

Methods for Tire changing……………………………………………….…..384

When tire and wheel change……………………………………….….……..391

When the battery in low power…………………………………….….…..393

Definition……………………………………………………………………..393

Overheat……………………………………………………………………..397

Definition…………………………………………………………………..…397

Traction……………………………………………………………..…..……400

When Tractionis is needed……………………………………………………400

Emergency Treatment Measures……………………………………………403

Deal with the emergency based on the following items without worry……….403

379
 Tools, spare tires
Location of jack, tools and spare tires

Pad

Wheel bolt torque spanner

Draw Hook

Jack

Jack handle Spare tyre

380
Put the jack, tools and spare tires in the trunk。

Confirm the category of tools and using methods of the jack for emergency.

WarningPut back the tools and jack after use

●Put back the tools and jack after use because they may cause accident when left in the cab.

●Designed for vehicle Jack is a special tool for this vehicle, and it can’t be applied to other vehicle, and improper

operation will cause accident.

Attention Jake of the car shoud be used for changing tyre, never use it for
any other things

381
 Methods for taking jack, tools and spare tires out
Methods for taking jack, tools out

Loose part A of the jack, then take out the jack.

Loose
■Put back

Put the jack on the bracket, then fix part A.

Tightening
Bracket

Spare tire

●Methods for taking out the spare tires

1 Demount cushion and storage box in the trunk.(see P249)

2 Take out the spare tires.

Wring left to demount the handle and take out the spare tire.

■Put back
Handle
Operate in reverse direction of spare tire taking out。

●Confirm the spare tire is locked.

●If the aluminum wheel is used, make the decoration side of the wheel downwards.

Attention Spare tires must be checked and no deficient tires should be used. Adjust the tire
pressure according to the label on the door or the specified pressure in P313.

382
When vehicle breakdown
When vehicle

Breakdown on road

Park near the Road due to the breakdown while using the danger alarm

light(see Methods for using the danger alarm light switch in P166)in order to

alarm other vehicles.

Please place a triangle warning board or turn on the parking indicator behind

the vehicle when the breakdown happens on the expressway or auto special

road.(It is the duty of citizens to do like this)

When it can’t work

●It can’t work at intersection

Adjust the gearlever to ,and ask for help to move the vehicle to a safe
place.

Press the switch for abnormality at the crossing immediately if it can’t

move due to the disengagement of the tire.

●Can’t work on Road

Adjust the gearlever to ,and ask for help to move the vehicle to a safe
place.

●Please consult the FAW Hongqi Sales and Service Centre if it can’t be

solved on site.

● Please read Network for maintenance and service/user consultation in Service Manual.
383
Blowout Change the tyre
●Before changing the tire change

1 Move the vehicle to a flat place

Move the vehicle to a flat place which can’t affect the traffic and can also work safely.

2 Step on the parking brake

3 Engine stop

Adjust the gearlever to ,then stop the engien

4 Indicate that the vehicle is stopped

Use the danger alarm light if necessary, present the triangle warning board(or parking indicator)when all the

passengers are off and the luggage is demounted.

5 Preparation for jack, handle of the jack and torque wrench for the wheel nut.

See P322.

6 Preparation for the tire stop dog.

Co-use the tire stopper during the use of the jack.

The tire stopper can be bought in the FAW Repair Centre, and please contact the related issues here. Moreover, the

big stone can be a substitute if there is no tire stopper.

7 Preparation of the spare tire.

See P323.

●Methods for tire change.

384
 1 Fix the tire.

Resist the tire with a tire stopper diagonally.

Fix the rear wheels when the front wheels are lifted, and fix the front wheels when
Tyre Retainer the rear wheels are lifted(The rear wheel condition shows in the picture)

2 Loosen the nuts.

Wring left the nut with a torque wrench for the wheel nut in the direction showed in

the picture until it can be done by hand.

3 Put the jack.

Put the jack on the flat and hard ground.

4 Set the jack.

Wring right part A of the jack, which should be under the rising position of the

body.

Nick 5 Fit the jack in the fixed lifting position(nick).

Adjust the jack near the lifting position of the spare tire to make sure

it is well fixed in the lifting position of the body.

Lifted position
hundle

385
 6 Install the handle of the jack.

Insert the handle to the end fent hole.

7 Rise the body with the jack.

Right wring the jack handle to make the tire be off the ground a little.

8 Demount the nut.

Left wring the fixing nut by hand to demount the tire.

9 Demount the tire.

Make the decoration side upwards when the aluminum wheel is

placed on the ground directly in order to avoid the damage.

386
 10 Install the spare tire.

Sheet guard part

Installation
●Clean the mounting surface of the back
side

plate and the inside of the wheel beforeinstallation.

●Clean part A and part B.

Wheel
Bolt on tire
Nut Pad
11 Wring the nut temporarily.

Right wring the nut temporarily to fix the tire .Get rid of the dust

on the mounting nut of the wheel, screw nut and the gasket inside.
Bolt

●Wring the nut to make the gasket touch the

wheel.

12 Get down the body.

Left wring the jack to get the body down.

Jack Handle

387
 13 Fix the nut.

Turn the nut right for 2-3 circles with the torque wrench in the direction showed

in the picture.

Torque:aboutl05N·m／1050kgf·cm.
Wheel bolt torque spanner

14 Put away the tools, jack and tires.

15 Check the tire pressure.

(See Maintenance data in P317)

16 Conduct initialization adjustment for the alarm device of tire pressure.

(See When tire and wheel change in P329)

388
 Warning
No driving after blowout

●Don’t drive if the tire is blowout, because at this time it will cause the traffic accident due to the unstable driving,

meanwhile it can easily damage the tire, the wheel, and the body. The spare tire should be immediately changed.

●Don’t be in the vehicle when the vehicle body is lifted by the jack, because once the jack is displaced you will be

pressed under the vehicle with serious injury or even death.

● Switch off the engine when the jack is used to avoid the injury to human because of the displacement of the jack

during the vibration of the engine.

● The below items must be noticed.

Otherwise, the vehicle is easy to be damaged, and the position of the jack will be shifted, which will cause the

serious injury to people.

·Park the vehicle in the flat place while using the jack, the tier stopper should be used on that diagonally to the jack

·Do not use the jack for the manned vehicles.

·Don’t place anything on the upper and bottom side of the jack when the jack is used.

·Confirm whether the jack is in the position of the lifting when the jack is used.

·The lifting height of the vehicle can make the tire change.

●Pay attention to the surroundings when lay down the vehicle in order to avoid trapping the operator and other

people.

● Check whether the installation nut of the wheel is fixed or not. Otherwise it can easily cause damage to the

wheel stud and the braking parts, even the removal to the wheel, which will lead to serious accident.
389
Use the torque wrench in FAW HONGQI Repair Centre to fix the nuts to standard after the tire is changed, torque:

approximately 105N·m(1050kgf·cm)

● Lubricant or grease can’t be used during the installation of the nuts and stud for the wheels. The blots and the

wheels can be damaged easily for excessive wring. The wheels are easily to separate during driving if the nuts are

loosened, which will cause accident.

● Please inspect in the FAW HONGQI Repair Centre if there are damages or crack on the

wheel studs、screw nuts or the stud hole of the wheel. The screw nut can’t be well fixed due to the damage and

crack, and the wheel will be separated, which will cause accident.

Torque Attention
wrench of the wheel nut well fitted to the screw nut

● The torque wrench of the wheel nut should be well fitted to the screw nut, otherwise the screw nuts will be easily

unhitched from the torque wrench, which will cause injury to people.

● The dust in the wheel wale and inside the wheel will cause the looseness of the wheel nuts which will lead to the

separation of the wheel from the vehicle. · The FAW specific nuts should be used during the fix of the aluminum

wheel, otherwise the loosened nuts during driving will cause the separation of the wheel from the vehicle. ·Don’t

use the torque wrench for braking to fix, otherwise the wheel studs can be easily broke.

●The damaged or the deformed screw nuts and the wheel can’t be used.

● Go to check the dynamic balancing in FAW HONGQI Repair Centre once the steering wheel and the body are

vibrancies after the tire change.

● Make sure the four tires are from the same model, the same manufacturer, the same brand and the same pattern

during the tires change.

390
 General knowledge
Initialization adjustment for the pressure alarming device of the tire

The initialization adjustment for the pressure alarming devices of the tire should be conducted when the tires, wheels

changed. For detailed information please refer to the next page.

When the tires and wheels changed

The initialization adjustment for the pressure alarming devices of the tire should be conducted when the tires, wheels

changed. Please operate according to the following orders.

● ●The initialization adjustment must be resettled when errors occurred during the initialization adjustment.

1. Move the vehicle to a safe place

Press the brake and switch off the power.

2 Adjust the air pressure of the tire

Adjust the air pressure of the four tires to specified value.

● Adjust according to the value specified on the label which is in the left side of the driver’s door.

3 Set the position of the power switch to location IG

4 Conduct the initialization adjustment.

391
Tyre pressure initialization
Adjustment has been accepted Press the adjustment switch until the left information is showed on the display.

Adjusting switch

Attention
A journey of driving is needed to detect the status of the tire pressure,
meanwhile no alarm indication to the tire pressure.

Attention
The air pressure of the tire should fit the specified value

●The air pressure of the tire in the normal conditions can not be detected just by adjusting the switch to do the

initialization adjustment. Even the air pressure is too low, the alarm indicator doesn’t light or the alarm indicator is

lighting when the air pressure is normal.

●The initialization adjustment can’t be done even by pressing the adjustment

Switch during driving.
●Please pay attention to the intelligent unlock switch on the right side of the adjustment switch. No wrongly press
on it.
●Under the condition of continuous press on the adjustment switch, the error
occurred on the system if there is no information on the display shows the air Pressure has been initialized. In
this case, please go to FAW HONGQI Repair
Center for a check.

●When electrical errors occur on the air pressure alarming system of the tire and
At the same time there is beep tone, the indicator of the main alarm(Refer to
P178)lights and the above information shows on the display.
·The alarm indication will not affect the normal driving, but you’d better check
in the FAW HONGQI Repair Centre.

392
When the battery is in low power
Definition

The low power battery refers to the following conditions

● The starter can’t work or work weakly, the engine can’t be started

●The head lamp is dimmer than the normal condition。

●The alarm has low voice or didn’t work。

●The starter can’t work。

●Methods

Use a rescue vehicle with 12V battery to start by connecting the subsidiary cable and the battery.

1 Connect the subsidiary cable。

Connect according to the following order。

①The positive electrode of the vehicle’s battery.

②The positive electrode of the rescue vehicle’s battery

③The negative electrode of the rescue vehicle’s battery

④HONGQI430 is grounded as per the follows，HONGQI 300 connected to the negative electrode of the vehicle’s

(with low power)battery.

393
Grounding point

Vehicle(With the low power)

Bracket

Other vehicle(Rescue vehicle)

2 Charging of the battery。

Start the rescue vehicle, keep the rotating speed for about 5 minutes for emergency measures to charge the vehicle

with low power when the rotating speed is sped up.

3 Start the engine of the vehicle with low power.

Check whether the subsidiary cables are well connected and then charge the battery if the engine still can’t started.

4 Dismount the subsidiary cables。

Dismount the subsidiary cables in the reversed direction of connection

394
 General Knowledge

Battery of the rescue vehicle

The battery configuration of the rescue vehicle should be better than that of the vehicle with low power, otherwise,

it isn’t favorable to starting the engine. In this case, the charging time of the vehicle with low power should be

prolonged.

●Avoid the battery in low power

●Don’t turn on the light、listen to the radio or CD when the power is off.

●Turn off the unnecessary electrical devices if there is a long time stop needed such as the traffic jam or others

during the working of the engine.

Warning
The battery should be kept off the fire.

●We must obey the following items.

Otherwise, the flammable gas generated by the battery can catch a fire, even

Explode, which will cause serious injury to people.

·④Don’t connect to the negative electrode of the vehicle’s (with low power)battery(see last page).Sparks will occur if it is

directly connected to the battery.

·The positive and negative electrode can’t be touched each other when connecting the subsidiary cables, otherwise

the sparks will occur.

·The battery should be kept off the fire.

●Keep off the battery during charging, sometimes the overflowed battery liquid with dilute sulfuric acid will cause

great damage to eyes and skin. Clean with enough water and go to see a doctor when it comes in your eyes.

●Keep off the fan or belts when connecting and dismounting the subsidiary cables, otherwise it will cause serious

accidents.

395
●The screw nut of the hoop must be well fixed when the battery is changed. Otherwise, the release of the hoop

during driving will lead to the

short circuit, which will cause the vehicle to catch a fire.

Attention
Apply 12V battery in the rescue vehicle

●Check the battery in the other vehicles(rescue vehicle)must be 12V.

●Please check in FAW HONGQI Repair Centre when the battery often in the low power condition.

General Knowledge

Anti theft devices

After the installation of the anti theft devices, the anti-theft alarming sometimes will start during the charging or

change of the battery, and the door will automatically locked, please use the wireless remote control key to relieve

the standby status. Don’t leave the key in the vehicle.

396
 Over-heat
Definition
Overheat conditions are as follows：

●The water thermometer is in the red warning area and power of

engine reduces.

●Vapor comes out of the hatch cover of the engine.

●Methods

1.Parking。

Park in a safety place and turn off the air conditioner

2.Confirm。

Confirm whether the vapor comes out of the hatch over of the engine.

(When there is no vapor comes out of the hatch over of the engine）

Reoperate the engine while opening the hatch cover of the engine

(When there is vapor comes out of the hatch over of the engine)

Stop the engine, open the hatch cover for ventilation after there is no vapor comes out, and then reoperate the

engine.

3 Confirm the cooling fan。

Confirm whether the cooling fan can work or not, if it doesn’t, stop the
Water cooling fan

397
 engine and consult the FAW HONGQI Repair Centre.

4 Stop the engine。

Turn off the engine if the water thermometer is in normal

5 Confirm the cooling amount。

Open the water tank cover of the radiator after the cooling down of the

engine to confirm the amount of water and whether the radiator center

is dirty or not.

Radiator Core
Water tank

6 Coolant supplement。

Please add the coolant if the it is short。

●Add water for emergency if there is no coolant。

7 Check in FAW HONGQI Repair Centre.

Check in the nearby FAW HONGQI Repair Centre as soon as possible.

●If the water temperature is increasing during driving, please control the temperature to the Max’s that the rising

of the water temperature can be controlled by the coolant in the air heater piping.

●Overheat prevention

Confirm the coolant amount to see if there is water leakage on the ground in the daytime, please refer to the

Service Manual.

398
 Warning

● Please don’t open the hatch cover of the engine until there is no vapor comes out, because the
high temperature in the hatch cover of the engine will seriously burn people.

●Please don’t open the radiator cover when the radiator and the water tank are still hot,
otherwise the overflowed vapor and hot water will cause serious injury to people. Please wrap
the radiator cover with cloth, and make sure don’t touch or get close to the fan and belt.

●Don’t touch or get close to the fan and belt when the engine is working, otherwise it will
cause serious burnt to people when the hands and clothes are engulfed into it.

Attention

No coolant added when the engine is overheated。Abrupt coolant added will damage the engine, so

the coolant can be added only

after the engine is completely cooled down.

399
 Traction

Traction
●When traction is needed

The tow hook in the vehicle is used to tracted by other vehicle, but not toTract other vehicle.
When the traction vehicle is needed, it is better to entrustto one FAW HONGQI Repair
Center. It is easy to have the errors on the drivingsystem especially in the following cases. So
please contact the FAW HONGQI RepairCentre first before the traction.

●It can’t drive even the engine is still working.

●There is abnormal noise。

1 Take out the tow hook and the torque wrench for the wheel

nuts(See P322)

2 Dismount the cover in one side of the driver seat。

Press the outside of the cover to make sure there is a gap, then

insert the screwdriver into the gap between the cover and the

bumper. Use the Screwdriver twisted with cloth at head to

Cover unclench the cover in order to avoid the damage to the bumper.

Draw hook

Wheel Bolt torque spanner

3 Install the tow hook with the torque wrench for the wheel nut

400
4 Hang on the rope。

Hang the rope on the tow hook and notice that the body can’t be damaged, and the traction vehicle must tract in

the front. A white strip of cloth( 0．3m×0.3m )should be tied in the middle of the rope.

Within 25m

Within 5m

White strap

Towing direction
5 Start the engine。

Try to start the engine, if not, place the power switch in ACC or IG location.

6 Vehicle starting。

Place the gear lever to N position，lift the control over parking brake。

7 Notice the vehicle in front。

Notice the braking light of the front vehicle in order to avoid the rope loosened.

Dismount the tow hook and close the bumper cover after the traction.

Carefully drive the tracted vehicle

●The tracted vehicle should be drove carefully. The engine is not in working condition which will affect the
brake, so the normal driving will cause the accidents.

●Don’t turn off the power. Otherwise the steering wheel will be easily locked and can’t operate, which will
cause accidents.

●The tracing vehicle should be derived steadily in order to avoid the fierce impact to the tow hook and the rope
due to the sudden starting, which will cause serious injury to the passersby.

401
 General Knowledge
Drove by the rescue vehicle on the long slope。

●Drove by the rescue vehicle on the long slop, otherwise the overheater of the brake will affect the braking.

●The driving speed should be within 30km／h, and traction distance within 80km,excessive driving speed 、the
distance traction 、or the reverse direction will damage the transmission. In this case, the specified transporter
should be used to avoid the landing of the wheels

●Don’t hang the rope on the suspension when the trapped vehicle is tracted by the other vehicle, which will
damage the cantilever

●Don’t use the wire rope which will damage the bumper.

●It is better to entrust FAW HONGQI Repair Centre to tract the trapped

※vehicle.Tracting with tow hook or hanging the rope on the suspension will damage thetow hook and the
suspension parts.

※Refer to the vehicle in lost motion or trapped on muddy road、sand-gravel pavement、snowy road

●The fixing hook is just used to fix the vehicle, and it can’t be used as traction which will damage the vehicle or
cause serious injury to people.

Fixing hook

402
Emergency treatment methods

Emergency treatment methods

1 Avoid the continuous accident。

Move the vehicle to a safety place, then turn off the engine.

2 Take emergency measures for the injured.

Take emergency measures

as much as possible before the arrival of the doctor and the

ambulance.Keep there if the head is serious injured. Move to a safe

place in order to avoid the following accidents.

Accident
3 Call the police。
Position
Situation
Wounded

4 Make a record of the name, address and telephone

number of the trouble maker。

5 Contact the distributor of the vehicle and the

insurance company.

403
Index

Index of the Chinese spelling…………………………………………………………409

Index of the alarming light……………………………………………………………409

404
 Index
Index of the Chinese spelling
Using methods of the vehicle lamp ………..186

When vehicle driving can’t be done…..…324

6 Super ECT……………………………………174

………………………………………………290

Open and close of vehicle door glass……97

Definition of ABS and braking aided
devices………………………………………..277 Open and close of the vehicle door………89

Working status of ABS and braking aided Adjustment of the rearview mirror ……l50
devices………………………………………..278
Maintenance of the equipment in vehicle ………303
Using method of AFS OFF switch(headlamp
system)……………………………………………..196
Inspection of the body appearance ……………313

Height adjustment of the shoulder of the safety

belt ………………………………….l43 Driving speed display………………18l

C h an g e t h e b at t er y o f t h e k ey … … … 3 0 5

Storage box……………………………………241
Check and update of the fuse…………………307
Preparation before driving………………..l4
M a i n t en a n c e r e q u i r e m e n t … … … … … … l 4
Using methods of the storage function………l29
Maintenance data……………………………317

Cup holder…………………………………248

Spare tire……………………………………323 Notice for the ABS with EBD and braking aided
devices…………………………………36

Operations with no key intelligent

system ………………………………………76 Seat with footplate ………………l33

Emergency treatment………..……………338 Ignition switch key with lock core……64

When the following cases happen………………79

Attention points if there are children in the

Reference ……………………………………255 vehicle………………….…………..…………24

Side door………………………………………91 Open and close of the electric trunk

lid…………………………..…………………l04

Operable front door airbag ………………243

405
Cigar lighter…………………………………246 Attention points for overheat……………47

Power socket…………………………………244

Using methods of the demister for rear windows and

the heater for the rearview mirror ……………l92

Function of EBD………………………………278
Sundries box in the back seats …………………240

Attention points for children seats………27

Using method s of th e h eater in th e b ack
seats…………………………………………l37

Rear sunshade curtain……………………250

Maintenance of the engine cabin…………….310

Switch of the engine hatch cover…………ll6

scheming journey pilot line mode………210

Engine shutdown devices……………………117

Attention for driving.……………………207

Anti-collision safety devices……………283

Switch of the filler cap……………………114

Notice for the anti-collision safety
devices …………………………………….…37
Attention points for refueling…………l6

Anti invasion sensor…………..……………119

Attention points for check and maintenance…42

Adjustment of the antidazzle in-car rearview …l49

Using methods of the light for emergency..……l94

Storage box for the side panel………………242

Lighting system……………………………252

Alarming………………………………………l76

Switch methods of the display function………l74 Alarm, warning and the alarming indication……82

Tire change ……………………………………325

When the wheels and the tires are changed……329

Using methods of the speaker…………..……l94
Using methods of the wiper and the scrubber
Refrigerator……………………………………247
for the windows and the glass……..……l90
Methods for opening the electrical trunk lid
Definition of overheat…………………..…333

406
by the intelligent function of the key…60 Application of the heater in the front
seats……………………………………………131
Methods for starting and stopping the engine by the
intelligent function of the key…63 Traction………………………………………335

Methods for switching the power by the intelligent Scrubber for the headlamp…………………l92
function of th e key ………………..……61
RSE(Rear seat entertainment system)……262
Methods for the door locking and unlocking by the
intelligent function of the key………57
Routine maintenance…………………………300

M ain t en an ce o f t h e ti r es ……… … ……3 04

Proceedings for routine maintenance……310

Definition of the air pressure alarming system of the

tires ……………………………….…284 Preparation before winter…………………289

Attentions for the tires…………………43 SRS Definition of the safety air-bag……266

Entrance lamp…………………………………245 SRS Principles of the safety air-bag……267

Definition of the ramp aided control S R S Wo r k i n g s t a t u s o f t h e s a f e t y

devices ……………………………….………282 air-bag……………………………………..…267

Starting methods……………………………l59 SRS Attention for the safety air-bag………32

Other functions………………………………73 Good disposal of the used parts, oil…297

Definition of the gas discharge head lamp…285 Application of the sound system………255

Front in-car light…………………………239 Clock……………………………………………243

Application of fuse switch in front wind laminated Sequential shifted automatic transmission……l53
glass……………………………………l93
TRC(traction controlled)Using methods of the OFF
Purpose of the front windscreen display…180 switch……………………………………195

Attention points for front wind screen Attention points for TRC、VSC……………37
display…………………………………………40
Definition of TRC……………………………281
Attention points for the jack…………46
Open and close of the skylight……………l01
The position of the jack, tools and spare
tire……………………………………………322 Parking ………………………………l61

How to take out the jack, tools and spare Adjust the front seats……………………l24
tires……………………………………………323
407
Adjust the headrest…………………………l35 Attentions for the cruising devices……40

Adjust the seats………………………………l35

Image display…………………………………183
Ashtray…………………………………………245

Definition of VSC……………………………280
Notice the vehicle exhaust…………………23

Maintenance of the outer parts……………300

Night-vision system…………………………l82

Using methods of microcomputer memory

preliminary adjustment driving position Attention for night-vision system………40
device………………………………….…l27
Panel……………………………………………l63
Driving for environmental protection……295
Clothes hood…………………………………246
Using methods of the fog light……………l88
Coin box………………………………………243
System initialization………………………236
Fix the children seats with the fixing rod or fixer
During driving………………………………291 which confirm to the ISO FIX ………………146

Abnormal situation during driving………20 Fix with the safety belts………………144

Luggage net……………………………………254 Attention points for emergency……………47

Trunk…………………………………………l05 Driving in the rain…………………………288

Sundries box in the trunk………………249 Reader-lamp(adjustable)……………………24

Driving methods……………………l59 When the vehicle went wrong…………………324

Driving check………………………………316 Adjust the backseats in the front………l38

A t t en tio n p o in ts w h i l e d r iv i n g … … … …l 7 Sun visor……………………………………238

Definition of the battery in low power…33l Well take the safety belts…………………l39

Attentions for the battery…………………45 Attention for intelligent entrance and braking
system………………………………40

Something needed to know…………………80

Intelligent key………………………………54

Cruising information display……………l75

Function of the Intelligent key……………7l

408
Wireless control function of the Intelligent Attention for automatically road-block…38
key…………………………………………….111
Function of the information display……l74
Indicator light and alarming light………166
Vertical parking aided mode………………222
Parking aided pilot line mode………………215
Function of the safety belts………………275
Attention for parking ………………………22
Application ways of the safety belts……l41
While parking……………………….........……292
Attention points for the safety belts……29
Manipulation while parking…………………204
Switching regulator on the seats…………l34
Using methods of the parking brake pedal…l62
Attention points for the
Adjustment of the steering wheel…………148 seats………………………………26

Using methods of handle for steering Routine check on the driver seat…………315
indication ……………………………………l89

Auto-Answer system(Anti-theft system)…118

Engine alarm light l69

SRS Safety airbag／Alarm light of the pre-tensioner 170

Alarm light for charging 170

Alarm light for power steering 170

ABS and alarm light for braking aided devices 171

409
Alarm light for braking 171

Alarm light for fuel shortage l72

Alarm light for night view 172

Alarm light for the bad shut of the door l73

Alarm light for not taking the safety belts on the driver seat 173

Alarm light for not taking the safety belts on the passenger seat. 173

Main alarm light l76

410